HISTORY

Model Name : KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1 SERVICE MANUAL Part No. : 9-872-762-01 When clicking an item, it’s detail is displayed. Date 2005.8 SUPP./CORR. – NEW Description of SUP/COR Change of main text –

SERVICE MANUAL
MODEL –––––– COMMANDER DEST. CHASSIS NO. –––––––––––– ––––– ––––––––––– MODEL ––––––

SP-1 CHASSIS
COMMANDER DEST. CHASSIS NO. –––––––––––– ––––– –––––––––––

KDS-R50XBR1 KDS-R50XBR1 KDS-R50XBR1 KDS-R60XBR1 KDS-R60XBR1 KDS-R60XBR1

RM-Y914 RM-Y914 RM-Y914 RM-Y914 RM-Y914 RM-Y914

USA CANADA MEXICO USA CANADA MEXICO

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1

RM-Y914

SXRD PROJECTION TV

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

Specifications
Projection System SXRD Panel Projection Lens Antenna Lamp Television System 3 SXRD Panel, 1 lens projection system 0.61 inch SXRD panel 6,220,800 pixels (2,073,600 × 3) High Performance, large diameter hybrid lens F2.5 75 ohm external terminal for VHF/UHF UHP lamp, 120W, XL-5100 NTSC ATSC (8VSB terrestrial) QAM on cable Visible Screen Size (picture measured diagonally) Channel Coverage KDS-R50XBR1: 50 inches KDS-R60XBR1: 60 inches Terrestrial (analog) Cable TV (analog) Terrestrial (digital) Power Requirements Inputs/Outputs HDMI IN Cable TV (digital) 120V, 60 Hz 2 total American TV Standard ATSC compliant 8VSB ANSI/SCTE 07 2000

2-69 1-125 2-69 1-135

Video: 1080i, 720p, 480p, 480i Audio: Two channel linear PCM 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz, 16, 20 and 24 bit

Video (IN) S Video (IN)

3 total (1 on front panel) 3 total (1 on front panel)

Audio (IN) Component Video Input

6 total (1 on front panel) 2 (YPBPR)

1 Vp-p, 75 ohms unbalanced, sync negative Y: 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms unbalanced, sync negative C: 0.286 Vp-p (Burst signal), 75 ohms 500 mVrms (100% modulation) Impedance: 47 kilohms Y: 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms unbalanced, sync negative PB: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms PR: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms Mini jack Mini jack 500 mVrms at the maximum volume setting (Variable) 500 mVrms (Fixed) Impedance (output): 2 kilohms

CONTROL S (IN) CONTROL S (OUT) AUDIO OUT (VAR/FIX)

1 1 1

–2–

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

Other Information
PC IN i.LINK RF Inputs Digital Audio Optical Output (PCM/Dolby Digital) CableCARD Slot Speaker Output Dimensions (W H D) Mass Power Consumption In Use In Standby In i.LINK/CableCARD Standby Supplied Accessories Remote Control AA (R6) Batteries Operating Instructions Quick Setup Guide Warranty Product Registration Card 240 W 0.5 W Less than 30 W RM-Y914 2 supplied for remote control 1 1 1 1 D-sub 15-pin, analog RGB, 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms, positive 3 total (1 on front panel) 2 1 PCMCIA Type I/II 15 W (L), 15 W (R) KDS-R50XBR1 1,453 × 863 × 47 8 mm (57 1/4 × 34 × 18 7/8 inches) KDS-R60XBR1 1,674 × 1,009 × 514 mm (66 × 39 3/4 × 20 1/4 inches) KDS-R50XBR1 43kg (94 lb. 13 oz.) KDS-R60XBR1 51kg (112 lb. 7 oz.) 4-pin S400 i.LINK terminal Optical Rectangular (1)

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

–3–

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

Indicators
Screen

POWER/STANDBY

POWER
LAMP
STD/DUO

TIMER

Indicators

The indicators show the current status of your TV. If there is a change in the condition or a problem with the TV, the indicators will flash or light up in the manner described below to let you know that it requires your attention.
Indicator POWER/ STANDBY flashing Flashing because... Green The lamp for the light source is preparing to turn on. When it is ready, it turns on. Red The lamp door or the lamp is not securely attached. The red indicator will continue to flash in intervals of three blinks at a time until the lamp door or the lamp is placed correctly. The red indicator is on when i.LINK STANDBY is on or when your TV is in the PC power saving mode. The projection lamp has burned out. Replace it with new one (see page 5 ). When one of the timers is set the indicator will remain lit (will not flash) even when the TV is turned off.

LAMP indicator flashes TIMER indicator is lit

Projection Lamp

Your TV uses a projection lamp as its light source. As with any lamp, it has limited life and needs to be replaced when the Lamp indicator flashes or the screen becomes darker. Note the following: After turning on your TV, it may take a while (1 minute or less) before the picture appears. When the projection lamp wears out, the screen goes dark. Replace the lamp with a new Sony XL-5100 replacement lamp (not supplied).
The light emitted from the lamp is quite bright when your TV i s in use. To avoid eye discomfort or injury, do not look into the light housing when the power is on.

–4–

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

Replacing the Lamp
The projection lamp, which illuminates the picture, has a limited life. If the screen becomes dark, the color looks unusual, or the LAMP indicator on the front of the TV flashes, this indicates the lamp needs to be replaced with a new one (not supplied).
WARNING Electric appliances can cause fire or high temperature, resulting in injury or death. Be sure to follow the instructions below.

Use a Sony XL-5100 replacement lamp (not supplied) for replacement. Use of any other lamp may damage the TV. Do not remove the lamp for any purpose other than replacement. Doing so may cause injury or fire. Do not put flammable materials and metal objects inside the lamp receptacle of the TV after removing the lamp. Doing so may cause fire or electrical shock. Do not touch the lamp receptable once the lamp has been removed. When the lamp eventually burns out, you may hear a noticeable “pop” sound. This is normal and it is inherent to this type of lamp. In rare instances, the bulb may pop inside the lamp unit, but the lamp unit is designed to contain all of the broken glass pieces inside the lamp unit. The lamps contain mercury. For proper disposal of the used lamps, follow and observe the local ordinances. See page 107.

–5–

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

How to Replace the Lamp

1 2 3

Turn off the power on the main unit. Wait several minutes, then unplug the power cord. (The cooling fan will continue to operate for about two minutes after turning the power off.) Wait at least 30 minutes after unplugging the power cord to allow the lamp to cool down before replacing it. To avoid being burned, do not touch the lamp receptacle once the lamp has been removed. Take the new lamp out of its package. Do not touch the glass portion of the new lamp.
Do not shake the lamp. Vi bration can damage the lamp or shorten its life. Avoid touching the front glass of a new lamp or the glass of the lamp receptacle. This may reduce picture quality or lamp life.

4

Turn the screw with a screwdriver counterclockwise and remove the outside lamp cover.

5

Pu ll out the lamp. Place your index finger through the hoop of the lamp handle and pull it upwards, while placing your thumb on the dent on the top. Then pull the lamp out.

The lamp is very hot after use. Never touch the glass portion of the lamp or the non-designated surrounding parts (shown in gray). After the used lamp has cooled, place it into the empty box of the replacement lamp. Never put the used lamp into a plastic bag.

(Continued)

–6–

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

6

Place the lamp halfway in. Follow the gutter in the compartment to mount the new lamp securely.
Hold this part of the lamp

The lamp compartment is tilted, as shown in the following illustration.

7

Slide it in slowly by pressing the PUSH part of the front corners of the lamp until it stops with a firm clicking sound to lock.

PUS

H

PUS

H

To ensure the lamp is securely installed, press the area marked PUSH before closing the lamp cover. If the lamp is not securely reattached, the self-diagnostic function may be triggered and the POWER/STANDBY indicator flashes in red three times (see page 4 ).

–7–

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

8

Place the outside lamp cover back in its place. Turn the screw with a screwdriver clockwise and secure the cover.

Consult your Sony dealer for a Sony XL-5100 replacement lamp. Take great care when replacing the lamp or plugging in/unplugging the connecting cords. Rough handling may cause the TV t o fall, damaging the TV, the TV s tand and the floor. The used lamp

This product contains mercury. Disposal of this product may be regulated if sold in the United States. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance (http://www.eiae.org). Do not leave the used lamp near flammable materials or within the reach of children. Do not pour water onto the used lamp or put any object inside the lamp. Doing so may cause the lamp to burst.

For replacement lamp information visit: U. S. residents: http://www.sonystyle.com/tv/ Canadian residents: http://www.sonystyle.ca/tv/

–8–

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

SAFETY CHECK-OUT
( US model only )
After correcting the original service problem, perfom the following safety checks before releasing the set to the customer: l. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes and bridges. 2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are “pinched” or contact high-wattage resistors. 3. Check that all control knobs, shields, covers, ground straps, and mounting hardware have been replaced. Be absolutely certain that you have replaced all the insulators. 4. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement. 5. Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and recom mend their replacement. 6. Check the line cords for cracks and abrasion. Recommend the replacement of any such line cord to the customer. 7. Check the condition of the monopole antenna (if any). Make sure the end is not broken off, and has the plastic cap on it. Point out the danger of impalement on a broken antenna to the customer, and recommend the antenna’s replacement. 8. Check the B+ and HV to see they are at the values specified. Make sure your instruments are accurate;be suspicious of your HV meter if sets always have low HV. 9. Check the antenna temminals, metal trim, “metallized” knobs, screws, and all other exposed metal parts for AC leakage. Check leakage as described below. LEAKAGE TEST The AC leakage from any exposed metal part to earth ground and from all exposed metal parts to any exposed metal part having a return to chassis, must not exceed 0.5mA (500 microampers) . Leakage current can be measured by any one of three methods. 1. A commercial leakage tester, such as the Simpson 229 or RCA WT-540A. Follow the manufacturers’ instructions to usc these instruments. 2. A battery-operated AC milliammeter. The Data Precision 245 digital multimeter is suitable for this job. 3. Measuring the voltage drop across a resistor by means of a VOM or battery-operated AC voltmeter. The “limit” indication is 0.75V, so analog meters must have an accurate lowvoltage scale. The Simpson 250 and Sanwa SH-63Trd are examples of a passive VOM that is suitable. NearIy all battery operated digital multimeters that have a 2V AC range are suitable. (See Fig. A) HOW TO FIND A GOOD EARTH GROUND A cold-water pipe is guaranteed earth ground;the cover-plate retaining screw on most AC outlet boxes is also at earth ground. If the retaining screw is to be used as your earth-ground, verify that it is at ground by measuring the resistance between it and a coldwater pipe with an ohmmeter. The reading should be zero ohms. If a cold-water pipe is not accessible, connect a 60-l00 watts trouble light (not a neon lamp) between the hot side of the receptacle and the retaining screw. Try both slots, if necessary, to locate the hot side of the line, the lamp should light at normal brilliance if the screw is at ground potential. (See Fig. B)

To Exposed Metal Parts on Set

Trouble Light Ohmmeter AC Outlet Box AC voltmeter (0.75V)

1.5 µ F

1.5k Ω

Cold-water Pipe

Earth Ground Fig. B. Checking for earth ground. Fig. A. Using an AC voltmeter to check AC leakage.

–9–

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

CAUTION
These servicing instructions are for use by qualified service personnel only. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the operating instructions unless you are qualified to do so. WARNING!! AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER SHOULD BE USED DURING ANY SERVICE TO AVOID POSSIBLE SHOCK HAZARD, BECAUSE OF LIVE CHASSIS. THE CHASSIS OF THIS RECElVER IS DIRECTLY CONNECTED TO THE AC POWER LINE. SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY SHADING AND MARK ! ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS, EXPLODED VIEWS AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS PUBLISHED BY SONY. CIRCUIT ADJUSTMENTS THAT ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION ARE IDENTIFIED IN THIS MANUAL. FOLLOW THESE PROCEDURES WHENEVER CRITICAL COMPONENTS ARE REPLACED OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS SUSPECTED.

ATTENTION!! AFIN D’EVITER TOUT RISQUE DELECTROCUTION PROVENANT D’UN CHÁSSIS SOUS TENSION, UN TRANSFORMATEUR D’ISOLEMENT DOIT ETRE UTILISÉ LORS DE TOUT DEPANNAGE. LE CHÁSSIS DE CE RECEPTEUR EST DIRECTEMENT RACCORDÉ Á L’ALIMENTATION SECTEUR. ATTENTION AUX COMPOSANTS RELATIFS ÁLA SÉCURITÉ!! LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFIÉS PAR UNE FRAME ET PAR UNE MAPQUE ! SUR LES SCHÉMAS DE PRINCIPE, LES VUES EXPLOSÉES ET LES LISTES DE PIECES SONT D’UNE IMPORTANCE CRITIQUE POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DU FONCTIONNEMENT. NE LES REMPLACER QUE PAR DES COMPOSANTS SONY DONT LE NUMÉRO DE PIÉCE EST INDIQUÉ DANS LE PRÉSENT MANUEL OU DANS DES SUPPLÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY. LES RÉGLAGES DE CIRCUIT DONT L’IMPORTANCE EST CRITIQUE POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DU FONCTIONNEMENT SONT IDENTIFIES DANS LE PRÉSENT MANUEL. SUIVRE CES PROCÉDURES LORS DE CHAQUE REMPLACEMENT DE COMPOSANTS CRITIQUES, OU LORSQU’UN MAUVAIS FONCTIONNEMENT SUSPECTÉ.

– 10 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section –––––– Title –––– Page –––– 13 Section –––––– Title –––– Page ––––

1. SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ..................... 2. DISASSEMBLY
2-1. 2-2. 2-3. 2-4. 2-5. 2-6. 2-7. 2-8. 2-9. Rear Cover .......................................................... Terminal Bracket, D.C Fan ................................ Service Position .................................................. Pod Block Assembly, Antenna Switch .............. Digital Block Assembly ..................................... DC Motor SFF21C/C-NP ................................... Power Supply Block ........................................... Unit Cover Assembly, Lamp (R) Guide Assembly ............................................................ DC Motor SFF22A/C-NP .................................. 2-10. Optical Block Assembly .................................... 2-11. Screen Frame Block Assembly .......................... 2-12. Mirror Cover Block Assembly ........................... 2-13. H1 Block Assembly ...........................................

4. DIAGRAMS
4-1. Block Diagram (1) .............................................. Block Diagram (2) .............................................. Block Diagram (3) .............................................. Block Diagram (4) .............................................. Block Diagram (5) .............................................. Block Diagram (6) .............................................. Block Diagram (7) .............................................. Block Diagram (8) .............................................. Block Diagram (9) .............................................. Block Diagram (10) ............................................ Block Diagram (11) ............................................ Block Diagram (12) ............................................ 4-2. 4-3. 4-4. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) 4-5. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 4-6. Frame Schematic Diagram ................................. Circuit Boards Location ..................................... Schematic Diagrams ........................................... Schematic Diagram of AK Board ...................... Schematic Diagram of F Board ......................... Schematic Diagram of G (1/3) Board ............... Schematic Diagram of G (2/3) Board ............... Schematic Diagram of G (3/3) Board ............... Schematic Diagram of HM Board ..................... Schematic Diagram of H1 Board ...................... Schematic Diagram of H2 Board ...................... Schematic Diagram of H3 Board ...................... Schematic Diagram of QU Board ..................... Schematic Diagram of S1, S2 Boards ................ Schematic Diagram of T1, T3 Boards ............... Printed Wiring Boards ........................................ AK Board ............................................................ F Board ............................................................... G Board (Side A) ................................................ G Board (Side B) ................................................ HM, H1 Boards .................................................. H2, H3 Boards .................................................... QU, S1, S2, T1, T3 Boards ................................ Semiconductors .................................................. 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 39 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22

3. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
3-1. Electrical Adjustment by Remote Commander .... 23 23 23 23 24 24 24 24 3-1-1. Method of Setting the Service Adjustment Mode ............................................................... 3-1-2. Service Mode Adjustment ............................ 3-1-3. Memory Write Confirmation Method .......... 3-1-4. Adjusting Buttons and Indicator ................... 3-2. 3-3. 3-4. To read Lamp and Panel time ............................ Test Reset ........................................................... H/V Center Confirmation and Adjustment ........

– 11 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

Section ––––––

Title ––––

Page ––––

5. EXPLODED VIEWS
5-1. 5-2. 5-3. 5-4. Screen, Covers .................................................... Bottomblock-1 .................................................... Bottomblock-2 .................................................... Bottomblock-3 .................................................... 60 61 62 63

6. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
• AK Board .................................................................. • F Board ...................................................................... • G Board ..................................................................... • HM Board ................................................................. • H1 Board ................................................................... • H2 Board ................................................................... • H3 Board ................................................................... • QU Board .................................................................. • S1 Board .................................................................... • T1 Board ................................................................... • T3 Board ................................................................... 64 65 65 69 70 70 70 71 71 71 71

– 12 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1

SECTION 1 SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

RM-Y914

RM-Y914

1. Summary of Self-Diagnosis Function - This device includes a self-diagnosis function. - In case of abnormalities, the POWER/STANDBY indicator automatically blinks. It is possible to predict the abnormality location by the number of blinks. The Instruction Manual describes blinking of the POWER/STANDBY indicator. - If the symptom is not reproduced sometimes in case of a malfunction, there is recording of whether a malfunction was generated or not. Operate the remote command to confirm the matter on the screen and to predict the location of the abnormality.

2. Diagnosis Items and Prediction of Malfunction Location - When a malfunction occurs the POWER/STANDBY indicator only blinks for one of the following diagnosis items. In case of two or more malfunctions, the item which first occurred blinks. If the malfunctions occurred simultaneously, the item with the lower blink count blinks first. - The screen display displays the results regarding all the diagnosis items listed below. The display "0" means that no malfunctions occurred. Number of times POWER/STANDBY indicator blinks Probable Cause Location

Diagnosis Item

Defected symptoms

Temp error

2 times

- Set temperture is high. - Temp sensor connector is not attached securely. - No picture/No sound (CN7020 on HB board, CN7180 on S2 board) - Lamp cover is not attached securely. - No picture/No sound -Lamp is not set securely. - F an 1-4 power is not supplied. (AGU board) - Fan connector is not attached securely. -Fan caught wires or harnesses. - Lamp driver is faulty.

Lamp cover error

3 times

Fan stopped

4 times

- No picture/No sound

Lamp driver error Low B error

5 times 6 times

- No picture/No sound

- B_12V is not supplied. - No picture/No sound (GT board)
- Short-circuit of Audio power supply line. -Blow out of fuse. (PS3001 on K board) -IC failure. (IC3005 on K board) -B -12V is over voltage. (B board) -Q_10.5V is over voltage. (GT board)

Audio error

7 times

- No picture/No sound

D-OVP error ATSC OVP Lamp error

8 times 10 times LAMP-LED flashes

- No picture/No sound

- No picture/No sound - No picture/No sound

- Lamp for the light source burns out.

– 13 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

3. Blinking count display of POWER/STANDBY indicator - One blink is not used for self-diagnosis. - Example Diagnosis item
POWER/STANDBY

LED blinks 3 times 4 times

POWER
LAMP
STD/DUO

TIMER

Indicators

Lamp cover Fan

LED ON : 0.3sec LED OFF : 0.3sec

LED OFF 3.0sec

- Release of POWER/STANDBY indicator blinking The POWER/STANDBY indicator blinking display is released by removing the plug from the power or leaving for 2 minutes.

4. Self-diagnosis screen displays - In cases of malfunctions where it is not possible to determine the symptom such as when the power goes off occasionally or when the screen disappears occasionally, there is a screen display on whether the malfunction occurred or not in the past (and whether the detection circuit operated or not) in order to allow confirmation. <Screen Display Method> - Quickly press the remote command button in the following order from the standby state. DISPLAY Channel 5 Vol POWER

SELF CHECK 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 : LAMP_ERROR : TEMP_ERROR : LAMP_TEMP : LAMP_COVER : FAN_ERROR : LAMP_DRIVER : LOWB_ERROR : AUDIO_PROT : D_OVP : ATSC_OVP 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

Be aware that this differs from the method of entering the service mode (Vol +).

- Numeral "1" means a fault was detected one time - Numeral "0" means that no fault was detected

– 14 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

- The results display is not automatically cleared. In case of repairs and after repairs, check the self-diagnosis screen and be sure to return the results display to "0". - If the results display is not returned to "0" it will not be possible to judge a new malfunction after completing repairs. <Method of Clearing Results Display> 1. Power off (Set to the standby mode) 2. DISPLAY 3. Channel 8 Channel 5 Vol POWER

ENTER

<Method of Ending Self-Diagnosis Screen> - When ending the self-diagnosis screen completely, turn the power switch OFF on the remote commander or the main unit. 5. Self-Diagnosis function operation 2 : Temp When the temperature sensor (for Ambient) on the S1 board detects high temperature or the temperature sensor (for Lamp) on the S2 board detects high temperature or the temperature sensor (for Panel) on the C board detects high temperature, the DE-micro (IC5) turns off the lamp. The rib at the back of the lamp cover closes the SW on the T1 board. The lamp closes the SW on the T2 board. It is monitored by DE-micro (pin63 of IC5) and turned off the lamp when it is opened. Fan rotation is detected by ‘‘FAN-PROT” and the DE-micro (pin92 of IC5) turns off the lamp when it is ‘‘high”. When the ‘‘LAMP-PROT” (pin83 of IC5) is high, the lamp is not turned on. If the ‘‘LAMP-HV-DET” (pin94 of IC5) is low at the same time, it classified as no high voltage of the lamp driver. When no ‘‘D5V (SW_5V)” is detected, pin 129 of TV-micro (IC7002) is low and it turns off the main power. (for example, blowout of thermal fuse). When DC voltage is detected at the speaker output, ‘‘SP-PROT” (pin102 of IC5) is low and it turns off the main power. Be not in use. When there is not ack from the temperature sensor on the S1, S2 and C board or IIC line connector (CN2303: ASU board, CN7956: DSU board, CN6901: C board) is not seated securely. it is monitored by DE-micro. Be not in use. When the ‘‘LAMP-PROT” (pin83 of IC5) is high, the lamp is not turned on. If the ‘‘LAMP-HV-DET” (pin94 of IC5) is high at the same time, it classified as no lamp or a dead lamp.

3

: Lamp cover

4

: Fan

5

: Lamp Driver

6

: Low B error

7

: Audio

8 9

: D-OVP : Panel error

10 LAMP

: ATSC-OVP : Lamp

– 15 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1

SECTION 2 DISASSEMBLY
Photo: KDS-R50XBR1 2-1. REAR COVER

RM-Y914

RM-Y914

3

2 Lamp door assembly

1 Loosen screw

4

Rear cover

– 16 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

2-2. TERMINAL BRACKET, D.C FAN

3

2 3 screws (+BVST 3x6)

1 2 screws (+BVTP 3x12)

Terminal bracket

4 Connector 6

D.C fan 5 Turn rivets

2-3. SERVICE POSITION

4 Screw (+BVTP2 4x16)

1 2 screws (+BVTP 4x16)

Chassis Assembly

5 Unlock 2 claws and pull out the chassis assembly carefully

2 Remove side stay (R) by pulling it down forward 3 3 screws (+BVST 3x6)

– 17 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

2-4.

POD BLOCK ASSEMBLY, ANTENNA SWITCH

4 2 hexagoral washers

3 3 screws (+BVST 3x6) 3 POD block assembly

Antenna switch
1 Connector

2-5.

DIGITAL BLOCK ASSEMBLY

1 Loosen cable holders

2 2 screws (+BVST 3x6) 4 2 screws (right side) (+BVTS 3x6)

8 2 connectors

7 Pull out IEEE1394 cable

6 Shield case (ATSC)

9 2 screws (+BVST 3x6)

5 4 screws (+BVTS 3x6)

qa PD board

3 2 screws (+BVTP 3x12)

0 2 PWB suppurt

qd 3 screws (+BVST 3x6)
qa 5 connectors

qs Connector

qf 3 screws (+BVST 3x6)

qs Connector

– 18 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

2-6. DC MOTOR SFF21C/C-NP

3 DC MOTOR SFF21C/C-NP with fan dampers 1 2 screws (+PWTP2 4x16)

Q box assembly

2 Fan guard with cushions (for bracket)

2-7. POWER SUPPLY BLOCK

4 2 PCB spacers

1 2 screws (+BVTP2 4x16)

3 2 Connectors

2 Remove side stay (R) by pulling it down forward.

5 Remove the power supply block upward.

6 2 screws (+BVTP2 4x16)

7 Fan bracket (EX) with fan

– 19 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

8 Screw (+BVTP2 4x16)

qa Ballast guide

9 Side stay (S) 0 Screw (+BVTP2 4x16)

qs Screw (+BVTP 3x12) qd

Connector holder [ In the lamp guide]

Connector holder with T3 board

2-8. UNIT COVER ASSEMBLY, LAMP (R) GUIDE ASSEMBLY
1 5 screws (+BVTP2 4x16) (See below)

2-9. DC MOTOR SFF22A/C-NP

DC motor SFF22A/C-NP
3 Release the claw

2

2 holes 2 hooks
4 Lamp (R) guide assembly 2 Unit cover assembly

Scirocco cover (PN)

1 2 screws (+BVTP2 4x16)

<Rear view>

1

– 20 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

2-10. OPTICS BLOCK ASSEMBLY

2 Front cover

3 4 screws (+PSWM 4x12) 1 Screw (+BVTP2 4x16)

4 Optics block assembly

5 1 screws (+BVTP2 4x16)

2-11. SCREEN FRAME BLOCK ASSEMBLY Photo: R50XBR1

3 Screen frame block assembly

2 2 screws (+BVTP2 4x16) 1 9 screws (+BVTP 4x16)

– 21 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

2-12. MIRROR COVER BLOCK ASSEMBLY

2 Mirror cover block assembly

1 6 screws (+BVTP2 4x16)

2-13. H1 BLOCK ASSEMBLY

2 1 2 screws (+PWTP2 4x16)

H1 block assembly

– 22 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1

SECTION 3 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
3-1. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT BY REMOTE COMMANDER
By using remote commander (RM-Y914), all circuit adjustments can be made. NOTE : Test Equipment Required. 1. Pattern Generator (with component outputs) 2. Oscilloscope 3. Digital multimeter

RM-Y914

RM-Y914

3-1-2. Service Mode Adjustment
1. The SCREEN displays the item being adjusted. 2. Press “1” or “4” on the remote commander to select the adjustment item. 3. Press “3” or “6” on the remote commander to change the data. 4. Press “2” or “5” on the remote commander to select the category. Every time you press “2” (Category up), Service mode changes in the order as shown below.

3-1-1. Method of Setting the Service Adjustment Mode
1. Standby mode. (Power off) 2. DISPLAY t 5 t VOL (+) t TV POWER on the remote commander. (Press each button within a second.) The following service screen will appear.
Category Name Item No. Data Mode

VERSION CXA2209Q OUT-1 OUT-2 OUT-3 AP DLBY BUSSW

MSP3714G CCPS_1 CCPS_2 CCPS_3 CCPS_4 CCPS_5 CCPS_6 CCPS_7 CCPS_8 CCPS_10 CCPS_11 DELAY_1 DELAY_2 OSD CC_M CC_S

CC_T HDMI HDMS ID OPB_GA OP_GA OP_US

VERSION VER

0

0

SERVICE TV

Item Name

Input Signal

CXA2103 CXA2163

F/A : xxxxxxxx CBA : xxxxxxxx

2DCOMB TELETEXT

Category Name

MSP_SIZE
Item No. Data

MSPMD
D9671-1 I2CSCAL 96H 28DEG 9CH 24DEG LCD PJ ENGINE 03/10/07 0 0 G

MSPSEL MSPFNC

Item Name

VER.10.00B 732B

<LCD PROJECTOR ENGINE>

5. If you want to recover the latest values press “-” then “[ENTER]” to read the memory. 6. Press “[MUTING]” then “[ENTER]” to write into memory. 7. Turn power off. <Method of setting the shipping condition> 1. Service Adjustment mode. 2. Press “8” then “[ENTER]” 3. Wait until appearing “ Initial Setup” display. 4. Disconnect AC plug and connect again to change factory reset condition completely.

3-1-3. Memory Write Confirmation Method
1. After adjustment, turn power off with the remote commander. 2. Turn power on and set to service mode. 3. Call the adjusted items again and confirm they were adjusted.

– 23 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

3-1-4. Adjusting Buttons and Indicator
MUTING POWER Adjustment item up Adjustment item down DISPLAY Adjustment category up Data up Data down Initialize data (Not stored) Adjustment category down User control goes to the standerd state (Shipping Conditions) ENTER

This screen reads “Total lamp time is 14 hours” and “Total lamp ON/OFF cycle is 71 times” To reset lamp time, press “3 ” , “MUTE ” and “ENTER ” keys in sequence. WRI-EXE(Red Character) is momentarily displayed and LampTM will be reset to “0 ”. 4. Press “ 1 ” key [7 times].
Example PANEL NVM OK 9 OPTION_E 7 SH SFT1 10 Diff 1 PanelTM 14h

Read data from NVM

VOL +

This screen reads “Total Panel time is 14 hours” You can’t reset the Panel time with the Service menu .

<To get out of the Service menu>
The Service menu is cleared by turning off the set with a remote commander or the power switch .

3-3. Test Reset
The user settings can be reset to the factory default condition as follows. 1. Press “TEST “ and “RESET “ key in sequence when the set is ON . The LAMP,TIMER and POWER/STANDBY LED light and the picture is muted. After about 5 seconds the LAMP and TIMER LED go off, and the color of POWER/STANDBY LED changes from amber to green. After another 10 seconds the reset is completed and the initial setup display appears.

RM-Y914
FUNCTION OF KEYS ON COMMANDER •1 •4 •2 •5 •3 •6 : Changes adjustment item. (item No. moves up) : Changes adjustment item. (item No. moves down) : Changes adjustment category. (category moves up) : Changes adjustment category. (category moves down) : Changes data value. (up) : Changes data value. (down)

3-4. H/V Center Confirmation and Adjustment
Please check the picture horizontal/vertical center after the replacement of the following parts . • Optical block • Top assembly 1, Check H/V center with 480i monoscope signal in “Full “ mode . 2, If the center is shifted , adjust it with the following service items . Please record the steps shifted as
CXD9713

Commander Function
Button [MUTING] + [ENTER] - + [ENTER] 8 + [ENTER] Mode WRITE READ RESET Description Writes data to NVM. Reads data from NVM. Set the shipping condition.

DFD 16 and

CXD9713 .

3-2. To read Lamp and Panel time
The lamp and panel time of the set are displayed as follows .

DFD 16 (for H center) DFD 17 (for V center)

<Enter the service mode>
1. Press the keys of the remote commander in rapid sequence as follows , when the set is in standby mode.
DFD17

DISPLAY

t Channel 5

t Vol +

t

POWER

2. Press the “JUMP ” key [3 times]. You’ll get into DE-micro service menu . 3. Press “2 ” key [9 times] to show the following display .
Example PANEL NVM OK 9 OPTION_E 0 LAMP 0 Diff 1 LampTM 14 LampCT 71

DFD16

– 24 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1

SECTION 4 DIAGRAMS
4-1. BLOCK DIAGRAM (1)
J309 Y S VIDEO 1 C 2 V1-Y

RM-Y914

RM-Y914

IC303
3 4 V1-C V1-V V2-V V3-V A-TU-V SUB TU V V1-Y V2-Y V3-Y HDMI-Y V1-C V2-C V3-C D4_VG D5_VG D4_VB D5_VB D4_VR D5 _VR VIDEO INPUT SELECT Q316 BUFFER Q314 BUFFER Q313 BUFFER Q230 BUFFER Q231 BUFFER Q318 BUFFER Q2004 BUFFER

Q2002 BUFFER Q2003 BUFFER

MAIN_G
PC_R PC_L ATSC_R A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9

CN2006 PC_R PC_L ATSC_R ATSC_L HDMI_R HDMI_L HDMI_Y MTU_R MTU_L

VIDEO 1 IN

VIDEO

Y

V1-V

12 7 17 79 1 13 8 18 26

IN5_CV IN4_CV IN6_CV IN1_CV IN2_VC IN5_Y IN4_Y IN6_Y IN8_Y

CV/YOUT1 58

MAIN_Y/CV

1
C/CBOUT1 59 MAIN_C/CB

TO ASU (2/2) BOARD

ATSC_L HDMI_R HDMI_L HDMI_Y MTU_R MTU_L MTU_V

L (MONO) AUDIO R

L

V1-L

CROUT1 60

MAIN_CR

R

V1-R

CV/YOUT2 67

SUB_Y

MAIN_CVY M_HSYNC SUB_Y SUB_C
SUB_HSYNC AFT_SUB AD_RST AD_MUTE LINE_MUTE SIRCS USER_RXD

A10 MTU_V A11 CVY_MAIN A12 TU_H_MAIN A13 SUB_Y A14 SUB_C A15 TU_H_SUB A16 AFT_SUB A17 AD_RST A18 AD_MUTE A19 LINE_MUTE A20 SIRCS A21 USER_RXD A22 USER_TXD A23 I2C_SDA A24 I2C_SCL A26 SDA1(IFP_SDA) A27 SCL(IFP_SCL) A32 AC_RLY A36 A37 A38 B38 A39 A41 B42 A45 B46

V3-Y Y S VIDEO 1 2 V3_SSW C V3-C

14 IN5_C 9 IN4_C 19 IN6_C 33 IN9_Y 40 IN10_Y 34 IN9_CB 41 IN10_CB 35 IN9_CR 42 IN10_CR

C/CBOUT2 68

SUB_C Q2001 BUFFER MAIN_CVY

3

4

SEL_OUT1 56 SYNC_OUT1 55 EXT_CLK/XTAL 51

TO DSU BOARD CN7003

VIDEO 3 IN

VIDEO

Y

V3-V

X302 4MHz

USER_TXD I2C_SDA I2C_SCL

L (MONO) AUDIO R

L

V3-L Q301-304 Y SIGNAL DETECT 12C_SDA 12C_SCL

SDA_IFP SCL_IFP 11 IN5_S 6 IN4_S SDA 77 SCL 76

R

V3-R

SW_9V

SW_9V STBY5V SW3.3V D5V

J304 Y

VG

D4_VG

IC507
AUDIO INPUT SELECT V1-L V2-L V3-L MTU-L SUB-TU-L D4-L D5-L ATSC-L HDMI-L PC-L 1 19 4 22 25 10 13 28 16 7 IN1_L IN7_L IN2_L IN8_L IN9_L IN4_L IN5_L IN10_L IN6_L IN3_L SDA 32 SCL 31 LOUT1 39 12C_SDA 12C_SCL

STBY5V SW3.3V

PB

VB

D4_VB

IC526
AMP M-L
D5V

HD/DVD 4 IN

PR

VR

D4_VR

2

1

ATSC_5V

A49 ATSC_5V A50

L AUDIO R (1080i/720P/480P/480i) Y

L

D4-L

ROUT1 37

6

7

M-R

2
12C_S

TO ASU (2/2) BOARD

R

D4-R

USER_TXD UARTRX UARTTX

J301 CONTROL S OUT J303 CONTROL S IN

VG

D5_VG

PB

VB

D5_VB

HD/DVD 5 IN

PR

VR

D5_VR

V1-R V2-R V3-R MTU-R SUB-TU-R D4-R D5-R ATSC-R HDMI-R PC-R

L AUDIO R

L

D5-L

2 20 5 23 26 11 14 29 17 8

IN1_R IN7_R IN2_R IN8_R IN9_R IN4_R IN5_R IN10_R IN6_R IN3_R

SIRCS

Q306-312 SIRCS I/F CONTROL CTL TO ASU (2/2) BOARD

3

SDAT_IFP SCLK_IFP

28 I2C_SDA0 27 I2C_SCL0 SDAT_D

IC5
SAIPH MICRO
CN1 7 8 9 10 SP_PROT A_MUTE OVF 3.3V_SW

LEVEL SHIFT

R

D5-R

SENB_D FPC_DET IRIS_GAIN FAN PRPT LAMP_ON IRIS_CTRL IRIS_FB SUB-TV-V A-TU-V SUB-TU-L SUB-TU-R AFT_SUB Q2321 BUFFER Q323,317,315 BUFFER SW3.3V DET OUT 5V (D-D) 5V (TU) 5V (IF) DE-EM AFT OUT TU2100 SUB TUNER PANEL_ON PANEL_PD SDA_E SCL_E 5 EEPROM 6

IC8

SCLK_D

IC2306
CN7050
Y C 2 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 CN7051 S_SW2 S2_2 C2 Y2 V2 L2 R2 CN004 S_SW2 1 S2_2 2 C2 4 Y2 6 V2 8 L2 10 R2 12 SUB6.5V D2-C D2-Y D2-V D2-L D2-R 1 +5V REG 2 3 A5V

SP PROT 102 AU/_MUTE 101 34 SIO_SCK3 OF_FLAG_MAIN 8 32 SIO_SDT3 K3.3V_SW 6 96 AC_OFF_DET 117 IRIS_GAIN 92 FAN ERR M_RST 100 86 LAMP_ON LATCH_MAIN 9 69 IRIS_PPG

33 PD_SENB

TO AK BOARD CN2603

13 14 15

M_RST SCLTCH AMP_RST

3 1

4

S VIDEO

41 IRIS_FB 93 PANEL_ON 55 PANEL_PD

SIO_SDT1 19 SIO_SCK1 20 AU_RESET_AMP 103

17 SCDT 18 SCSHIFT

J7050 VIDEO 2 INPUT VIDEO L (MONO) AUDIO R
Q305 SYNC DETECT M_HSYNC MTU_V Q317,315 BUFFER

X1

90

107

108

IC4
RESET
X1 6MHz

SUB_HSYNC

(VIDEO 2 INPUT)

H3

Q324 SYNC DETECT 12C_SCL 12C_SDA CL DA

S1 (RESET)

X2

65 SDA1 64 SCL1

RESET

IC7

Q305 SYNC DETECT

Supplied as the ass'y for service. ( The parts on this ASU/DSU blocksupplied individually ) board are not

ASU (1/2) (A/V INPUT,TUNER)

– 25 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

BLOCK DIAGRAM (2)
TO DSU BOARD CN4000

CN2010 100P

A21 SENS_SCL A22 SENS_SDA

A15 I_MAIN_R B15 PANEL_ON

A13 I_MAIN_CV

1
TO AUS (1/2) BOARD

MAIN_G MAIN_Y/CV MAIN_C/CB MAIN_CR

LEVEL SHIFT

IC3

PANEL_ON

LVDS_PD

3
TO AUS (1/2) BOARD

CTL

SCLK_D

SDAT_D

SCLK_D SDAT_D IRIS_GAIN

LAMP_ON

IRIS_CTRL IRIS_FB

SENB_D

A31 IRIS_CTRL B31 IRIS_FB

B28 SCLK A29 SDAT A30 IRIS_GAIN

A11 I_MAIN_C B12 LAMP_ON

B18 LVDS_PD A19 I_MAIN_G

A17 I_MAIN_B

B25 SDA_E B27 SCL_E

A28 SENB

IC2300
FAN CONTROL

FAN_PROT CN2301 D2301 D2302 D2303 FAN1-POW FAN1-PROT FAN2-POW FAN2-PROT FAN3-POW FAN3-PROT FAN4-POW 10 FAN4-PROT 1 2 4 5 7 8 9

SW_9V 1 AHVSUP 39 SPDIF_OUT 76 Q511 BUFFER 3

IC514
SHUNT 2 REGULATOR SPDIF

IC2305
DATA DECODER DAC4 3 FAN1-CTL

SUB_11V Q2310,2305 BUFFER

1 4 2

3

M M M M

FAN FAN FAN FAN

FAN CONTROL SUB_11V 1 4 2 DAC3 4 SDA_E 14 SCL_E 15 SUB_11V FAN3-CTL Q2308,2303 BUFFER FAN2-CTL Q2309,2304 BUFFER 3

IC2301

IC522
AUDIO PROSSESOR M-L 56 SC1_IN_L SC1_OUT_L 37 6

IC504
AMP 7

VS (IC506,526)

Q501 BIAS

SW_9V

IC2302
FAN CONTROL 1 4 2 3

2
TO AUS (1/2) BOARD

M-R 12C_S

57 SC1_IN_R

SC1_OUT_R 36

2

1 DAC2 5

12C_SCL 2 SCL 12C_SDA 3 SDA

XTAL_IN 71 XTAL_OUT 72

Q503,504 MUTE X501 18.432MHz Q512 BUFFER Q508 BUFFER Q2322, 2323 BUFFER Q509 AC_RLY

IC2303
FAN CONTROL 1 4 2 3

SUB_11V FAN4-CTL Q2307,2302 BUFFER Q2300,2312 DAC0 7 FAN_CTL

12S_DEL_IN 12S_DEL_OUT 12S_DEL_CL DVSUP RESET

AUDIO_ CLOCK_OUT

LINE_MUTE AD_RST AD_MUTE

DAC1 6

PFC_DET

Q7 CN2100

74 2

8 9 10 11 21

AC_RLY Q502 INITIAL MUTE SW3 10 STBY5V LAMP_ON Q2392,2393,2395 FAN LAMP_HV CONTROL A16.5V ATSA_11V TU32V STBY_5V

12C_SCL 12C_SDA

32 31

PFC_DET AC_RLY

IC512

4 11 59 13 8 7 18

2 3

11SM_OUT 11SM_IN BIT_CLK LR_CLK RST

Q505 INITIAL MUTE Q510

D5V

44 41 40 37 49 50 26

TU32V STBY5V +B_OVP REC_ON
16.5V

SCL SDA

IC523
DELAY

MUTE 6

TO G BOARD CN6502

FWR FRD

I/O0-7 55-50, 47,46

A0-16 21,23,24, 27,28,30-32, 35-40,43-45

SUB_6.5V

ATSC_9V D5V A5V D5V

24 22 15

SUB6.5V

22 29

IC2100,2101 IC2103
REGULATOR

SUB_11V ATSC_5V SW_9V

9 6 2 1

SUB11V THRU5V SW9V SW9V

13-15, 17-21 I/O1-8

12-2,23, 25-28,31 A0-16

29 24

SW_3.3V SW_2.5V

IC524
5 6
GND LAMP_HV GND LAMP COVER

SPDIF+/NC

SPDIF-

6 5 3 1

SRAM

WE DE

CN2390

CN501

J307

AUDIO OUT CVAR/FIX

TO AK BOARD CN7260

TO T1 BOARD CN7150/ T3 BOARD CN7155

AUDIO

R

L

Supplied as the service. ( The parts on this ASU/DSU block ass'y forindividually ) ASU (2/2) (FAN, POWER CONTROL) board are not supplied

– 26 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

BLOCK DIAGRAM (3)
IC9102
PAWN

CN9000 RA1RB1-

38P RA1+ RB1+ RC1+ 2 3 6 9 12 15

LDVS RECEIVER

IC9000

IC9101
TEMP. SENSOR

RA1+/RB1+/RC1+/RCLK1+/RD1+/RE1+/-

IFQE[0-29]

IFQE[0-29]

5 8 RC1RCLK1RCLK1+ 11 RD1- RD1+ 14 RE1-

RRIN0-9 GRIN0-9 BRIN0-9 RLIN0-9 GLIN0-9 BLIN0-9

IFQO[0-29]

LRL0-9,LGL0-9,LBL0-9 LRR0-9,LGR0-9,LBR0-9

LRL0-9

IC9401
LCD DRIVER L

DIDOUT

RE1+ 17 18

IC 9103
CLKOUT RC4 RC5
IFCLK IFHSYNC IFVSYNC
DOTCLK HSIN VSIN

LRR0-9
HS_R HS_G HS_B HCK,VCK, HST,VST

IC9403
LCD DRIVER R

CN9400 VID_R0-R23
24

VID_R0-R23

29 6 43 42 41 40 34 39

SIG (0) SIG (23) HCK VCK HST VST VPC RST

RRL0-9

IC9402
LCD DRIVER L

R

RRR0-9

IC9404
LCD DRIVER R SDAT, SCLK

DIDOUT SET3.3V VID_G0-G23
24

IC9100
NVM

IC9150
DDR SDRAM

LGL0-9

IC9500
LCD DRIVER L

IC9407
RESET

LGR0-9

IC9502
LCD DRIVER R

CN9500

VID_G0-G23

29 6 43 42 41 40 34 39

SIG (0) SIG (23) HCK VCK HST VST PID RST

RGL0-9 TO DSU BOARD CN4202

IC9501
LCD DRIVER L

G

RGR0-9

IC9503
LCD DRIVER R SDAT, SCLK

LCD UNIT

DIDOUT SET3.3V

LBL0-9

IC9600
LCD DRIVER L

IC9505
RESET

IC9001
PAWN

IC9253
PAWN IFQE[0-29] RRIN0-9 GRIN0-9 BRIN0-9 RLIN0-9 GLIN0-9 BLIN0-9 RRL0-9,RGL0-9,RBL0-9 RRR0-9,RGR0-9,RBR0-9
48

LBR0-9R

IC9602
LCD DRIVER R

CN9600

VID_B0-B23

24

VID_B0-B23

29 6 43 42 41 40 34 39

SIG (0) SIG (23) HCK VCK HST VST PID RST

RA2- RA2+ RB2- RB2+ RC2- RC2+ RCLK2- RCLK2+ RD2RE2-

21 22 24 25

RA1+/RB1+/RC1+/IFQO[0-29] RCLK1+/RD1+/RE1+/-

RBL0-9

IC9601
LCD DRIVER L

27 28 30 31 RD2+ 33 34 RE2+ 36 37

B

IFQO[0-29]

RBR0-9

IC9603
LCD DRIVER R SDAT, SCLK

IC9252
VSOUT VS_B VS_G VS_B

IFCLK IFHSYNC IFVSYNC

DOTCLK HSIN VSIN

VS/HS

HCK,VCK,HST,VST

SET3.3V

IC9605
RESET

IC6903
WP2 EEPROM

IC9250
NVM

IC9300
DDR SDRAM

CN6901 20P SENS_SCL SENS_SDA WP2 SDA_E 3 5 7 8
SDADE_400K SCLDE_400K

IC6901
EEPROM

TO DSU BOARD CN7956

SCL_E 10 SENB 13 SCLK 14 SDA1 IRIS_CTRL IRIS_GAIN IRIS_FB LVDS_PD CN9050 8P DUMP + DUMP HOUT 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SDAT

A16.5V SET5V SET3.3V SET9V D1 5V D2 5V

CN6900 1 4 5 6 A16.5V D6.5V D6.5V D6.5V

10P

SCLK

IC6900,6902 IC6904,6905
REGULATOR

TO DSU BOARD CN7954

D6.5V

IC9050,5052
IRES AMP

IRIS

HIN HOUT + HIN + DRIVE DRIVE +

IC9051
IRIS DRIVER

Supplied as ( The parts on this optics block ass'y for service. ) board are not supplied individually

C (LCD DRIVER)

– 27 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

BLOCK DIAGRAM (4)

IC4300 IC4302
CN4000
I_MAIN_C LAMP_ON I_MAIN_CV A11 B12 NC A13

CCPX

LPF, VIDEO BUFFER Q4306, 4317 BUFFER Q4305, 4316 BUFFER
11 IN2A 8 IN1A

OUT2A OUT2B OUT1A OUT1B

21 20 25 24

Q4310 BUFFER

M_YS/C M_CV/Y

AIN5 AIN4 AD4_SEL OUT1C2–9 1MC2–9 OUT1Y2–9 1MY2–9

Q4309 BUFFER
I_MAIN_R WP I_MAIN_B LVDS_PD I_MAIN_G SENS_SCL SENS_SDA SDA_E SCL_E SENB SCLK SDAT IRIS_GAIN IRIS_CTRL IRIS_FB CN7956 SENS_SCL SENS_SDA WP2 SDA_E 3 5 7 8 SENS_SCL SENS_SDA WP2 A15 B15 A17 B18 A19 A21 A22 B25 B27 A28 B28 A29 A30 A31 B31 LVDS_PD WP

M_CLPSW

12C_SCL SCL 4 12C_SDA SDA 3

I

TO DSU (2/4) BOARD

IC4303
LPF, VIDEO BUFFER Q4304,4314 BUFFER Q4303,4313 BUFFER Q4302,4312 BUFFER
13 IN3A 11 IN2A 8 IN1A

SENS_SCL SENS_SDA

TO ASU BOARD CN2010

12C_SCL 12C_SCL
SENB SCLK SDAT IRIS_GAIN IRIS_CTRL IRIS_FB

OUT3A OUT3B OUT2A OUT2B OUT1A OUT1B

M_R/V
17 16 21 20 25 24

AIN3 AIN2 AIN1

1M_CLK OUT1CLK 1M_HS OUT1H 1M_VS OUT1V FIFOCLK_IN AOUT1 DTOCLK_IN AOUT2

CLOCK

IC4305
WAVE SHAPER FL4301 Q4301 BUFFER LPF FL4300 LPF Q4308 BUFFER
7 5 16 – +

M_B/U M_G/Y

4 3

12C_SCL 12C_SDA

Q4300 BUFFER

Q4307 BUFFER

14

– +

IC4200
LVDS RECEIVER
15,17,18, 36–32

IC4002
BUS SWITCH SCL SDA
2 6 3 7 1 5

IC4304
SDRAM

D2Y2–9

M_D2Y2–9

RD3–5, RB2–6

DQ0–15 Q4006, 4007 BIAS

DQ0–15

DQ0–15

D2C2–9 D2CLK D2HTIM D2VTIM M_D2CLK M_D2H M_D2V

M_D2C2–9

20,39–43, 45,46

12C_SCL 12C_SDA

RA– RA+ RB– RB+

49 50 51 52

C BOARD CN6901

SCL_E 10 SENB 13 SCLK 14 SDA1 IRIS_CTRL IRIS_GAIN IRIS_FB LVDS_PD CN9050 8P 16 17 18 19 20

12C_SCL 12C_SCL
SENB SCLK SDAT IRIS_CTRL IRIS_FB LVDS_PD

A0–11, BA0, BA1 SCL SDA Q4009, 4012 LEVEL SHIFT 12C_SCL_X 12C_SDA_X

A0–11 BA0, 1

ADDR 0–11 BA0 BA1

M_D2CLK M_D2H M_D2V

RA1–6, RB0, RCLK– RD1 RCLK+ RD– RD+ 31 CLKOUT 21 RD0 14 RD6 PD

56 57 59 60

1 2 4 5 7 8 10 11 13 14

CN4200 MRXIN0– MRXIN0+ MRXIN1– MRXIN1+ MRXIN2– MRXIN2+ MRXCLK– MRXCLK+ MRXIN3– MRXIN3+

TO QMDV BOARD CN7313

3

D1G0–7

IC4201
LVDS RECEIVER
15,17,18, 36–32

M_D1C0–7 M_D1CLK M_D1H M_D1V

20,39–43, 45,46

DOML, DQMH WE CAS PAS CS CKE CLK

DQM XWE XCAS XRAS XCS CKE SDCLK

D1B0–7 M_D1Y0–7

RD3–5, RB2–6 RA1–6, RB0, RD1 RD2, RC0–6

D1R0–7

D1CLK D1HTIM D1VTIM OSDYS
217 REFCLK_IN

M_D1R0–7 M_D1CLK M_D1H M_D1V 1

RA– RA+ RB– RB+ RC– RC+ RCLK– RCLK+ RD– RD+

49 50 51 52 54 55 56 57 59 60

1 2 4 5 7 8 10 11 13 14

CN4201 MRXIN0– MRXIN0+ MRXIN1– MRXIN1+ MRXIN2– MRXIN2+ MRXCLK– MRXCLK+ MRXIN3– MRXIN3+

TO PD BOARD CN9502

19,22, 24–29

31 CLKOUT 21 RD0 14 RD6

MCLK

IC4004
CCPM_MUTE 4

PD 3

Q4200

IC4202
RESET 3.3V
2 VCC OUT 1

I2C_I/F

5 6

TO DSU (4/4) BOARD TO DSU (2/4) BOARD

RST/CK

Supplied as the service. ( The parts on this ASU/DSU block ass'y forindividually ) DSU (1/4) (HDMI IN, CCPX) board are not supplied

– 28 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

BLOCK DIAGRAM (5)
IC4505
IFP-1

IC4610(1/2)
IFP-2

IC4203
LVDS TRANSMITTER IFPR1OUT0

CN4203

IFPR1 OUT0-9

IMY2-9

DIYD0-7

DY212-19

DRCY1IN0-7

DRCY1IN0-7

IFPR1OUT9 IFPG1OUT0

TA+/TB+/TC+/TCLK+/-

37 36 34 33 31 30 28 27 25 24 22 21

IFPG1 OUT0-9

TO DSU BOARD (1/4)

I

IMC2-9

IFPG1OUT9

DICD0-7 DRCY2IN0-7

IFPB1OUT0 IFPB1OUT9

IFPB1 OUT0-9 WP2 LVDS_PD IFPR2 OUT0-9

TD+/TE+/-

TA1+ TB1+ TC1- TC1+ TCLK1- TCLK1+ TD1- TD1+ TB1TE1TE1+
TO C BOARD CN9000

TA1-

CLOCK

1M_CLK 1M_HS 1M_VS

CKD1 IHDD IVDD

DY202-09

DRCY2IN0-7
IFPR2OUT0 IFPR2OUT9

TA+/TB+/TC+/TCLK+/-

FLASH RAM

IC4503

DB02-09

DRCC1IN0-7

IFPG2OUT0

DRCC1IN0-7

IFPG2 OUT0-9

IFPG2OUT9 IFPB2OUT0 IFPB2OUT9

IFPB2 OUT0-9

TD+/TE+/-

TA2- TA2+ 18 17 TB2- TB2+ 15 14 12 11 TC2- TC2+ 9 8 TCLK2- TCLK2+ 6 5 TD2- TD2+ 1 2 TE2- TE2+

D0_0-31 DQ0-31

DQ000-31

DR02-09

DRCC2IN0-7

DRCC2IN0-7

IC4204
LVDS TRANSMITTER

A0-10, BA0 BA1

A0_0-10 B0_0,1

AD000-10, BA00,BA01

WE# CAS# RAS# CS# CLK

XWE0 XCAS0 XRAS0 XCS0 SDCK0 CKCI

IC4507
7 SSCLK SSON# 8 XIN 3 GPIO6

ROMDQ0-7

D0-7

ROMAD0-21

A0-21

FLASH RAM

IC4504

IC4508
X4500 79.9918313MHz
D1_0-31

4 XIN DQ100-31

DQ0-31

CLKB S1 S0 CLKD

9 13 12 7

WE ROMCS1 OE GPIO3 MMD0-31

WE CS1 OE

IC4800
DDR

IC4801
DRAM

MMD0-63

MMD0-31

DQ0-31

D0-7 A0-20

DQ0-7 A0-20 WE CE OE

IC4506
A0-10, BA0, BA1 A1_0-10 B1_0,1

CKBI AD100-10, BA10,BA11

7 SSCLK

XIN 3 SSON# 8

MMA0-11 MMBA0,1 MMDQS0-3 MMDQM0-3 MWEB MCASB MRASB MCSB0 MCKE0 MCLK0B MCLK1B MCLK0 MCLK1

MMA0-11 MMBA0,1

MMA0-11 MMBA0,1

A0-11 BA0,1

DQS0-3 DM0-3 WE CAS RAS CS CKE CLK0 CLK1 CK0 CK1 WE CAS RAS CS CKE CLK0 CK0 WE CAS RAS CS CKE CK CK

WE CS1 OE

WE# CAS# RAS# CS# CLK

XWE1 XCAS1 XRAS1 XCS1 SDCK1

IC4502
XRST 4 1 2
CLOCK DRIVE

IC4604
4 2 GPIO0 GPIO_INT3

IC4603

SSON# 8 SSCLK 7 XIN 3

PNCLCLKIN MMD32-63 MMA0-11 MMBA0,1 DQ0-31
A0-11 BA0,1

CN7954 16.5V SUB 6.5V 1 4 5 6 A16.5V D6.5V D6.5V D6.5V

CLOCK SELECT

IC4600

MMDQS4-7 MMDQM4-7

DQS0-3 DM0-3 WE CAS RAS CS CKE CLK1 CK1 WE CAS RAS CS CKE CK CK

TO C BOARD CN6900

X4600 79.9918313MHz 4 XIN

CLKB 9 S1 13 S0 12 CLKC 1 CLKO 7 GPIO10 GPIO09 XTALCLKIN EXTGXHSOUT EXTGXCKOUT

IC4615
IGXHS 3 4 IGXCK 1 6 LVDS_PD

MAIN LVDS RECIVER

IC7650

CN7650 GRAGRA+ GRBGRB+ GRCGRC+ GRCLKGRCLK+ GRDGRD+ GREGRE+

1 2 3 4 7 8 10 11 13 14 16 17

RARA+ RBRB+ RCRC+ RCLKRCLK+ RDRD+ RERE+

RE0-5 RD5,6 RD0-4 RC4,5 RC0-3 RB3-6 PA2-6 PB0-2 CLKOUT PA1 PA0 PD

GR0-7 GG0-7

GPIO12

GA0-7

GPIO11

STANDBYX RESETX

GPIO7

IC4802
DDR

MCLK GB0-7 GCK GHS GVS LVDS_PD

7

TO DSU BOARD (3/4)

IC4601
1 3 6 8 4 2 S_RESETX

IFP_V

RST/CK

IC4608
LVDS_PD

8 6

TO DSU BOARD (3/4) TO DSU BOARD (1/4)

(
– 29 –

Supplied as the ASU/DSU block ass'y for service. The parts on this board are not supplied individually

) DSU (2/4) IFP

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

BLOCK DIAGRAM (6)
IC7002(1/2)
SYSTEM CONTROL

TO DSU BOARD (4/4)

3

SUB_Y/C

CVY_MAIN

Q7026,7027,7036 BUFFER Q7028,7029,7037 BUFFER

DATA_SLICER_MAIN DATA_SLICER_SUB

IC7701
TV MICRO

WAVE SHAPER

IC4705

SUB_Y SUB_C

Q7708,7713 BUFFER Q7704,7709,7715 BUFFER

AIN4 AIN5

FIFOCLK_IN FL7701 AOUT1 DTOCLK_IN FL7700 AOUT2 Q7700 BUFFER LPF Q7702 BUFFER Q7701 BUFFER LPF Q7703 BUFFER

7 5 16 14 + +

IC4610(2/2)
D4600 Q4600 LED DRIVER GPJ016
IFP-2

EXTGXBIN0-7 EXTGXGIN0-7 EXTGXRIN0-7 EXTGXAIN0-7 EXTGXCKIN EXTGXHSIN EXTGXVSIN

EXTGXBIN0-7 EXTGXGIN0-7 EXTGXRIN0-7 EXTGXAIN0-7 EXTGXCKIN EXTGXHSIN EXTGXVSIN CCPYIN_A0-7 CCPCIN_A0-7 REFCLK_IN CCPCKIN_A CCPHSIN_A CCPVSIN_A CCPCKIN-A CCPHSIN-A CCPVSIN-A X7950 79.9918313MHz

IC7551
SWITCH

EXTGXCKIN EXTGXHSIN EXTGXVSIN EXTGXAIN0-7 EXTGXRIN0-7 EXTGXGIN0-7 EXTGXBIN0-7

OGPX_CK OGPX_HS OGPX_VS OGPX_A0-7 OGPX_R0-7 OGPX_G0-7 OGPX_B0-7

OPC_GE0-7 OPC_BE0-7 OPC_CK OPC_HS OPC_VS

CCPYIN_A0-7 CCPCIN_A0-7 CCPCKIN-A CCPHSIN-A CCPVSIN-A

CCPYIN_A0-7 CCPCIN_A0-7 CCPCKIN-A CCPHSIN-A CCPVSIN-A

OUTIY2-9 OUT1C2-9 OUT1CLK OUT1H OUT1V

OSD_HS OSD_VS DOT_CLK_I

IGPX0_R5-7 IGPX0_G5-7 IGPX0_B5-7 OEX_HS IGPXO_HS OEX_VS IGPXO_VS OEX_CK IGPXO_CK IGPX1_A0-7 IGPX1_R0-7 IGPX1_G0-7 IGPX1_B0-7 IGPX1_CK IGPX1_HS IGPX1_VS IGPX0_A7 IGPX0_A6 REO0-7,RO0-7 GEO0-7,GO0-7 BEO0-7,BO0-7

OSD_R5-7,OSD_G5-7,OSD_B5-7

OSD_R5-7 OSD_G5-7 OSD_B5-7

D_B0-3 D_G0-3 D_B0-3 YS_OUT YM_OUT OSD_H_SYNC VSYNC DOT_CLK O_BUSSW_RST

OSD_YS OSD_YM REO0-7,RO0-7 GEO0-7,GO0-7 BEO0-7,BO0-7

OSD_YS OSD_YM

2

TO DSU BOARD (4/4)

GA0-7 GR0-7 GG0-7 TO DSU BOARD (2/4) GB0-7 GCK GHS GVS

OSD_HS OSD_VS OSD_CLK_I LVDS_PD

SDA SCL IEX_HS IEX_CK

12C_SDA_X 12C_SCL_X 12C_I/F-S IGXHS IGNCK IFPV

7

9 8

TO DSU BOARD (4/4) TO DSU BOARD (2/4)

LVDS_PD

Supplied as the service. ( The parts on this ASU/DSU block ass'y forindividually ) DSU (3/4) TVMICRO board are not supplied

– 30 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

BLOCK DIAGRAM (7)
CN7005

IC7404
A/D CONVERTER CN7400 R G RGB B I2C_SDA_X I2C_SCL_X 8 PC IN I2C_SDA_X I2C_SCL_X RIN GIN BIN SDA SCL REO0-7,RO0-7 GEO0-7,GO0-7 BEO0-7,BO0-7

IC7002 (2/2)
SYSTEM CONTROL KEY1 KEY2 REC_LED I_KEY1 PCSTBY_LED O_PICOFF_LED O_TIMER_LED O_STBY_LED O_POWER_LED LAMP_ERR_LED KEY1 KEY2 ILINK_LED REC_LED PCSTBY_LED PICOFF_LED TIMER_LED STBY_LED POWER_LED LAMP_ERR_LED

STBY_5V

2

TO DSU BOARD (3/4)

PCSTBY_LED TIMER_LED STBY_LED POWER_LED REC_LED LAMP_ERR_LED ILINK_LED PICOFF_LED KEY1 KEY2

2 STBY_5V 3 PCSTBY_LED 4 TIMER_LED 5 STBY_LED 6 POWER_LED 7 REC_LED 8 LAMP_ERR_LED 9 ILINK_LED 12 PICOFF_LED 13 KEY1 14 KEY2

TO H2 BOARD CN1200 H1 BOARD CN1600

J7400 AUDIO SDA_X SCL_X CN7952 L R L R

IC7405
EEPROM SDA SCL I_SIRCS I_POWER_KEY 7 6 KEY_WAKE GATE Q7022,7024 Q7002 Q7025 BUFFER SIRCS CN7004 STBY_5V 2 3 NC 4 5

STBY_5V
SIRCS P_SW P_ON TO H2 BOARD CN1200

TO PD BOARD CN9504

I_RXD_ATSC I_TXD_ATSC Y 13 PB 11 NC PR 9 NC SDATA SCLK CN7003 PC_R PC_L ATSC_R ATSC_L HDMI_R HDMI_L HDMI_Y MTU_R MTU_L CVY_MAIN TU_H_MAIN SUB_Y SUB_C TU_H_SUB AFT_SUB AD_RST AD_MUTE LINE_MUTE SIRCS USER_RXD USER_TXD I2C_SDA I2C_SCL SDA1(IFP_SDA) SCL(IFP_SCL) AC_RLY SW_9V STBY5V SW3.3V D5V ATSC_5V A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A26 A27 A32 A36 A37 A38 B38 A39 A41 B42 A45 B46 A49 A50 SW_9V STBY5V SW3.3V D5V ATSC_5V D_OVP_M LINE MUTE AD_MUTE O_LMUTE2 O_AD_MUTE Q7005,7007, 7008 OVP I/F R L Y MTU_R MTU_L MTU_V CVY_MAIN M-H SUB_Y SUB_C S-H AFT_SUB AD_RST AD_MUTE LINE_MUTE SIRCS USER_RXD USER_TXD I2C_SDA I2C_SCL I2CMSDA1 I2CMSCL1 AC_RLY POW_CTL Q7006,7009 BUFFER AC_RLY O_AC_RLY SW_5V 4 3 Y USER_TXD USER_RXD SDA_X SCL_X O_ATSC_RST O_ANT_N O_ANT_S ATSC_R ATSC_L DATA SELECT DETCT Q7026,7027,7036 DATA SELECTDETECT Q7028,7029,7037 DATA SELECTER MAIN DATA SELECTER SUB IO_SDAT IO_SCLK

RXD_ATSC TXD_ATSC USER_TXD USER_RXD Q7004 ATSC_RST CN7950 ATSC_R ATSC_L MTU_V MTU_R MTU_R Q7011,7013 LEVEL SHIFT I2C_SDA I2C_SCL I2C_SCL_X I2C_SDA_X 2 R 4 L 7 TU1V 9 TU1R 10 TU1L 13 SCLK 14 SDAT TO QT BOARD CN7901

MS0 MS1

IC7005
BUS SWITCH 9 11 1 3 O_BUS_SW1 5,6,12,13 Q7020 IO_BDAT IO_BCLK Q7019 Q7021 O_NVM_PR O_NVM_RST TRSTX I_RESET 8 10 2 4 I2C_SDA_X I2C_SCL_X I2C_3.3_SDA I2C_3.3_SCL
Q2319 ANT_S ANT_M Q2318 ATSC_5V ATSC_A9V 1 3 4 5 CN7955 MS1 MS2 5V 9V MS1 MS2 5V 9V 1 3 4 5 00B SPLITTER TO QT BOARD MAIN TUNER MAIN

IC7006
LB ERROR 2 VCC OUT 1 I_LB_ERROR

IC7004
NVM DAT 5 CLK 6 WP 7 SA0 8

TO ASU BOARD SUB TUNER

SUB

TO DSU BOARD CN2006

IC7003
RESET 4 RST VCC 5 SW_3.3V
RXD_ATSC TXD_ATSC ATSC_RST

VHF/UHF

CABLE

1 2 3

CN7951 ATSC-XRD ATSC_XTX ATSC_RST

TO QMDV BOARD CN7300

POW_CTL Q7015,7017

I_DOVP

S-H M-H TO DSU BOARD (3/4)

I_SUB_HIN I_MAIN_HIN

3 4 5 9

SUB Y/C

TO DSU BOARD (1/4) TO DSU BOARD (1/4) TO DSU BOARD (3/4)

SYS-CTL

I2C-IF

Supplied as the service. ( The parts on this ASU/DSU block ass'y forindividually ) board are not supplied

DSU (4/4) SYSTEM CONTROL

– 31 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

BLOCK DIAGRAM (8)
D6205 RECT + L6202 L6203 D6217 R6322 1 Q6206,6207 SWITCHING 3 T6302 16 CN6501 LAMP DC TO LAMP LAMP GND

IC6301
SWITCHING REGULATOR Q6203,6205 SWITCHING DRIVE VSENSE 1 VG(H) 23

R6302

D6407 RECT + -

CN6408 1 2 4 5 D6406 AUDIO_VCC AUDIO_VCC AUDIO_GND AUDIO_GND CN6502 1 2 6 6.5V SW9V SW9V THRU5V SUB11V SUB6.5V SUB6.5V SUB6.5V SUB6.5V REC_ON TO ASU BOARD CN2100 D6501 16.5V 41 STBY5V TO K BOARD CN2602

IC6203 IC6202
PRE REGULATOR 16 2 CONTROLLER PH6201 1 VS 22 VG(L) 20

Q6301 DRIVE 4 Q6302 DRIVE

15

IC6401
1 +9V REG. 2 4 SW_9V

14

D6408 13 2

13 Q6210 2 7 Q6201 3 13 9 10 14 9
PRI_VCC1

OCP 16

12 D6410 1

IC6402
+5V REG. 2 THRU_5V SUBEG11V

9 | 15 22 24 25 26 37

4 3

1

SHUNT 2 REGULATOR

IC6204

D6308 VC1 15 FB 2

6

11 10 D6401

7 9

8 6 Q6204 D6201,6225

Q6212,6213 BUFFER

Q6202 D6208,6226 THERMOSTAT THRMO1 1 THRMO2 3 VCC (IC6202,6203) THRU_5V Q6219 Q6209 DRIVE 3 PH6301

49 50 1

16.5V 16.5V

IC6201
+5V REG. 3 OUT VCC 1 Q6214 CTL 2 Q6215,6216 LATCH D6219

Q6218 +B SWITCH PH6203 Q6303,6304 LATCH

SHUNT REGULATOR

IC6405

2

43 31 32

P-SW(-) AC_RLY PFC_DET

R6007

Q6208 RY6002 Q6217 Q6001 RELAY DRIVER RY6001 Q6201 GATE

RLYON

PH6202

T6101 2

D6104 RECT

1
F6001 L6002 CN6001 AC IN L6003 CN6018 CN6014

D6100 RECT 2 AC (L) 1 AC (N) AC (L) 2 AC (N) 1

+

8

11

D6105 RECT

STBY5V

AC (L) 1 AC (N) 2

IC6101
SWITCHING REGULATOR 8 7 2 D6103 4 3 4 6 10

F (AC LINE FILTER)

3 PH6101

3 1 2

SHUNT REGULATOR

IC6102

G (POWER SUPPLY)

– 32 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

BLOCK DIAGRAM (9)

IC2602
RESET 2 VCC RESET 1

IC2603
+3.3V REG. 1 VIN VOUT 3 CONT 2 CN2600 7P 1 5.0V SUB 3.3V

IC2601
GATE 1 4 2 1 2 GATE 4 SCSHIFT SCDT OF_FLAG SCLTCH CN2604
XMODE

IC3002 (1/2)
CN3002 A_MUTE M_RST 14 6 D+3.3V 14 6 A_MUTE XMODE BUFFER 5 6 4

IC3006
PCM/PWM PROCESSOR 19 SOFTMUTE 27 INIT XFSDIN 48 X3001 49.1MHz

IC3007
CLOCK GENERATOR 4 2

IC3004
BUS BUFFER 11 9 8 7 5 3 4 1 SCSHIFT SCDT OF_FLAG SCLTCH DIR-DATA BCK LRCK CKOUT SCSHIFT SCDT DF_FLAG KCLATCH LR_DATA BCLK LRCK MCLK 11 9 8 7 5 3 4 1 2 4 3 6 8 7 9 18 16 17 14 12 13 11 22 SCSHIFT 21 SCDT 23 SCLATCH 31 30 29 36 25 24 DATA BCK LRCK XFSDN FLAGL DVF DVF FLAGR OUTL1 OUTL2 OUTR1 OUTR2

Q2602

IC2614

TO ASU BOARD CN501

IC3005
DIGITAL POWER AMP AUDIO L 11 9 AUDIO R 6 4 AUDIO L 33 30 AUDIO R 25 22 AUDIO L LPF AUDIO R 1 2 3 4 CN3003 L+ LR+ RSPEAKER (R-CH) SPEAKER (L-CH)

34

SPDIF-

6

3 DINO

CN2603 20P SP_PROT 7 A_MUTE 8 OF_FLAG 9 3.3V_SW 10

SP_PROT OF_FLAG 3.3V_SW

DATA(O) 16 BCK(O) 14 LRCK(O) 15 CKOUT(O) 13

4 6 14 16

PWM_A PWM_B PWM_C PWM_D

OUT_A OUT_B OUT_C OUT_D

IC2600
DIGITAL AUDIO I/F RECEIVER

12
48 XMODE XIN(I) 22

AMP_RST

AMP_RST 12 11 12 13

5 /RST_AB 15 /RST_CD 3 /SD

Q3002,3003 Q3005,3006 ZERO VOLTAGE DETECT Q3004 PROTECT

TO ASU BOARD CN1

M_RST 13 SCLTCH 14 AMP_RST 15 SCDT 17 SCSHIFT 18

SCLTCH

OF_FLAG 3.3V_SW

13 15

SP-PROT 3.3V_SW

SP-PROT 13 3.3V_SW 15

SCDT SCSHIFT

XMODE

IC2612
CLOCK OSC 3 6 4 1

IC3002 (2/2)
GATE +12V +3.3V +1.8V 4

IC3001
+12V REG. 3 VOUT VIN 1

PS3001

CN3001 4 3 2 1 PVDD PVDD GND GND TO G BOARD CN6002

IC3003
+3.3V REG.

ON OFF CONT 2

IC3008
+1.8V REG.

5

X2600 24.576MHz

3 VOUT VIN 1 ON OFF CONT 2

AK (DIGITAL AUDIO I/F)

Supplied as the ass'y for service. ( The parts on this boardblock not supplied individually ) are

K (AUDIO AMP)

– 33 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

BLOCK DIAGRAM (10)

J9504 L HMDI IN 6 AUDIO R

IC9507
HDMI RECEIVER

IC9506 IC9502
AUDIO D/A CONVERTER 1 2 SDAT SCLK L 8 AUDIO SWITCH 14 L1 5 R1 LX 13 15 L2 RX 3 2 R2 CN9504 7 6 L R

SDO 84 SCK 86

R 5

IC9500
VIDEO BUFFER CN9500 D2+/D1+/D0+/HMDI IN 6 CLK+/DDC CLK DDC DAT 52,51 1,2 4,5 7,9 12,13 48,47 R0X2+/R0X1+/44,43 R0X0+/40,39 R0XC+/ANGY 17 ANBPB 20 ANRPR 14 4 6 2 Y1IN PB1IN PR1IN Y 8 13 11 9 4 3 Y PB PR SDATA SCLK CN9502 TX1OUT3+/TX1CLK+/TX1OUT2+/TX1OUT1+/TX1OUT0+/TO ASU BOARD CN7952

5 PB 8 PR

IC9509
15 16 LEVEL SHIFT

32 DSCL0 31 DSDA0 Y0-7 71,70 R1X2+/67,66 R1X1+/63,62 R1X0+/59,58 R1XC+/30 29 DSCL1 DSDA1 CSCL CSDA 28 27 37 38 C0-7 R0-7

IC9504
CN9501 D2+/D1+/D0+/HMDI IN 7 CLK+/DDC CLK DDC DAT EDID NVM 1,2 4,5 7,9 12,13

IC7005
LVD TRANSMITTER 37,38 39,40 41,42 45,46 47,48 1,2 4,5 7,8 10,11 13,14 TO DSU BOARD CN4201

IC9519
15 16 LEVEL SHIFT

IC9517
SUB SYSTEM CONTROL 20 21

IC9518
EDID NVM IO_SCL1 IO_SDA1

IO_SDA_TV IO_SCL_TV

OSC1 9

OSC2 8

X9501 10MHz

PD ( HDMI RECEIVER ) (

Supplied as the block ass'y for service. The parts on this board are not supplied individually

)

– 34 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

BLOCK DIAGRAM (11)

S7150 CN7952 CD2# MDO2 D2 MDO1 D1 MDO0 D0 MOSTRT A0 MOVAL A1 A2 INPACK# A3 WAIT# A4_CTX RESET A5_ITX A6_ETX MDI7 A7_QTX MDI6 A12 MDI5 MCLKI MDI4 MIVAL VPP-2 VPP-1 VCC VCC MDI3 IREQ# MDI2 WE# MDI1 MCK0 MDI0 A13 MISTRT A8_CRX IOWR# A9_DRX IORD# A11 VS1# OE# CE2# A10 MDO7 CE1# MDO6 D7 MDO5 D6 MDO4 D5 MDO3 D4 CD1# D3 B33 B32 A32 B31 A31 B30 A30 B29 A29 B28 A28 A27 B26 A26 B25 A25 B24 A24 A23 B22 A22 B21 A21 B20 A20 B19 A19 B18 A18 B17 A17 B16 A16 B15 A15 B14 A14 B13 A13 B12 A12 B11 A11 B10 A10 B9 A9 B8 A8 B7 A7 B6 A6 B5 A5 B4 A4 B3 A3 B2 A2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 17 18 19 21 22 23 24 26 27 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 40 41 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 CN7953 CD2# MDO2 D2 MDO1 D1 MDO0 D0 MOSTRT A0 MOVAL A1 A2 INPACK# A3 WAIT# A4_CTX RESET A5_ITX A6_ETX MDI7 A7_QTX MDI6 A12 MDI5 MCLKI MDI4 MIVAL VPP-1, 2 VCC MDI3 IREQ# MDI2 WE# MDI1 MCK0 MDI0 A13 MISTRT A8_CRX IOWR# A9_DRX IORD# A11 VS1# OE# CE2# A10 MDO7 CE1# MDO6 D7 MDO5 D6 MDO4 D5 MDO3 D4 CD1# D3 CN7951 VCC VCC VPP TO QT BOARD CN7903 LAMP DOOR DETECTION 1 2 3 CN7150 LAMP_COV NC GND TO ASU BOARD CN2390 S7005 S7004 FUNCTION S7002 VOLUME+ S7001 CHANNELS7000 CHANNEL+ S7003 VOLUME2 3 1

CN7000 KEY GND GND TO AGU BOARD CN8004

T1 (LAMP DOOR DETECTION )
S7156 CN7156 LAMP CONNECTOR DETECTION 1 2 3 LAMP_POS NC GND TO ASU BOARD CN2390

MENU

H1 (PANEL SWITCH )
G R Q7023 LED DRIVER Q7022 LED DRIVER Q7021 LED DRIVER Q7020 LED DRIVER 1 STBY +3.3V CN7020 1 STBY3.3V 4 P_MUTE_LED 3 TIMER_LED 5 LAMP_LED 8 POW_LED 7 LINK_LED Q7024 LED DRIVER

T3 (LAMP CONNECTOR DETECTION )
IC7100 CN7100 TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 1 8 4 3 1 SCL_E SDA_E SET_5V

TIMER

D7024

LAMP

D7023

POWER/ D7022 STANDBY

G R

TO ASU BOARD CNXXXX

IC7020

OUT

IC7021 4 2 LEVEL CHANGE

9 SIRCS 10 P.ON

Cable Card

S1 (LAMP TEMPERATURE )
IC7120 CN7120 TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 1 8 4 3 1 SCL_E SDA_E SET_5V TO ASU BOARD CN2303

S7020 POWER

H2 (SIRCS,LED) S2 (LAMP TEMPERATURE )

1 2 5

TO QT BOARD CN7904

QU (CABLE CARD

CONNECTOR)

– 35 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

BLOCK DIAGRAM (12)
Supplied as the Q box ass'y for service. ( The parts on this board are not supplied individually )
MAIN TO SPLITTER OOB

TU7901
OOB TUNER
SDA SCL VALID TUL

TU7900
MAIN TUNER
TUR TUV

DATA

TO ASU BOARD CN7950

CN7901 TU1V TU1R TU1L SCLK SDAT

2 4 6 8 9

TUR TUR TUL SCL SDA

CLK

IC7318,7319
NAND FLASH

IC7300
ATI,X226/MPEG2,A/V DEC,VIDEO CAPTURE, GRAPHIC SCALER,USB I/F,CPU

AD0-15

IC7900,IC7904
POD I/F CONTROL TIDO, TICLK, TIVAL

IC7321
GFX PLL

8 6

CN7900
HD0-7

CN7306
AD0-7

8

16 6

AD0-15

AD0-15

IDE_IMRQ IDE_DMARQ VCXO_INA

11 14 12

HSO VSO CLK

HSI VSI

5 4

CN7302

CN7903 D0-7 TO QU BOARD CN7953 A0-11 MDI1-7 MDO0-7
8
D0-7

32 6 34 36 38 9

HA0,1,HCS_SDA, HRW_SCL,HIRQ HACK BOUT02-11

2 4

HS-IN VS-IN

NC

12 8 8

A0-11 MDI0-7

VSOUT HSOUT

MDO0-7

TOD TOCLK TOVAL TOSTART

4

TS-FE BUS

4

TVLDA,TSTRTA TDAA0,TCLKA

XTALOUT X7300 26.1621MHz DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) OUT PCM/DOLBY DIGITAL XTALIN

QT ( TUNER )
CN7312 OUT

IC5015

IC601
i.LINK, LINK/PHY CN702 CN602
PCI_AD0-31

i.LINK S400 TS/DV/ MICROMTV/ HDV

1 2 3 4 CN703

TPA2P/N TPB2P/N

PCI_AD0-31 GOUT02-11

PCI DATA BUS PCI CNTROL BUS

32

CN7305
PCI_AD0-31

32
AD0-31 GIN0-9

12SSD_OUTA 12SWS_OUTA 12SSDSCK_OUTA

DATA LRCK MCK

CN7309

IC7327
AUDIO D/A CONVERTER

12 8

AUDIO_LOUT AUDIO_ROUT

NC

TS/DV/ MICROMTV/ HDV

1 2 3 4

TPA1P/N TPB1P/N
656_Y0-7

656/601 CONVERTER

IC7341

IC7342
LVDS TRANSMITER
601_Y0-7 601_C0-7 601_R0-7 37,38 39,40 41,42 45,46 47,48 1,2 4,5 7,8 10,11 13,14

CN7313
TX1OUT3+/TX1CLK+/TX1OUT2+/TX1OUT1+/TX1OUT0+/TO DSU BOARD CN4200

IC802
DV DEC

656_C0-7 656_R0-7

i.S400

CN704 1 2 3 4

UART1_RX TPA0P/N UART1_TX TPB0P/N

UART1_RX UART1_TX

TXD_P43 RXD_P44

i.LINK

IC7332
STREAM20-27 DV656 BUS 9 CN701 CN7308 DV656_D0-7DV656_CLK

LVDS TRANSMITER
TSTRTB0-7
FAD0-15 /FCE0-5 GRAPHICS DATA BUS R2-9 G2-9 B2-9
DD+

18,19 20,21 22,23 24,25 28,29 30,31

DV656_D0-7DV656_CLK DVI2S BUS 3

X2 X701 24.576MHz X1 PCM1, ABCK, ALRCK STREAM10-17 12S_WS,12S_SD,12S_SCK

1,2 4,5 7,8 10,11 13,14 16,17

CN7304 TE+/TD+/TCLK+/TC+/TB+/TA+/-

NC

HSDIO_D0-7 HSDIO_DVALID HSDIO_ERROR

HSDIO BUS 10

USBNA USBPA

IC7331
12/24 BIT DMUX

CN7311

IC7322,7324 IC7323,7325

QI ( I.LINK )

IC703
SDRAM

DRAM-A

DRAM-B

2 3

DD+

QMDV ( VIDEO CAPTURE,CPU )
Supplied as the Q box ass'y for service. ( The parts on this board are not supplied individually )

TO HM BOARD CN7201 (USB)

Supplied as the Q box ass'y for service. ( The parts on this board are not supplied individually )

– 36 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

4-2. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

1
J303 CONTROL S IN

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13
TO DSU (2/2)

14

A
AUDIO OUT (VAR/FIX)

J301 CONTROL S OUT J307 L AUDIO R CN2303 11P WHT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 MIX5V LOGO GND SCL SDA GND D5V SCL SDA GND D5V

TU2100 SUB TUNER CN7003 100P A1 B1 A2 B2 A3 B3 A4 B4 A5 B5 A6 B6 A7 B7 A8 B8 A9 B9 A10 B10 A11 B11 A12 B12 A13 B13 A14 B14 A15 B15 A16 B16 A17 B17 A18 B18 A19 B19 A20 B20 A21 B21 A22 B22 A23 B23 A24 B24 A25 B25 A26 B26 A27 B27 A28 B28 A29 B29 A30 B30 A31 B31 A32 B32 A33 B33 A34 B34 A35 B35 A36 B36 A37 B37 A38 B38 A39 B39 A40 B40 A41 B41 A42 B42 A43 B43 A44 B44 A45 B45 A46 B46 A47 B47 A48 B48 A49 B49 A50 B50 PC_R GND PC_L GND ATSC_R GND ATSC_L GND HDMI_R GND HDMI_L GND HDMI_Y GND MTV_R GND MTV_L GND MTV_V GND CVY_MAIN GND TU_H_MAIN GND SUB_Y GND SUB_C GND TU_H_SUB GND AFT_SUB GND AD_RST GND AD_MUTE GND LINE_MUTE GND SIRCS GND USER_RXD GND USER_TXD GND 12C_SDA GND 12C_SCL GND SYSTEM_RST GND SDA1(IFP_SDA) GND SCL(IFP_SCL) GND +B-INT GND JIG_UDM GND JIG_UDP GND JIG_VBUS GND AC_RLY GND SET_ON(POW_CTL) GND IFP_VSYNC GND STBY_3.3V GND SW_9V GND SW_9V GND STBY5V STBY5V STBY5V GND GND GND SW3.3V SW3.3V SW3.3V SW3.3V GND GND GND GND D5V D5V D5V D5V GND GND GND GND ATSC_5V GND ATSC_5V GND CN2006 100P BLK PC_R GND PC_L GND ATSC_R GND ATSC_L GND HDMI_R GND HDMI_L GND HDMI_Y GND MTU_R GND MTU_L GND MTU_V GND CVY_MAIN GND TU_H_MAIN GND SUB_Y GND SUB_C GND TU_H_SUB GND AFT_SUB GND AD_RST GND AD_MUTE GND LINE_MUTE GND SIRCS GND USER_RXD GND USER_TXD GND I2C_SDA GND I2C_SCL GND SYSTEM_RST GND SDA1(IFP_SDA) GND SCL(IFP_SCL) GND B-INT GND JIG_UDM GND JIG_UDP GND JIG_VBUS GND AC_RLY GND SET_ON GND IFP_VSYNC GND NC GND SW_9V GND SW_9V GND STBY5V STBY5V STBY5V GND GND GND SW3.3V SW3.3V SW3.3V SW3.3V GND GND GND GND D5V D5V D5V D5V GND GND GND GND ATSC_5V GND ATSC_5V GND A1 B1 A2 B2 A3 B3 A4 B4 A5 B5 A6 B6 A7 B7 A8 B8 A9 B9 A10 B10 A11 B11 A12 B12 A13 B13 A14 B14 A15 B15 A16 B16 A17 B17 A18 B18 A19 B19 A20 B20 A21 B21 A22 B22 A23 B23 A24 B24 A25 B25 A26 B26 A27 B27 A28 B28 A29 B29 A30 B30 A31 B31 A32 B32 A33 B33 A34 B34 A35 B35 A36 B36 A37 B37 A38 B38 A39 B39 A40 B40 A41 B41 A42 B42 A43 B43 A44 B44 A45 B45 A46 B46 A47 B47 A48 B48 A49 B49 A50 B50 A1 B1 A2 B2 A3 B3 A4 B4 A5 B5 A6 B6 A7 B7 A8 B8 A9 B9 A10 B10 A11 B11 A12 B12 A13 B13 A14 B14 A15 B15 A16 B16 A17 B17 A18 B18 A19 B19 A20 B20 A21 B21 A22 B22 A23 B23 A24 B24 A25 B25 A26 B26 A27 B27 A28 B28 A29 B29 A30 B30 A31 B31 A32 B32 A33 B33 A34 B34 A35 B35 A36 B36 A37 B37 A38 B38 A39 B39 A40 B40 A41 B41 A42 B42 A43 B43 A44 B44 A45 B45 A46 B46 A47 B47 A48 B48 A49 B49 A50 B50 CN2010 100P BLK ATSC_9V GND ATSC_11V ATSC_11V ATSC_11V ATSC_11V GND GND GND GND TVM_TXD GND TVM_RXD GND IFP_TXD GND IFP_RXD GND NC GND I_MAIN_C GND GND LAMP_ON I_MAIN_CV MUTE GND MUTE2 I_MAIN_R PANEL_ON GND WP2 I_MAIN_B ROCK_RESET GND LVDS_PD I_MAIN_G GND GND NC SENS_SCL NC SENS_SDA NC DE_BUSY GND I_USBCONNECT NC I_USBDMNS SDA_E GND GND I_USBDPLS SCL_E SENB SCLK SDAT GND IRIS_GAIN I_UARTTXDP IRIS_CTRL IRIS_FB GND I_UARTRXDP GND GND SW_2.5V SW_2.5V SW_2.5V SW_2.5V GND GND SW_3.3V SW_3.3V SW_3.3V SW_3.3V GND GND SW_5V SW_5V GND GND GND GND SUB_6.5V SUB_6.5V SUB_6.5V SUB_6.5V SUB_6.5V SUB_6.5V SUB_6.5V SUB_6.5V GND GND A16.5V GND A16.5V GND GND GND CN4000 100P ATSC_9V GND ATSC_11V ATSC_11V ATSC_11V ATSC_11V GND GND GND GND TVM_TXD GND TVM_RXD GND IFP_TXD GND IFP_RXD GND STBY_2.5V GND I_MAIN_C GND GND LAMP_ON I_MAIN_CV MUTE GND MUTE2 I_MAIN_R WP GND WP2 I_MAIN_B ROCK_RESET GND LVDS_PD I_MAIN_G GND GND I_BOOTMODE SENS_SCL D_1.8V SENS_SDA D_1.2V NC GND I_USBCONNECT NC I_USBDMNS SDA_E GND GND I_USBDPLS SCL_E SENB_D SCL_D SDAT_D GND IRIS_GAIN I_UARTTXDP IRIS_CTRL IRIS_FB GND I_UARTRXDP GND GND SW_2.5V SW_2.5V SW_2.5V SW_2.5V GND GND SW_3.3V SW_3.3V SW_3.3V SW_3.3V GND GND SW_5V SW_5V GND GND GND GND SUB_6.5V SUB_6.5V SUB_6.5V SUB_6.5V SUB_6.5V SUB_6.5V SUB_6.5V SUB_6.5V GND GND A16.5V GND A16.5V GND GND GND A1 B1 A2 B2 A3 B3 A4 B4 A5 B5 A6 B6 A7 B7 A8 B8 A9 B9 A10 B10 A11 B11 A12 B12 A13 B13 A14 B14 A15 B15 A16 B16 A17 B17 A18 B18 A19 B19 A20 B20 A21 B21 A22 B22 A23 B23 A24 B24 A25 B25 A26 B26 A27 B27 A28 B28 A29 B29 A30 B30 A31 B31 A32 B32 A33 B33 A34 B34 A35 B35 A36 B36 A37 B37 A38 B38 A39 B39 A40 B40 A41 B41 A42 B42 A43 B43 A44 B44 A45 B45 A46 B46 A47 B47 A48 B48 A49 B49 A50 B50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 CN4200 14 BLK MRXIN0MRXIN0+ DRAIN MRXIN1MRXIN1+ DRAIN MRXIN2MRXIN2+ DRAIN MRXCLKMRXCLK+ DRAIN MRXIN3MRXIN3+ CN4201 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 MRXIN0MRXIN0+ DRAIN MRXIN1MRXIN1+ DRAIN MRXIN2MRXIN2+ DRAIN MRXCLKMRXCLK+ DRAIN MRXIN3MRXIN3+ CN7650 21P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 GRAGRA+ GND GRBGRB+ GND GRCGRC+ GND GRCLKGRCLK+ GND GRDGRD+ GND GREGRE+ GND GND GND GND CN7002 8P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 STBY3.3V RESET MD2 BUSY 3 E SI0 SO0 SCLK0 CN7401 4P 1 2 3 4 SCL SDA MP GND CN7001 XX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 UVCC XTRST XRSTIN CINIT BREAK ICD3 ICD2 ICD1 ICD0 ICS2 ICS1 ICS0 GND ICLK

ASU (AUDIO/VIDEO INPUT SELECT)
Supplied as the ass'y for service. ( The parts on this ASU/DSU blocksupplied individually ) board are not
SW1

J309

NC

B
S VIDEO 1 VIDEO 1 IN VIDEO

3

4 2

CN7100 4P SCL_E SDA_E E SET_5V CN7120 4P SCL_E SDA_E E SET_5V

1 2 3 4 5 4 3 2 1

MS1 GND MS2 5V 9V

CN7955 5P MS1 GND MS2 5V 9V

1 2 3 4 5

F

( (

S1 ANBI TEMPERATURE S2 PANEL TEMPERATURE T1 LAMP DOOR DETECTION

SPLITTER

)
A C

O

B C
CN7950 20P

V1

FLASH

L (MONO) AUDIO R

L1

R1

C
SW2 3 S VIDEO 1 4 2

CN2 8P STBY3.3V RESET MD2 BUSY3 GND SI0 SO0 SCK0 CN2007 42P GND GND TV_BINT E_BINT SCL_TV SDA_TV SCL_IFP SDA_IFP SCL_DEM_100K SDA_DEM_100K SCL_DEM_400K SDA_DEM_400K 3.3V KILL_WE TVM_TXD TVM_RXD IFP_TXD IFP_RXD DEM_TXD DEM_RXD 5V 5V TVM_UDP TVM_UDM TVM_VBUS NC IFP_UDP IFP_UDM IFP_VBUS 3.3V DEM_UDP DEM_UDM DEM_VBUS NC MD2 P61 RESET DTT_LOG TU_V_OUT GND GND GND

M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CN2390 10P WHT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FLAG F_GND D3.3V LAMP_ON LAMP_POWER LAMP HV GND LAMP_COVER GND NC

A
LOOP ANT

4 3 2 1

)

VHF/UHF

CABLE

VIDEO 3 IN

VIDEO

V2

L (MONO)

L2

D

AUDIO R R2

Y

J304 5P

VG

PB

VB

HD/DVD 4 IN

PR

VR

E
AUDIO

L

L

R

CN3004 XX 1 2 3 4 GND 1.8V 3.3V 12V CN3001 4P WHT 1 2 3 4 GND GND PVDD PVDD

J310 Y 5P

VG

PB

VB

( )
Supplied as the block ass'y for service. The parts on this board are not supplied individually
FAN FAN FAN

AUDIO

F

HD/DVD 5 IN

PR

VR

EB3001 1 EB3002 1 EB3003 XX 1

CN4600 6P GND TMS TDI TRST TCK TDO 1 2 3 4 5 6

L AUDIO R

L

R CN502 9P WHT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MCLK GND BCLK LRCK LR_DATA M_RST AMP_RST A_MUTE 3.3V_SW FAN

CN7957 1 CN7958 1

G
CN7050 S VIDEO 1 3 4 2

CN7052 12P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CN004 12P
S SW2 S2 2 GND C2 GND Y2 GND V2 GND L2 GND R2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

NC CN7959 1 CN7960 1

VIDEO 2 INPUT

J7050 VIDEO

L (MONO)

S SW2 S2 2 GND C2 GND Y2 GND V2 GND L2 GND R2 CN7051 1P

FAN1-POW FAN1-PROT GND FAN2-POW FAN2-PROT GND FAN3-POW FAN3-PROT GND FAN4-POW FAN4-PROT GND FAN5-POW FAN5-PROT GND

FAN1-POW FAN2-POW FAN3-POW FAN4-POW GND

1 CN2008

1 CN2009

1 CN2011

1 CN2013

1 CN2014

1 CN2019

1 CN2020

1 CN2015

1 CN2016

1 CN2012

1 CN2018

1 CN2017

CN2301 15P WHT

CN2304 5P

CN7691 1 CN7692 1 CN7693 1 CN7694 1 CN7695 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

R

SW9V SW9V GND GND 18V THRU5V GND GND SUB11V SUB11V SUB11V SUB11V SUB11V SUB11V SUB11V GND GND GND GND GND GND SUB6.5V GND SUB6.5V SUB6.5V SUB6.5V GND GND GND GND AC_RLY PFC_DET GND GND GND GND REC_ON GND GND +B_OVP STBY5V GND P-SW(-) Tu32V GND GND GND GND A16.5V A16.5V

H

AUDIO

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

1 2 3 4 5

CN7696 1 CN7697 1 CN7698 1

15

R

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42

CN7150 3P LAM_COV 1 NC 2 GND 3

( (

)
D

CN7156 3P LAMP_POS 1 NC 2 GND 3 CN501 7P WHT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SUB_6.5V GND 11V GND SPDIF+/NC SPDIFGND CN1 20P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 GND GND SDA_P SCL_P CH_M/S_SW CH_IIC_SW SP_PROT A_MUTE OVF 3.3V_SW CH_WP CH_RST M_RST SCLTCH AMP_RST SCLTCH2 SCDT SCSHIFT GND GND

T3 LAMP CONNECTOR DETECTION

)

CN2600 7P 5.0V GND SUB11V GND SPDIF+/NC SPDIFGND CN2603 20P GND GND DAT_D SLK_D CH_M/S_SW CH_IIC_SW SP_PROT A_MUTE OF_FLAG 3.3V_SW CH_WP CH_RST M_RST SCLTCH AMP_RST SCLTCH2 SCDT SCSHIFT GND GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

GND R GND L N_C AFTM TU1V GND TU1R GND TU1L GND SCLK SDAT AGC_MUTE NC NC H V GND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

G

JIG CONNECTOR

CN2604 15P WHT CKOUT GND BCK LRCK DIR-DATA XMODE SCLTCH OF_FLAG SCDT GND SCSHIFT AMP_RST SP_PROT A_MUTE 3.3V_SW

CN3002 15P WHT MCLK GND BCLK LRCK LR_DATA M_RST SCLATCH1 OF_FLAG SCDT GND SCSHIFT AMP_RST SP_PROT A_MUTE 3.3V_SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 L+ LR+ R-

CN3003 4P

SPXXX SPEAKER (L-CH)

CN7400 15P BLK

DSU

ASU

DSU

(

AK DIGITAL AUDIO INTERFACE

)

K (AUDIO AMP)

SPXXX SPEAKER (R-CH)

RGB 8 PC IN

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J7400

H3 (VIDEO 2 IN)

1 E

1 CN2021

XX XX XX

CN2100 50P

CN7053 NC
1 2 3 4

1 CN2022 1 CN2023

CN7000 3P GND 1 KEY 2 GND 3

AUDIO_VCC AUDIO_VCC NC AUDIO GND AUDIO GND

SW9V SW9V GND GND 18V THRU5V GND GND SUB11V SUB11V SUB11V SUB11V SUB11V SUB11V SUB11V GND GND GND GND GND GND SUB6.5V GND SUB6.5V SUB6.5V SUB6.5V GND GND GND GND AC_RLY PFC_DET GND GND GND GND REC_ON GND GND +B_OVP STBY5V GND P-SW(-) Tu32V GND GND GND GND A16.5V A16.5V

HP_SW HP_L HP_R GND

H1 (PANEL SWITCH)

CN6502 50P BLK

CN6408 5P

I

1 E

SW_5V STBY5V PCSTBY_LED TIMER_LED STBY_LED POWER_LED REC_LED LAMP_ERR_LED ILINK_LED GND GND PICOFF_LED KEY1 KEY2 GND

GND STBY_5V SIRCS P_SW P_ON

CN6001 2P AC(L) 1 AC(N) 2 CN6051
E 1

CN6053

THEARMOSTAT

CN6015 3P THERMO1 1 2 THERMO2 3 CN6301
E 1

DSU (CCPX/OSD/DRC)

Supplied as the ass'y for service. ( The parts on this ASU/DSU blocksupplied individually ) board are not
1 2 3 4 5 6

CN7020 11P
STBY 5V GND TIMER LED P_MUTE LED LAMP LED GND ILINK LED POW LED SIRCS GND P ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

CN6052
E 1

(

F AC LINE FILTER

CN6054

)

1 E

G (DTL MODULE POWER SUPPLY)

CN7005 15P WHT

CN7004 6P

CN6018 2P 1 AC(L) 2 AC(N)

CN6014 2P AC(L) 2 AC(N) 1

CN6501 3P
1 LAMP DC 2 3 LAMP GND

(

H2 SIRCS LED

)

E

J
– 37 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10
Cable CARD

11

12

13

14

A

TO DSU (1/2)

CN7952 PCMCIA CARD

C (LCD DRIVER)
CN4202 38P BLK 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LVDSGND TA1TA1+ LVDSGND TB1TB1+ LVDSGND TC1TC1+ LVDSGND TCLK1TCLK1+ LVDSGND TD1TD1+ LVDSGND TE1TE1+ LVDSGND LVDSGND TA2TA2+ LVDSGND TB2TB2+ LVDSGND TC2TC2+ LVDSGND TCLK2TCLK2+ LVDSGND TD2TD2+ LVDSGND TE2TE2+ HDMI_ERR CN9000 38P BLK LVDSGND RA1RA1+ LVDSGND RB1RB1+ LVDSGND RC1RC1+ LVDSGND RCLK1RCLK1+ LVDSGND RD1RD1+ LVDSGND RE1RE1+ LVDSGND LVDSGND RA2RA2+ LVDSGND RB2RB2+ LVDSGND RC2RC2+ LVDSGND RCLK2RCLK2+ LVDSGND RD2RD2+ LVDSGND RERE2+ GND(HDMI_ERR) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Supplied optics block ass'y for ( The parts onas theboard are not supplied service. ) this individually

RED
CN9400 50P GRY GND VCC TEST_EN Tdat BUSY TMON GND HCK VCK HST VST RST RGT DWN VCC GND VPC VCOM VDMY VCOM GND SIG(0) SIG(1) SIG(2) SIG(3) SIG(4) SIG(5) SIG(6) SIG(7) SIG(8) SIG(9) SIG(10) SIG(11) SIG(12) SIG(13) SIG(14) SIG(15) SIG(16) SIG(17) SIG(18) SIG(19) SIG(20) SIG(21) SIG(22) SIG(23) GND TOUT VDD VDD GND

BLUE
CN9050 8P 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DUMP + DUMP HOUT HIN HOUT + HIN + DRIVE DRIVE +

B

C

D

CN7956 20P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 GND GND SENS_SCL GND SENS_SDA GND WP2 SDA_E GND SCL_E GND GND SENB SCLK POW_CTL SDA1 IRIS_CTRL IRIS_GAIN IRIS_FB LVDS_PD

CN6901 20P GND GND SENS_SCL GND SENS_SDA GND WP2 SDA_E GND SCL_E GND GND SENB SCLK POW_CTL SDA1 IRIS_CTRL IRIS_GAIN IRIS_FB LVDS_PD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

E
DSU
Supplied as the ass'y for service. ( The parts on this ASU/DSU blocksupplied individually ) board are not

LCD

GND VCC TEST_EN Tdat BUSY TMON GND HCK VCK HST VST RST RGT DWN VCC GND VPC VCOM VDMY VCOM GND SIG(0) SIG(1) SIG(2) SIG(3) SIG(4) SIG(5) SIG(6) SIG(7) SIG(8) SIG(9) SIG(10) SIG(11) SIG(12) SIG(13) SIG(14) SIG(15) SIG(16) SIG(17) SIG(18) SIG(19) SIG(20) SIG(21) SIG(22) SIG(23) GND TOUT VDD VDD GND

CN7951 5P

CN7953 80P

VCC VCC GND GND VPP

CN6912 XX 1 2 3 4 SET_5V E SDA_E SCL_E

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

FE-SDA FE-SCL RESET-FE RESET2099 GND HA1 GND HA0 GND CS0 GND HRW GND HIRQ# GND HACK GND HD0 GND HD1 GND HD2 GND HD3 GND HD4 GND HD5 GND HD6 GND HD7 GND FE-SDATA GND FE-SCLK GND FE-VAL GND FE-SYNC

GND 9V GND 5V GND GND 3.3V 3.3V GND 2.5V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

AFT_M TU1V GND TU1R GND TU1L GND SCL SDA AGC_M

FE-SDA FE-SCL RESET-FE RESET2099 GND HA1 GND HA0 GND CS0 GND HRW GND HIRQ# GND HACK GND HD0 GND HD1 GND HD2 GND HD3 GND HD4 GND HD5 GND HD6 GND HD7 GND FE-SDATA GND FE-SCLK GND FE-VAL GND FE-SYNC

SPDIF GND LRCLK SCLK SDAT

1 2 3 4 5

AUDIO IN
R

Supplied as the Q box ass'y for service. The parts on this board are not supplied individually

)
CN7308 40P

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

L

(

)(

GND 9V GND 5V GND GND 3.3V 3.3V GND 2.5V

CN9507 # ZH

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

J9504 2P

HDMI IN 6

QM VIDEO/AUDIO DEC, VIDEO CAPTURE GRAPHIC SCALER
CN7313 14P FI-E14S-R1500 CN7304 LVDS OUT JAE FI-X20S-HF 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

CN9505 9P SR
DEBUG1 DEBUG2 P87 P86 P85 NMI VCC 3.3V RESET GND
CN9500 19P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

J9503 #

F

Supplied as the ass'y for service. ( The parts on this boardblock not supplied individually ) are

GREEN
CN9500 50P GRY 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 GND VCC TEST_EN Tdat BUSY TMON GND HCK VCK HST VST RST RGT DWN VCC GND VPC VCOM VDMY VCOM GND SIG(0) SIG(1) SIG(2) SIG(3) SIG(4) SIG(5) SIG(6) SIG(7) SIG(8) SIG(9) SIG(10) SIG(11) SIG(12) SIG(13) SIG(14) SIG(15) SIG(16) SIG(17) SIG(18) SIG(19) SIG(20) SIG(21) SIG(22) SIG(23) GND TOUT VDD VDD GND

F

CN6902 1 CN6903 1 CN6904 1 CN6905 1 CN6906 1 CN6907 1 CN6908 1 CN6909 1 CN6910 1 CN6911 1 CN6913 1 CN6914 1 CN6915 1 CN6916 1 CN6917 1
1

HDMI IN 6

CN7954 10P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A16.5V GND GND D6.5V D6.5V D6.5V GND GND GND GND

CN6900 10P WHT A16.5V GND GND D6.5V D6.5V D6.5V GND GND GND GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

HPD DDC +5V E DDC DAT DDC CLK NC CEC CLKE CLK+ DOE D0+ D1E D1+ D2E D2+

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

(

PD HDMI RECEIVER

)
CN9502 14P FI-E14S
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

TX1OUT0TX1OUT0+ DGND TX1OUT1TX1OUT1+ DGND TX1OUT2TX1OUT2+ DGND TX1CLKTX1CLK+ DGND TX1OUT3TX1OUT3+

CN7303 4P BLK JIG2

CN9501 19P
HPD DDC +5V E DDC DAT DDC CLK NC CEC CLKE CLK+ DOE D0+ D1E D1+ D2E D2+
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

TX1OUT0TX1OUT0+ DGND TX1OUT1TX1OUT1+ DGND TX1OUT2TX1OUT2+ DGND TX1CLKTX1CLK+ DGND TX1OUT3TX1OUT3+

( SERVICE) ONLY

3.3VIN GND RXDB TXDB

4 3 2 1

G

G

CN7952 14P WHT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 9V RESET SCL SDA AGND R L GND PR GND PB GND Y GND

HDMI IN 7

H

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

9V RESET SCLK SDAT A GND R L GND PR GND PB GND Y GND

CN7300 10P PHD-L

+9V +9V GND GND GND +5V GND BOX_RST-IN TV_TXD TV_RXD

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

GND-PR HS-OUT PR-OUT VS-OUT GND-PB GND-R PB-OUT AUDIO_ROUT GND-Y GND-L Y-OUT AUDIO_LOUT

CN7312 DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) OUT

PCM/ DOLBY DIGITAL

CN7951 12P

A

I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

ATSC_RXD ATSC_TXD ATSC_RST GND ATSC_5V GND GND GND ATSC_11V ATSC_11V GND ATSC_A9V

FLAG F_GND D3.3V LAMP_ON LAMP_POWER

1 2 3 4 5

CN7204 MS DUAL CONN

POWER SUPPLY BLOCK
1 2

MEMORY STICK LAMP

E

LAMP DC 1 2 LAMP GND 3

GND BS DATA1 DATA0 DATA2 INS DATA3 SCLK VDD GND CN7202 #

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

CN7201 USB SERIES B
1 2 3 4

CN7311 MOLEX USB VERTICAL
VBUS DD+ GND SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

(

HM (XS) MEMORY STICK I/F

)

VBUS DD+ GND

PCI_AD23 PCI_AD24 PCI_C/BE3# PCI_AD26 PCI_AD25 PCI_AD28 PCI_AD27 PCI_AD30 PCI_AD29 PCI_REQ1# PCI_AD31 PCI_GNT0# +3.3V PCI_GNT1# PCI_REQ0# +3.3V PCI_REQ2# PCI_RESET# PCI_GNT2# PCI_CLKOUT2 PCI_CLKOUT3 PCI_CLKOUT1

PCI_AD23 PCI_AD24 PCI_C/BE3# PCI_AD26 PCI_AD25 PCI_AD28 PCI_AD27 PCI_AD30 PCI_AD29 PCI_REQ1# PCI_AD31 PCI_GNT0# +3.3V PCI_GNT1# PCI_REQ0# +3.3V PCI_REQ2# PCI_RESET# PCI_GNT2# PCI_CLKOUT2 PCI_CLKOUT3 PCI_CLKOUT1

Supplied as the Q box ass'y for service. ( The parts on this board are not supplied individually )

CN9504 14P

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

1 2 3 4 5

GND GND CD2# IOIS16# MDO2 D2 MDO1 D1 MDO0 D0 MOSTRT GND A0 MOVAL A1 REG# A2 INPACK# A3 GND WAIT# A4_CTX RESET A5_ITX VS2# A6_ETX MDI7 GND A7_QTX MDI6 A12 MDI5 MCLKI MDI4 MIVAL VPP-2 VPP-2 VPP-2 VPP-1 VPP-1 VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC MDI3 IREQ# MDI2 WE# MDI1 MCLKO MDI0 GND A13 MISTRT A8_CRX IOWR# A9_DRX IORD# A11 GND VS1# OE# CE2# A10 MDO7 CE1# MDO6 GND D7 MDO5 D6 MDO4 D5 MDO3 D4 CD1# D3 GND GND

CN7904 5P

CN7903 80P

GND GND CD2# IOIS16# MDO2 D2 MDO1 D1 MDO0 D0 MOSTRT GND A0 MOVAL A1 REG# A2 INPACK# A3 GND WAIT# A4_CTX RESET A5_ITX VS2# A6_ETX MDI7 GND A7_QTX MDI6 A12 MDI5 MCLKI MDI4 MIVAL VPP-2 VPP-2 VPP-2 VPP-1 VPP-1 VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC MDI3 IREQ# MDI2 WE# MDI1 MCLKO MDI0 GND A13 MISTRT A8_CRX IOWR# A9_DRX IORD# A11 GND VS1# OE# CE2# A10 MDO7 CE1# MDO6 GND D7 MDO5 D6 MDO4 D5 MDO3 D4 CD1# D3 GND GND

VCC VCC GND GND VPP

CN9600 50P GRY

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

1 2 3 4 5

B34 A34 B33 A33 B32 A32 B31 A31 B30 A30 B29 A29 B28 A28 B27 A27 B26 A26 B25 A25 B24 A24 B23 A23 B22 A22 B21 A21 B20 A20 B19 A19 B18 A18 B17 A17 B16 A16 B15 A15 B14 A14 B13 A13 B12 A12 B11 A11 B10 A10 B9 A9 B8 A8 B7 A7 B6 A6 B5 A5 B4 A4 B3 A3 B2 A2 B1 A1

GND GND CD2# IOIS16# MDO2 D2 MDO1 D1 MDO0 D0 MOSTRT A0 MOVAL A1 REG# A2 INPACK# A3 WAIT# A4_CTX RESET A5_ITX VS2# A6_ETX MDI7 A7_QTX MDI6 A12 MDI5 MCLKI MDI4 MIVAL VPP-2 VPP-1 VCC VCC MDI3 IREQ# MDI2 WE# MDI1 MCLKO MDI0 A13 MISTRT A8_CRX IOWR# A9_DRX IORD# A11 VS1# OE# CE2# A10 MDO7 CE1# MDO6 D7 MDO5 D6 MDO4 D5 MDO3 D4 CD1# D3 GND GND

QU (CABLE CARD)

QT

Supplied as the Q box ass'y for service. ( The parts on this board are not supplied individually )

MAIN TUNER

ATSC
OOB MAIN

CN7900 40P

CN7902 10P

CN7901 10P :ZH-SIDE

B

C

CN7306 40P

D
CN7307 10P

CN7305 80P
B40 A40 B39 A39 B38 A38 B37 A37 B36 A36 B35 A35 B34 A34 B33 A33 B32 A32 B31 A31 B30 A30 B29 A29 B28 A28 B27 A27 B26 A26 B25 A25 B24 A24 B23 A23 B22 A22 B21 A21 B20 A20 B19 A19 B18 A18 B17 A17 B16 A16 B15 A15 B14 A14 B13 A13 B12 A12 B11 A11 B10 A10 B9 A9 B8 A8 B7 A7 B6 A6 B5 A5 B4 A4 B3 A3 B2 A2 B1 A1 +2.5V +2.5V +2.5V +2.5V GND +5V +5V

CN602 80P

+2.5V +2.5V +2.5V +2.5V GND +5V +5V

TATA+ GND TBTB+ GND TCTC+ GND TCLKTCLK+ GND TDTD+ GND TETE+

CN7302 14P S14B-PHDSS PHD-L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

GND H-IN OSDB-OUT VS-IN GND GND OSDG-OUT YM-OUT GND GND OSDR-OUT YS-OUT

CN7309 12P WHT PHD-L

SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE DV656_CLK GND DV656_D7 DV656_D6 DV656_D5 DV656_D4 DV656_D3 DV656_D2 DV656_D1 DV656_D0 SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE I2S_SCK_IN I2S_SD_IN I2S_WS_IN SPARE SPARE SPARE /RESETARM /RESET_ICES HSDI_1_SYNC HSDI_1_CLK HSDI_1_VAL HSDI_1_ERR SPARE HSDI_1_D0 SPARE AUD_EMPH HSDI_2_ERR HSDI_2_VAL HSDI_2_SYNC HSDI_2_D0 HSDI_2_CLK

B20 A20 B19 A19 B18 A18 B17 A17 B16 A16 B15 A15 B14 A14 B13 A13 B12 A12 B11 A11 B10 A10 B9 A9 B8 A8 B7 A7 B6 A6 B5 A5 B4 A4 B3 A3 B2 A2 B1 A1

+3.3V +3.3V PCI_AD01 PCI_AD00 PCI_AD03 PCI_AD02 PCI_AD05 PCI_AD04 PCI_AD07 PCI_AD06 PCI_AD08 PCI_C/BE0# PCI_AD10 PCI_AD09 PCI_AD12 PCI_AD11 PCI_AD14 PCI_AD13 PCI_C/BE1# +3.3V +3.3V PCI_AD15 PCI_SERR# PCI_PAR PCI_PERR# PCI_STOP# PCI_DEVSEL# PCI_TRDY# PCI_IRDY# PCI_FRAME# PCI_C/BE2# PCI_AD16 PCI_AD17 PCI_AD18 +3.3V PCI_AD21 PCI_AD19 PCI_AD22 PCI_AD20

+3.3V +3.3V PCI_AD01 PCI_AD00 PCI_AD03 PCI_AD02 PCI_AD05 PCI_AD04 PCI_AD07 PCI_AD06 PCI_AD08 PCI_C/BE0# PCI_AD10 PCI_AD09 PCI_AD12 PCI_AD11 PCI_AD14 PCI_AD13 PCI_C/BE1# +3.3V +3.3V PCI_AD15 PCI_SERR# PCI_PAR PCI_PERR# PCI_STOP# PCI_DEVSEL# PCI_TRDY# PCI_IRDY# PCI_FRAME# PCI_C/BE2# PCI_AD16 PCI_AD17 PCI_AD18 +3.3V PCI_AD21 PCI_AD19 PCI_AD22 PCI_AD20

CN7203 # CASE 1
1 CASE

PCI_INTC# PCI_INTB# PCI_INTA# +5V +5V

PCI_INTC# PCI_INTB# PCI_INTA# +5V +5V

B40 A40 B39 A39 B38 A38 B37 A37 B36 A36 B35 A35 B34 A34 B33 A33 B32 A32 B31 A31 B30 A30 B29 A29 B28 A28 B27 A27 B26 A26 B25 A25 B24 A24 B23 A23 B22 A22 B21 A21 B20 A20 B19 A19 B18 A18 B17 A17 B16 A16 B15 A15 B14 A14 B13 A13 B12 A12 B11 A11 B10 A10 B9 A9 B8 A8 B7 A7 B6 A6 B5 A5 B4 A4 B3 A3 B2 A2 B1 A1

QI (LINK/PHY)

B20 A20 B19 A19 B18 A18 B17 A17 B16 A16 B15 A15 B14 A14 B13 A13 B12 A12 B11 A11 B10 A10 B9 A9 B8 A8 B7 A7 B6 A6 B5 A5 B4 A4 B3 A3 B2 A2 B1 A1

CN701 40P SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE DV656_CLK GND DV656_D7 DV656_D6 DV656_D5 DV656_D4 DV656_D3 DV656_D2 DV656_D1 DV656_D0 SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE I2S_SCK_IN I2S_SD_IN I2S_WS_IN SPARE SPARE SPARE /RESETARM /RESET_ICES HSDI_1_SYNC HSDI_1_CLK HSDI_1_VAL HSDI_1_ERR SPARE HSDI_1_D0 SPARE AUD_EMPH HSDI_2_ERR HSDI_2_VAL HSDI_2_SYNC HSDI_2_D0 HSDI_2_CLK

I.LINK i.S400 TS/DV/ MICROMV/ HDV

CN704

CN703

I.LINK S400 TS/DV/ MICROMV/ HDV

CN702

J
– 38 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

4-3. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION

Terminal name of semiconductors in silk screen printed circuit ( )
Device Printed symbol

*

Terminal name Collector Base Emitter

Circuit

HM K H3 AK QI QT C

1 2 3 4

Transistor Collector Base Diode Cathode Anode Cathode Diode Anode (NC) Emitter

Transistor

F
5 6 7
Diode

Cathode Anode (NC)

Common Diode Anode Diode Cathode Common Anode Diode Cathode

Common

S2 H1

S1

8 9 0

Anode

Anode

Common Diode Anode Anode

Common Diode Cathode Diode Cathode Common

H2 ASU

G

qa qs

Cathode Anode Anode Cathode Drain

Cathode Cathode Anode Anode Source Gate
G D G S S D

Diode Transistor (FET) Transistor (FET) Transistor (FET) Transistor

T3

T1 QU Power Supply DSU Block

PD

QM
qd qf qg

Drain

Source Gate Source Drain Gate Emitter Collector Base
D

4-4. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
Note:
• The parts marked “#” on schematic diagrams are not mounted. • All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. (pF: µµF) Capacitors without voltage indication are all 50 V. • Indication of resistance, which does not have one for rating electrical power, is as follows. Pitch: 5 mm Rating electrical power 1/4 W (CHIP : 1/10 W) • All resistors are in ohms. : nonflammable resistor. • • 5 : fusible resistor. : internal component. • • : panel designation, and adjustment for repair. • All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B, unless otherwise noted. • : earth-ground. • : earth-chassis. • All voltages are in V. • Readings are taken with a 10 MΩ digital multimeter. • Readings are taken with a color-bar signal input. • Voltage variations may be noted due to normal production tolerances. • * : Can not be measured. • Circled numbers are waveform references. V • : B + bus. V • : B – bus. • F : Signal path. COIL CAPACITOR

D G G S

S

Reference information
RESISTOR : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : RN RC FPRD FUSE RW RS RB LF-8L TA PS PP PT MPS MPP ALB ALT ALR METAL FILM SOLID NONFLAMMABLE CARBON NONFLAMMABLE FUSIBLE NONFLAMMABLE WIREWOUND NONFLAMMABLE METAL OXIDE NONFLAMMABLE CEMENT MICRO INDUCTOR TANTALUM STYROL POLYPROPYLENE MYLAR METALIZED POLYESTER METALIZED POLYPROPYLENE BIPOLAR HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH RIPPLE

qh qj qk ql w; wa ws wd –

C1

C2 B2

Transistor

C2 B1 E1 B1 E2 B2 C1 E1 E2

Transistor

C1 B2 E2 E1 B1 C2 B1 C1 C2 B2 E1 E2

Transistor

C1 B2 E2 E1 B1 C2

E1

E2 B2

Transistor

C1 B2 E2 E1 B1 C2

B1 C1 C1(B2) C2 C2

Transistor

E2 B1 E1 C2 C1(B2)

B1 E2 E1(B2) B1 C1 E1(B2) B1 C1 C2 C2 C2 E2 E2

Transistor

(B2) B1 E1 E2 C1 C2

Transistor Discrete semiconductot

(B2) E2 E1 B1 C2 C1

Note: The components identified by shading and mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

(Chip semiconductors that are not actually used are included.)

Ver.1.5

Note: Les composants identifies par une trame et une marque 0 sont critiques pour la securite. Ne les remplacer que par une piece portant le numero specifie.

– 39 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

(1) Schematic Diagram of AK Board
1 2 3 4
IC2603 PQ070XZ01ZPH 3.3V REG.

5

6

7

8

9

VCC_DET 001:7D

SUB_3.3

A

JL2658

1

2

3

4

5

C2633 0.47 10V B 1608

R2718 10k 1/10W RN-CP

C2629 100 16V R2717 0 CHIP

C2630 0.1 16V B R2716 3.3k 1/10W RN-CP

R2715 3.3k 1/10W RN-CP R2714 1k 1/10W RN-CP C2631 0.1 16V B

AK BOARD (DIGITAL AUDIO I/F)
C2632 100 16V SUB_3.3 R2620 10k 1/10W RN-CP C2605 0.1 IC2601 B SN74LVC1G08DCKR 16V 1608 A B GND Y 4 VCC 5 1 2

B

JL2613 5.0V 1 GND 2 SUB11V 3 GND 4 SPDIF+/NC 5 SPDIF- 6 GND 7 CN2600 7P JL2606 JL2648 FB2605 0uH 1608 GND GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 JL2637 JL2640 JL2601 JL2610 JL2600 JL2631 JL2608 JL2609 TP2601 R2602 0 CHIP R2728 XX R2601 CHIP 0 FB2609 FB2610 FB2608 0uH 0uH 0uH SCLATCH 001:8C 001:8C SCDT SCSHIFT 001:8C XMODE 001:8C JL2615 JL2605 JL2604 JL2638 JL2639 JL2603 JL2602 JL2656 FB2602 0uH FB2603 0uH FB2604 0uH JL2657 R2621 0

3.3V_SW 001:8C R2623 100 1/10W RN-CP

R2628 100 1/10W RN-CP R2696 10k 1/10W RN-CP R2606 0 CHIP

R2627 100 1/10W RN-CP 5%

R2619 0 CHIP 001:6H 001:6H CKOUT BCK LRCK DATA XMODE R2618 0 CHIP R2617 0 CHIP R2616 0 CHIP R2613 0 CHIP R2612 0 CHIP R2726 0 CHIP R2615 0 CHIP R2609 0 001:4D SCSHIFT R2608 0 001:4D SP_PROT CHIP CHIP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 R2607 0 CHIP 14 15 CKOUT GND BCK LRCK DIR-DATA XMODE SCLTCH OF_FLAG SCDT GND SCSHIFT AMP_RST SP_PROT A_MUTE 3.3V_SW CN2604 15P WHT

3

R2604 XX C2692 0.1 16V B 1608

SUB_3.3

C

DAT_D SLK_D CH_M/S_SW CH_IIC_SW SP_PROT A_MUTE OF_FLAG

001:6H 001:6H 001:4D

IC2614 SN74LVC1G08DCKR
A B GND Y 4 VCC 5 1 R2723 0 CHIP

001:4D SCLATCH 001:4D OF_FLAG 001:4D SCDT

SP_PROT 001:8C OF_FLAG 001:8C

2 3

3.3V_SW 10 CH_WP 11 CH_RST 12 M_RST 13 SCLTCH 14 AMP_RST 15 SCLTCH2 16 SCDT 17 SCSHIFT 18 GND 19 GND 20 CN2603 20P

D

C2769 0.1 16V B 1608 R2643 0 CHIP 1 R2603 0 CHIP

R2605 XX

R2722 0 CHIP

001:4B 3.3V_SW VCC_DET 001:4A

R2727 XX

D2601 MAZF04700LS0

RESET VCC GND NC

5

R2642 470k 1/10W RN-CP

R2710 XX

C2621 0.01 25V B 1608

C2675 0.1 16V B 1608

IC2602 R3112N421A-TR-FA RESET DELAY
R2638 XX R2788 XX

2 3

4

R2787 XX

JL2616

E
R2610 47 1/10W RN-CP

R2639 10 1/10W RN-CP SUB_3.3 FB2611 0uH

Q2602 DTC114EUA-T106

R2719 0 CHIP C2757 100 6.3V C2758 0.1 16V B 1608

R2720 0 CHIP R2724 10k 1/10W RN-CP C2760 100 C2761 0.01 25V R2679 100 R2681 4.7k 1/10W R2680 33k 1 R2721 0 CHIP C2763 0.1 16V B C2622 0.1 16V B 1608

R2713 1/10W 47 RN-CP

TP2600

F
AUDIO-(O) 24 EMPHA(O) 23

VCC

R2790 1/10W 22 5% RN-CP DATA(O) 16 LRCK(O) 15 BLK(O) 14 XSTATE(O) 17 CKOUT(O) 13 DVDD 19 DGND 18

6 IY

5

4 2Y 001:8D 2A 3

XOUT(O) 21

XMCK(O) 20

XIN(I) 22

CSFLAG(O) 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 F0(O) F1(O) F2(O) VF(O)

AGND AVDD LPF(I)

8

IC2600 LC89056W-E

VIN(I) R(I) DVDD DGND DIN2(I) DIN1(I) DIN0(I) SPDIF(O)

9

10 11 12

C2762 0.01 25V

R2611 R2614 1M 1/10W 470 RN-CP 1/10W RN-CP

1

5

G

C2768 0.1 16V B 1608

DVDD(O) DGND(O) LOCK(O) BPSYNC(O) ERROR(O) DO(O)

DIR 3.3V

C2765 0.1 16V B 1608

R2682 1/10W 5.6k RN-CP

C2764 0.1 16V B X2600 24.576MHz R2725 C2609 10p 50V CH 1608

7

3

4

6

44 DOSEL0(I)

45 DOSEL1(I)

46 CKSEL0(I)

47 CKSEL1(I)

48 XMODE(I)

40 MODE0(I)

41 MODE1(I)

39 XSEL(I)

DI(I) 37 CE(I) 38 CL(I)

DISEL(I)

42 DGND

43 DVDD

R2645 0 CHIP

8.2k 1/10W RN-CP

C2608 10p 50V CH 1608

R2789 0 CHIP R2765 0 CHIP

R2632 0 CHIP R2636 100 1/10W RN-CP R2711 100 1/10W RN-CP JL2620

1

2

JL2619

CKOUT

R2744 0 CHIP R2764 R2763 0 0 CHIP CHIP R2746 R2745 CHIP 0 0 CHIP C2767 0.1 16V B 1608 C2766 0.015 25V B 1608

LRCK 001:8D

H
R2781 0 CHIP

JL2618 JL2617

BCK 001:8D DATA 001:8D

R2730 0 CHIP

R2635 100 1/10W RN-CP

GND

1A

IC2612 SN74LVC2GU04DCKR

2

2

– 40 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

(2) Schematic Diagram of F Board

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

A

A C6016 XX B C6017 XX

C C6019 XX C6018 D XX

B

CN6001 2P
AC IN 120V AC 60Hz

AC(L) AC(N)

1 2

JL6003

F6001 6.3A 250V

R6063 1.5M 0.5W RN FH6002 5% A A
1

R6051 XX R6052 XX R6053 XX
2

R6057 XX R6058 XX C C C6004 0.22 250V PT D C
1

JL6001

FH6001 JL6004

R6002 1.5M 0.5W RN

VD6001 C6002 1 275V PT B

R6059 XX JL6002 VD6002
2

CN6018 2P 2 AC(L) 1 AC(N)

TO G BOARD CN6014

D

4

3

4

3

C
CAM001 CAM002

R6001 XX

B

L6002 R6054 XX R6055 XX R6056 XX

D

L6003 R6060 XX R6061 XX

C6014 XX

C6015 XX

E CN6051

1

C6005 470p 250V B

C6006 470p 250V B

R6062 XX

E CN6052

1

D
E CN6053 1

E CN6054

1

F BOARD (AC LINE FILTER)

E

– 41 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

(3) Schematic Diagram of G (1/3) Board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
P-SWC6002 0.01 50V F 1608 R6005 3.3 10W RB FB6002 0uH 002:15E

10

11

12

13

14
FB6001 0uH JL6014 JL6015

15

1 2 3

THRMO1 NC THRMO2 CN6015 3P

A

L6203 58uH 7 3.4 R6231 27 1/10W
1/10W RN-CP R6232 10k

L6204 58uH 8 8 R6229 22 1/4W FPRD

D6021 MMDL914T1

0.1

RY6001 0.6

R6006 3.3 10W RB R6002 4.7k 1/10W RN-CP RLY_ON 001:13H;002:3F R6007 2.2 5W RF

JL6011 JL6012 JL6006 CN6014 2P 2 TO F BOARD CN6018 AC(L) AC(N) 2 1 JL6005 3

AC<L> 003:1C AC<N> 003:1C C6008 1 0V PT C6007 XX C6009 XX
5 6 2 1

C

L6202 143uH
12 10 8 7

C6203 4700p 250V F

D6205 D15XB60
102.3 C6209 4700p 250V F C6210 4700p 250V F

D6201 RM11A

D6208 RM11A

D
C6201 XX

C6204 4700p 250V F

C6212 1 450V MPS

C6258 1 450V PT

C6259 1 450V PT

L6201 XX

1

2

Q6206 2SK3934(LBS1SONY.Q

102.3

C6211 XX

R6225 22 1/4W FPRD

R6226 27 1/10W RN-CP

S R6240 10k 1/10W RN-CP R6253 22 2W RS

D6225 ERA22-08KFLB

D6226 ERA22-08KFLB

D6212 MA113-(TX)

GND_3

R6224 0.05 5W RB

D6213 D6214 MA113-(TX) UMZ16NT106

E

R6223 0.05 5W RB

F
IC6201 PQ12DZ5UJ00H

GND

OUT

VCC

CTL

NC

G
TH6201 12.0 R6250 100k 1/10W RN-CP -0.9 Q6208 C6248 47 25V

R6206 330k 1/4W RN R6205 330k RN 1/4W R6204 220k 1/4W RN

R6210 330k 1/4W RN R6209 330k 1/4W RN R6208 220k 1/4W RN

R6214 330k 1/4W RN R6217 1k 1/10W RN-CP R6216 2.2k 1/10W RN-CP C6219 100 25V R6603 0 CHIP R6222 22k 1/10W RN-CP C6213 100p 50V CH 1608 R6219 1M 1/10W RN-CP 0 R6220 5.6k 1/10W RN-CP C6215 1000p 50V B 1608

C6226 0.022 50V B 2012

H

R6213 330k 1/4W RN R6212 220k 1/4W RN

R6237 10 1/4W

Q6205 2SD1621S-TD-E R6233
3.5 3.7 10 1/4W FPRD

I

D6210 BAT54HT1 D6211 BAT54HT1

C6220 0.022 50V B R6246 8.2k 1/10W RN-CP R6245 1.5k 1/10W RN-CP

R6278 1/10W 220k RN-CP

11.7

10.3

R6258 0.6 47k R6266 1/10W 150k RN-CP 1/10W RN-CP

0

R6267 10k 1/10W RN-CP

R6275 4.7k 1/10W RN-CP

11.0

R6260 1/10W 10k

Q6213

Q6203 2SB1121-S-TD

R6234 47 1/4W FPRD

D6209 MM3Z7V5T1

C6222 220 25V 3.6 0 11.7 3.7 3.5 7.4 3.1 11.7 7.5 R6242 4.7k 1/10W R6241 22k 1/10W RN-CP R6239 220k 1/10W C6227 0.1 50V B 2012 R6236 22k 1/10W RN-CP
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 1

0.4 C6217 3.3 470p 0 50V 0

IC6202 UC3854BN

J

R6207 100k 1/10W RN-CP

R6299 2.2M 1/10W RN-CP 5% R6218 R6221 15k XX 1/10W

0.5 3.3 1.9

R6274 1/10W 4.7k RN-CP

R6127 XX

Q6212 2SC4081T106R

7.4

3.3

K

Q6219 2SK1590-T1B

0

D6204 UDZSTE-177.5B D6203 MMDL914T1
C6214 XX

Q6204 2SC4081T106R
0 R6227 2.2k 1/10W RN-CP R6228 22k 1/10W RN-CP

0.6

Q6202 DTC114EUA -T106
C6206 0.1 50V B 2012 C6208 0.47 16V B 2012 R6203 150k 1/16W RN-CP 0.5% R6211 18k 1/10W RN-CP R6296 XX

S

R6238 1/10W 4.7k RN-CP R6244 6.8k C6225 1/10W RN-CP 0.01 50V RV6201 B 1k 2012
C6229 1000p 25V CH B C6233 1500p 50V CH

3 1 2 R6282 4.7k 1/10W RN-CP

IC6204 HA17431PA-TZ

D6206 MMDL 914T1

R6125 47k 1/10W RN-CP

10.9

R6126 XX

0

C6244 0.01 25V B 1608

*

11.6 10

R6230 10k 1/10W RN-CP

RN-CP

R6257 1k 1/10W 3.5

Q6210 2SC4081 T106R
R6259 10k 1/10W

R6265 22k 1/10W RN-CP

R6277 1/10W

UDZSTE-177.5B

R6202 1M 1/10W RN-CP

50V B 2012

1/10W

50V B

2012

C6202 0.047

C6257 XX

R6251 15k

B

C6230 0.047 50V

D6207 BAT54HT1

C6216 0.01 50V B

C6218 470p 250V

C6221 C6223 1000p 0.1 50V 50V B B 2012

2012

C6205 0.022

D6202

L

14

1

14

1

B

12

13

10 11

6 5 3 2 12 13 10 11
2 3 4 5 6 7 8

7 6 5

Q6001 2SD2114KT146

R6001 C6001 0.01 15k 1/10W 25V B RN-CP 1608

RY6002 THRU_5V 002:13D;002:15B

D6001 MMDL914T1

D6216 RM11A
-2.2 4 STBY5V 0 2

0.6

1

002:15E;003:8C

R6254 C6236 C6237 22 470p 470p 2W 1kV 1kV RS SL SL

PH6202 3 PC123GY2

R6602 470 1/10W RN-CP

Q6207 2SK3934 (LBS1SONY.Q

D6217 SF20L60U-4015

JL6008 PFC_OUT JL6010 002:4C;002:4G

C6256 0.01 25V B 1608

Q6201 DTC114EUA-T106

3.4

C6232 470p 1kV SL S C6231 470p 1kV SL C6238 470 450V C6242 470 450V R6215 1M 1/10W CHIP PRI_GND JL6009 PRI_GND GND_3 001:12H;002:4F; 002:4H;003:3C C6207 0.01 50V B 2012 R6255 1M 1/10W CHIP Mount Mecha A6002 234571901 Q6206-Q6207-TH6201<1> Mount Mecha A6009 408175931 D6205<1>

JL6007

JL6013

D6215 UMZ16NT106

PRI_GND

C6235 0.01 50V B 2012

R6201 1M 1/10W CHIP 5% Mount Mecha A6003 408720621 D6217<1>

PRI_GND

5 0 C6228 10 R6295 50V XX

4 12.0

3

2

1 19.7 R6276 47k 1/10W RN-CP C6252 0.01 R6287 25V 10k B 1/10W RN-CP 1608 19.7 19.7 Q6216 PRI_VCC1 002:3F R6292 10 1/4W FPRD R6291 10k 1/10W RN-CP -0.6

C6260 0.01 50V B 2012

19.8

Q6218 2SB1122-ST-TD-E
PRI_VCC 19.8 R6294 10k 1/10W RN-CP 003:1B

6.0

2SA1576A-T106-QR
0 C6253 100 35V R6286 47k 1/10W RN-CP

19.7 C6254 0.01 25V B 1608

R6289 10k 1/10W RN-CP

19.1 R6293 22k 1/10W RN-CP

2SA1576A-T106-QR
12.0 R6249 100k 1/10W RN-CP R6247 100k 1/10W RN-CP R6252 22k 1/10W R6264 100k 1/10W RN-CP

19.7

D6219 MA3J142E0LSO

Q6214 DTC114EUA-T106
R6285 10k 1/10W RN-CP JL6016 0

Q6217 2SA1576A -T106-QR
R6290 47k 1/10W RN-CP

0.2 4

PH6203 PC123GY2
1

R6601 1k 1/10W RN-CP C6255 XX

RLY_ON

001:10B;002:3F

R6248 100k 1/10W RN-CP

R6263 100k 1/10W RN-CP R6271 47k 1/10W RN-CP R6122 100k 1/10W RN-CP R6123 100k 1/10W RN-CP

0

Q6215 2SC4081T106R

3

2

R6114 100k 1/10W RN-CP R6116 100k 1/10W RN-CP R6118 100k 1/10W RN-CP

R6113 100k 1/10W RN-CP R6115 100k 1/10W RN-CP R6117 100k 1/10W RN-CP C6239 1000p 50V B 1608

R6262 100k 1/10W RN-CP

R6119 100k 1/10W RN-CP R6121 100k 1/10W RN-CP

PRI_GND R6281 C6251 10k 1 1/10W R6124 100k 1/10W RN-CP JL6017 11.7

001:11E;002:4F; 002:4H;003:3C

R6120 100k 1/10W RN-CP

Q6213 2SA1576A-T106-QR

2SC4081T106R Q6211

R6280 4.7k 1/10W RN-CP R6279 4.7k 1/10W RN-CP R6284 2.2k 1/10W RN-CP

2.4 3.0 11.7

C6245 IC6203 0.01 BA10324AF-E2 50V B 2012 0
14 13 12 11 10

R6288 10k 1/10W RN-CP R6297 R6298 2.2k 3.3k 1/10W 1/10W RN-CP RN-CP 5% 5%

2.5 2.1

R6269 1k 1/10W RN-CP R6268 1k 1/10W R6270 1k 1/10W R6272 10k 1/10W

D6218 MMDL 914T1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1.1 4

1 PFC_DET 002:15D 2

7.0 C6241 7.5 0.01 50V B 2012 C6234 0.022 50V B 2012

3.3 11.6 0

R6235 10k 1/10W RN-CP 5%

3

PH6201 PC123GY2

0

C6246 C6243 0.01 1000p 50V 50V B B 1608 2012

9 8

R6283 220 1/10W RN-CP

2.5

R6261 100 1/10W RN-CP C6240 0.01 25V B 1608 0

C6247 4.7 50V C6249 R6273 1k 4.7 1/10W 50V RN-CP C6250 0.01 25V B 1608

R6256 10k 1/10W RN-CP 0.7

: Cannot measure

*

G (1/3) BOARD (POWER SUPPLY)

Q6209 2SC4081T106R

R6243 10k 1/10W RN-CP

– 42 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

(4) Schematic Diagram of G (2/3) Board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

A

C6433 0.01 50V SW_9V

CN6502 50P BLK
9.0

1 2 3
18.3 4.8

SW9V SW9V GND GND 18V THRU5V GND GND SUB11V SUB11V SUB11V SUB11V SUB11V SUB11V SUB11V GND GND GND GND GND GND SUB6.5V GND SUB6.5V SUB6.5V SUB6.5V GND GND GND GND AC_RLY PFC_DET GND GND GND GND REC_ON GND GND +B_OVP STBY5V GND P-SW(-) Tu32V GND GND GND GND A16.5V A16.5V

C6431 XX

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

B
D6402 XX D6405 XX
C6402 XX R6401 XX

002:11C R6405 XX R6409 XX

18V

Q6405 XX
32V R6421 XX C6409 XX 002:15E

001:10B;002:13D THRU_5V

002:11D SUB_11V C6430 0.01 50V F 1608

C6432 0.01 50V F

D6404 XX

C6404 XX

R6408 XX

D6409 XX D6403 XX D6408 D10SC6M
C6438 470p 50V CH C6407 1500 10V C6403 XX L6400 XX R6422 XX

10.3

18V 002:15B

14 15 16 17 18

1

16 15 14

FB6403 1.1uH FB6401 1.1uH

C

001:11D;002:4G PFC_OUT L6301 220uH C6301 0.47 450V PT R6302 0.1 1/2W RF C6302 0.01 25V B 1608 R6306 470k 1/4W RN R6305 470k 1/4W RN

2

C6436 C6435 470p 1500 50V 10V CH C6437 470p 50V CH

L6401 10uH

JL6020

002:15D 6.5V

19

JW6402 JW6401 JL6021 L6402 10uH SUB_11V 002:15C I

IC6401 PQ09RD21
VC D G 1
10.4

20
6.2

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

MM3Z15VT1 D6302

IC6301 CXD9841M
2.2

D6406 D10SC6M

FB6301 1.1uH R6311 22 1/6W RF

C6316 XX

4

13 12

C6439 470p 50V

C6456 50V 470p C6408 1500 16V C6423 470p 50V C6442 470p 50V C6455 470p 50V C6405 1000 25V C6443 1000 25V R6414 47k 1/10W RN-CP C6410 XX

2

3

4

R6343 XX R6310 XX 4 C6306 1000p 50V CH 1608 C6308 0.1 50V B 2012 C6307 10 50V
0 2.7

CT NC RT GND GND GND GND GND GND TIMER VG(H) VS VB

D6309 191.4 M1FM3
23 22 21

D6410 D10SC6M

R6303 5.6k 1/10W RN-CP

3.9 2.4

VSENSE VD F/B

C6426 220 C6425 16V XX

002:11C 6.5V C6429 0.01 50V F 1608

JL6023 SW_9V 002:15B

24

1 2 3 5

Q6301 2SK3568(LBS2SONY1Q) 373.4
191.4

6 7

11 10 9 T6302 C6447 470p 50V CH 1608

FB6402 1.1uH

9.0 4.1

BAT54HT1

D

R6307 18k 1/10W RN-CP

186.6 196.8

D6306 UMZ16 NT106

FB6404 1.1uH

JL6022

C6414 1000 16V

C6416 XX

IC6402 PQ30RV11J00H
R6423 10k 1/10W RN-CP R6451 XX JL6025 002:4F 001:12J AC_RLY PFC_DET JL6026
1.1 4.7 0.1

29 30 31 32 33 34 THRU_5V 001:10B;002:15B 35 002:14F REC_ON
4.1

D6311

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
2.6

R6314 10k 1/10W RN-CP
186.6

S

8

D6401 C6448 D10SC6M 470p
1 3 50V 2 CH 1608

C6310 25V 0.22 B

C6312 XX

D6312 M1FS4-4063

4.8

R6315 10k 1/10W RN-CP
4.8

2SK3568 (LBS2SONY1Q) Q6302
C6317 470p 1kV SL S R6318 0.22 2W RS R6341 1M 1/10W

VC

C6445 470p 50V CH 1608

002:14F AU_VCC C6413 1000 10V AU_GND 002:14F

6.4

1

2

3

4 C6424 XX L6407 10uH JL6024

D6407 D4SBS6
C6453 470p 50V CH 1608 C6452 470p 50V CH 1608 C6449 470p 50V C6451 470p 50V CH 1608 L6501 3.3uH C6446 470p 50V CH 1608

NC SS VC1 OCP

VG(L) NC P-GND VC2

C6304 4.7 50V C6305 47 35V

20.1 0

E
R6325 0 CHIP 001:11G PRI_VCC1 R6319 1k 1/10W RN-CP R6301 10 1/4W FPRD 002:15D AC_RLY PRI_GND 001:11E;001:12H; 002:4H;003:3C

C6309 1000p 50V B 1608

R6309 100 1/10W RN-CP

10.7 C6311 0.01 25V B 1608

R6312 22 1/6W D6305 RF UF4005

C6318 0.027 1kV PP C6320 XX

R6410 XX R6406 4.7 1/10W RN-CP

C6415 XX

4.8

JL6027

36 37 38

JL6411

JL6415

JL6413

JL6414

JL6412

JL6410

20 19 18 17

C6450 470p

PKG23
C6313 47 25V R6313 D6307 120 UMZ16NT106 1/10W RN-CP

50V CH 1608 C6454 470p 50V CH 1608

R6415 1k 1/10W RN-CP 0.5% R6417 2.2k 1/10W RN-CP 0.5%

C6427 220 16V

001:13E;003:8C STBY5V

R6455 0 JL6028 CHIP JL6029
32.9

39
4.8

40 41 42 43 44 45 46

C6332 0.01 50V B C6315 100 35V

A 900:4B

D6501 S3L20UF4

L6502 100uH C6503 1000 25V

16.5V 002:15F R6400 XX

R6416 1k 1/10W RN-CP 0.5%

001:9A P-SW002:11B 32V

4.8

REC_ON 002:15E JL6030 002:10E 16.5V
16.3

47 48 49 50

D6308 10ERB20-TB3

R6316 10 1/2W

3.3

001:10B;001:13H

RLY_ON R6317 10k 1/10W RN-CP C6319 0.01 25V B
2.7

4 3

1 2

R6402 1k 1/10W RN-CP
10.4

R6403 0 CHIP R6404 1k 1/10W RN-CP 7.5 3 C6406 0.047 16V B 1608 1
2.5

R6413 0 CHIP R6407 1k 1/10W RN-CP R6412 15k 1/10W RN-CP R6411 4.7k 1/10W RN-CP

R6450 1k 1/10W RN-CP

C6411 0.01 50V

2.7

F

Q6303 2SC4081T106R

0

Q6304 2SA1576A-T106-QR

R6308 1k 1/10W RN-CP

PH6301 PC123GY2

9.4

D6416 MM3Z11VT1
R6454 10k 1/10W RN-CP

JL6031 002:11D AU_VCC

JL6407 1 2 3 4 C6417 0.01 50V F 1608 5 AUDIO_VCC AUDIO_VCC NC AUDIO_GND AUDIO_GND CN6408 5P

IC6405 MM1431ATT
2 C6314 R6304 0.01 10k 25V 1/10W B 1608 RN-CP R6321 10k 1/10W RN-CP

JL6409 002:11E AU_GND

JL6408

D6418 MMDL914T1

G
001:11D;002:4C PFC_OUT 001:11E;001:12H; PRI_GND 002:4F;003:3C

R6322 0.1 1/2W RF 2 1 L6302 100uH C6321 1 450V PT JL6032 JL6033 1 3 JL6034 JL6035 LAMP DC LAMP GND CN6501 3P WHT 3P

Mount Mecha

A6004

234989201

Q6301<1>-Q6302<1>

H
R6426 0 CHIP

Mount Mecha

A6006

234989201

D6407<1>

Mount Mecha

A6005

407730551

D6401-D6406-D6408-D6410<1>

R6427 0 CHIP

Mount Mecha

A6007

217781001

IC6402<1>

I
Mount Mecha
R6428 0 CHIP

A6008

403343901

IC6401<1>

G (2/3) BOARD (POWER SUPPLY)

J

– 43 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

(5) Schematic Diagram of G (3/3) Board

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

A

AC<L> 001:5C C6102 4700p 250V F

G (3/3) BOARD (POWER SUPPLY)
D6100 D2SB60A-F04
156.2

001:13G PRI_VCC TH6101 R6102 1 1/4W FPRD 001:11E;001:12H; 002:4F;002:4H PRI_GND R6103 330k 1/2W

D6104 10ERB20-TB3
R6105 10 1/4W FPRD 1 C6116 100 50V 2 3 4 6 8

B
C6101 4700p 250V F

C6122 XX

T6101 16 15 12 11 10 9 C6112 XX L6101 10uH JL6053 STBY5V 001:13E;002:15E R6112 10k 1/10W RN-CP C6115 100 10V

C6106 22 450V

AC<N> 001:5C

C6107 470p 500V R

D6105 D1NS6-TR

D6102 ERA22-08KFLB
155.7 155.7

C6113 470 16V

D6106
8 7 6 5

10ERB20-TB3 D6103 10ERB20-TB3
R6106 2.2 1/4W FPRD C6108 XX
1.0

C
C6105 47p 2kV SL

R6111 0 CHIP R6107 1.5k 1/10W RN-CP
3.3

IC6101 STR-A6169
16.7

1
0

2

3

4
1.0

C6110 C6109 XX XX R6104 220 1/10W RN-CP

C6114 0.1 16V B 1608 R6109 33k 1/10W RN-CP 1

MM3Z5V 6ST1

D6101

C6123 XX

PH6101 PC123GY2

R6108 470 1/10W RN-CP

IC6102 MM1431ATT

3

D

R6101 C6117 C6118 C6119 2.2 2.2 1000p 4.7 50V 1W 50V 50V RS B 1608

C6111 470p 250V B

2.4

2 R6110 10k 1/10W RN-CP

– 44 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

(6) Schematic Diagram of HM Board

1

2

3

4

5
FB7201 BK1608TS601 C7212 1 25V B:CHIP

6
+3.3VD

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

A

R7201 0 1/16W :CHIP TO QM BOARD VIDEO, AUDIO DEC. VIDEO CAPTURE GRAPHIC SCALER CN7311

JL7201 #

C7213 0.01 B:CHIP

IC7203 M24128-BWMN6T(A)

R7216 1k 1/16W :CHIP

R7217 1k 1/16W :CHIP

R7221 1k 1/16W :CHIP

+3.3VD

FB7203 BK1608TS601

(
B

(

C7205 0.01 25V B:CHIP

C7207 0.1 16V B:CHIP

IC7201 XC6204B332MR 3.3V LDO

JL7205 # R7210 33 1/16W :CHIP R7212 33 1/16W :CHIP JL7202 # R7224 100 1/16W :CHIP R7225 100 1/16W :CHIP JL7204 # R7223 100

C7215 0.1 25V F:CHIP

C7216 0.01 25V B:CHIP

C7217 1 6.3V B:CHIP

JL7203 #

R7228 0 :CHIP R7226 R7227 0 0 :CHIP :CHIP

+3.3VD

C

R7214 1.5k 1/16W :CHIP C7223 # CH:1608

(MEMORY STICK I/F)
MS_SCLK R7215 Bk1608HS601 R7211 1k 1/16W :CHIP
MS_INS

CN7204 MS DUAL CONN

R7209 Bk1608HS601

TO MEMORY STICK

D

C7204 6p CH:CHIP L7201

MS_DATA0

C7206 0.01 25V B:CHIP

R7202 Bk1608HS601 R7206 1M 1/16W :CHIP
MS_BUS

E

C7203 5p CH:CHIP

R7204 X7201 100 48MHz 1/16W :CHIP D7201 MA153-TX JL7206 #
IC7202 90C36LC1B-LF MS-USB

CN7202 #

+3.3VD

C7209 R7203 1 22k 6.3V 1/16W B:CHIP :CHIP

R7234 100 :1608

C7224 0.1 25V F:CHIP R7222 150 1/16W :CHIP

D7210 L-1503CB/1ID

F

C7222 # CH:1608

+3.3VD

G
C7218 0.1 25V F:CHIP C7219 0.1 25V F:CHIP C7220 0.1 25V F:CHIP C7221 0.1 25V F:CHIP D7212 UDZSTE-173.9B R7230 # :1608
D7202 UDZSTE-173.9B

FB7202 BK1608TS601

R7218 4.7k 1/10W :1608 R7219 470 1/10W :1608 C7214 # B:1608

H

CN7203 #

R7231 2.2k :CHIP

C7208 0.01 25V B:CHIP

C7210 0.1 16V B:CHIP

C7211 4.7 6.3V B:CHIP

Q7201 2SB709A-QRS-TX

VD7201 # :1608
Q7202 2SD601A

R7229 1k :CHIP

I

– 45 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

(7) Schematic Diagram of H1 Board

1

2

3

4

5

6

A

B

H1 BOARD (PANEL SWITCH)
R7006 XX

R7007 XX S7003 S7000 S7001

S7002

S7004

S7005

C

R7001 470

R7002 680 1/10W RN-CP 0.5%

R7003 1k 1/10W RN-CP 0.5% C7000 0.1 25V B 1608

R7004 2.2k

R7005 4.7k 1/10W RN-CP

CN7000 3P WHT 1 2 3 XX VDR001 GND KEY GND TO A BOARD

D

D7000 XX

D7001

– 46 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

(8) Schematic Diagram of H2 Board

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

A

STBY_RED

POWER_GREEN

TIMER_GREEN

P_MUTE_LED

R

G

R

G

B

H2 BOARD (SIRCS, LED)
R7022 10k 1/10W RN-CP 5% C7022 0.01 50V F 1608

D7022 SML-020MVT-T86
R7025 220 1/10W RN-CP 5%

C7025 0.1 25V F 1608

D7024 SML-020MVT-T86
R7032 220 1/10W RN-CP 5% R7033 XX 1/10W RN-CP 5%

R7024 220 1/10W RN-CP 5%

Q7020 2SC3052EF-T1-LEF
R7023 10k 1/10W RN-CP 5%

Q7021 2SC3052EF-T1-LEF
C7024 0.01 50V F 1608

R7026 10k 1/10W RN-CP 5% R7027 10k 1/10W RN-CP 5%

R7029 10k 1/10W RN-CP 5% C7027 0.01 50V F 1608

Q7023 2SC3052EF-T1-LEF
R7031 10k 1/10W RN-CP 5%

Q7024 2SC3052EF-T1-LEF XX
C7028 XX 50V F 1608

R7034 XX R7035 XX 1/10W RN-CP 5%

GP1UE26SXKOF IC7020
GND OUT VCC

D7023 SML-310LTT86
R7036 47 1/10W RN-CP 5%

C
R7020 1.5k 1/10W RN-CP 5% C7020 0.1 25V F 1608

IC7022 TAR5S33(TE85R)

R7028 220 1/10W RN-CP 5%

R7021 0 CHIP C7021 10

D7021 XX

L7000 10uH

5

4

Q7022 2SC3052EF-T1-LEF

R7030 10k 1/10W RN-CP 5% R7039 10k 1/10W RN-CP 5% C7026 0.01 50V F 1608

C7034 0.1 25V F 1608

C7033 22 10V R7041 470k 1/10W RN-CP 5%

1

2

3

C7031 0.1 25V F 1608

C7030 22 10V

D

D7026 RD6.2SB-T1

D7020 XX

R7040 XX S7020

C7032 F 0.01 1608 50V C7023 0.01 50V F 1608

TC7SET32FU(T5RSOJF) IC7021
1 2
C7029 0.1 25V F 1608

D7025 RD6.2SB-T1

D7027 XX

5

3

4

E
11 10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 1 169591521 CN7021 XX

P-ON

SIRCS

GND

POW_LED

ILINK_LED

GND

LAMP LED

P_MUTE_LED

TIMER LED

GND

STBY5V

CN7020 11P WHT

– 47 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

(9) Schematic Diagram of H3 Board

1

2

3

4

5

A
CN7050 6P 3 1 5 1 3 4 2 4 2 6 2 R7053 220 1/10W RN-CP 5% R7056 220 1/10W RN-CP 5% R7060 220 5% 2 VD7051 2 R7061 0
R7062 220 1/10W RN-CP 5%

1 C7059 0.47 1

1

E CN7051

1 R7065 XX CHIP 1608C7060 4.7 R7066 XX CHIP VD7052 C7061 4.7 R7067 XX CHIP R7072 XX R7073 XX R7071 XX 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

S_SW2 S2_2 GND C2 GND Y2 GND V2 GND L2 GND R2 CN7052 12P WHT

D7050 MM3Z10VT1

1

1

B

2

2 L 3 R7050 0 4 R 5 7 6 J7050 XX J7051

C7054 CH R7057 RN-CP 220 XX 1608 1/10W 5% 50V C7050 R7051 XX 0 50V CHIP CH 1608 R7052 0 CHIP C7051 C7052 XX XX 50V CH 1608 1

R7059 220 1/10W RN-CP 5%

R7063 220 1/10W RN-CP 5%

1 VD7053 RN-CP 5%

V 1

R7058 220 RN-CP 1/10W 5%

2 1 R7054 330k C7057 1/10W 10 RN-CP 50V 2 R7055 330k C7058 1/10W 10 RN-CP 50V 1

2

2

R7064 D7051 220 MM3Z10VT1 1/10W

1

2

2

1

2

1

D7052 MM3Z10VT1
C7056 XX

C

3 4 5 1 2 7 6

XX D7053 MM3Z7V5T1

R7068 XX CHIP 1608

R7074 XX R7069 XX CHIP 1608

XX R7075 R7076 XX 1 2 3 4

2

1

1

HP_SW HP_L HP_R GND CN7053 4P XX

C7053 XX 50V CH 1608

C7055 XX 50V CH 1608

VD7050 XX

VD7054 XX

R7070 XX CHIP 1608

H3 BOARD (VIDEO 2 INPUT)
D

– 48 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

(10)

Schematic Diagram of QU Board

1

2

3
CN7951 5P S5B-ZR-SM3A

4

5

6

7

A
TO QT CN7904
CN7953 80-PIN FFC SIDE-TYPE C7951 1 10V F:CHIP C7953 0.1 25V F:CHIP C7954 0.1 25V F:CHIP

B

C7952 1 10V F:CHIP

CN7952 AMP_1473442-1 PCMCIA CARD

C
TP7950 GND CONTACT

D

E

TO QT CN7903

TO Cable Card

F

(CABLE CARD)
G

H

I

– 49 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

(11)

Schematic Diagram of S1, S2 Boards

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

A

A

S1 BOARD (LAMP TEMPERATURE)
R7100 XX R7101 22 1/10W RN-CP WHT CN7100 4P SCL_E SDA_E E SET_5V

R7120 XX R7121 22 1/10W RN-CP R7122 22 1/10W RN-CP

S2 BOARD (LAMP TEMPERATURE)
CN7120 WHT 4P 4 3 2 1 SCL_E SDA_E E SET_5V

B
1 2 3 4 8 7 6

R7102 22 1/10W RN-CP

4 3 2 1

B

8

1 2 3 4

7 6
C7120 0.1 25V F 1608 R7123 XX R7126 0 CHIP R7124 R7127 0 XX CHIP R7125 R7128 0 XX CHIP C7121 1 10V B 1608 C7122 C7123 10p 10p 50V 50V CH CH 1608 1608

5

LM75BIM-5/NOPB IC7100
R7103 XX R7104 0 CHIP R7105 XX R7106 0 CHIP R7107 XX R7108 0 CHIP

C7100 C7101 0.1 1 25V 10V B F 1608 1608

C7102 C7103 10p 10p 50V 50V CH CH 1608 1608

5

LM75BIM-5/NOPB IC7120

C

C

– 50 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

(12)

Schematic Diagram of T1, T3 Boards

1

2

3

1

2

3

A

A

B

B

1

LAMP_COV NC GND CN7150 3P WHT S7156

1

LAMP_POS NC GND CN7156 3P

C

T1 BOARD (LAMP DOOR DETECTION)

S7150

2 3

C

T3 BOARD (LAMP CONNECTOR DETECTION)

2 3

– 51 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

4-5. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS
(1) AK Board

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8
• AK BOARD SEMICONDUCTOR LOCATION
IC
IC2600 IC2601 IC2602 IC2603 IC2612 IC2614 Side A Side B D-5 G-3 H-4 G-4 B-4 G-3

A

*

B

TRANSISTOR
Q2602 Side A Side B F-5 2

* *

DIODE
D2601 Side A Side B H-3 3

C

*: Refer to Terminal name of semiconductors in silk
screen printed circuit (see page 39)

D

E

F

G

H

I

– 52 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

(2) F Board

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

– 53 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

(3) G Board (Side A)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9
• G BOARD SEMICONDUCTOR LOCATION
IC DIODE

A

B

IC6101 IC6102 IC6201 IC6202 IC6203 IC6204 IC6301 IC6401 IC6402 IC6405

Side A Side B F-3 F-6 F-2 F-8 F-5 F-9 F-1 E-8 E-9 E-1 B-8 D-2 D-7 C-2 C-7 B-6 A-4

*

TRANSISTOR
Q6001 Q6201 Q6202 Q6203 Q6204 Q6205 Q6206 Q6207 Q6208 Q6209 Q6210 Q6211 Q6212 Q6213 Q6214 Q6215 Q6216 Q6217 Q6218 Q6219 Q6301 Q6302 Q6303 Q6304 Side A Side B G-2 E-4 F-8 G-9 F-8 G-9 H-8 H-2 G-8 G-2 G-8 F-8 E-8 E-8 E-8 E-8 F-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 F-8 C-8 C-2 C-8 C-2 B-2 B-2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2

*

C

D

E

F

D6001 D6021 D6100 D6101 D6102 D6103 D6104 D6105 D6106 D6201 D6202 D6203 D6204 D6205 D6206 D6207 D6208 D6209 D6210 D6211 D6212 D6213 D6214 D6215 D6216 D6217 D6218 D6219 D6225 D6226 D6302 D6305 D6306 D6307 D6308 D6309 D6311 D6312 D6401 D6406 D6407 D6408 D6410 D6416 D6418 D6501

Side A Side B H-2 G-2 G-3 G-7 F-3 E-3 E-6 E-2 E-7 E-2 E-7 D-4 D-6 F-3 F-6 H-5 H-5 F-7 F-7 F-7 H-4 H-6 F-8 F-8 G-4 G-5 F-8 F-9 F-9 G-8 H-8 H-8 G-8 G-6 G-4 G-7 G-3 E-8 E-8 G-5 H-5 G-5 G-4 A-8 B-8 B-8 B-8 A-7 A-3 B-8 B-8 A-8 A-5 B-5 C-5 C-5 D-4 D-6 C-5 C-5 B-5 B-5 A-6 A-6 A-3 A-7

3 3 3

*

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5

3

3 5 5 3 3 3

3 3

*: Refer to Terminal name of semiconductors in silk
screen printed circuit (see page 39)

G

H

I

– 54 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

(4) G Board (Side B)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9
• G BOARD SEMICONDUCTOR LOCATION
IC DIODE

A

B

IC6101 IC6102 IC6201 IC6202 IC6203 IC6204 IC6301 IC6401 IC6402 IC6405

Side A Side B F-3 F-6 F-2 F-8 F-5 F-9 F-1 E-8 E-9 E-1 B-8 D-2 D-7 C-2 C-7 B-6 A-4

*

TRANSISTOR
Q6001 Q6201 Q6202 Q6203 Q6204 Q6205 Q6206 Q6207 Q6208 Q6209 Q6210 Q6211 Q6212 Q6213 Q6214 Q6215 Q6216 Q6217 Q6218 Q6219 Q6301 Q6302 Q6303 Q6304 Side A Side B G-2 E-4 F-8 G-9 F-8 G-9 H-8 H-2 G-8 G-2 G-8 F-8 E-8 E-8 E-8 E-8 F-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 F-8 C-8 C-2 C-8 C-2 B-2 B-2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2

*

C

D

E

F

D6001 D6021 D6100 D6101 D6102 D6103 D6104 D6105 D6106 D6201 D6202 D6203 D6204 D6205 D6206 D6207 D6208 D6209 D6210 D6211 D6212 D6213 D6214 D6215 D6216 D6217 D6218 D6219 D6225 D6226 D6302 D6305 D6306 D6307 D6308 D6309 D6311 D6312 D6401 D6406 D6407 D6408 D6410 D6416 D6418 D6501

Side A Side B H-2 G-2 G-3 G-7 F-3 E-3 E-6 E-2 E-7 E-2 E-7 D-4 D-6 F-3 F-6 H-5 H-5 F-7 F-7 F-7 H-4 H-6 F-8 F-8 G-4 G-5 F-8 F-9 F-9 G-8 H-8 H-8 G-8 G-6 G-4 G-7 G-3 E-8 E-8 G-5 H-5 G-5 G-4 A-8 B-8 B-8 B-8 A-7 A-3 B-8 B-8 A-8 A-5 B-5 C-5 C-5 D-4 D-6 C-5 C-5 B-5 B-5 A-6 A-6 A-3 A-7

3 3 3

*

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5

3

3 5 5 3 3 3

3 3

*: Refer to Terminal name of semiconductors in silk
screen printed circuit (see page 39)

G

H

I

– 55 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

(5) HM, H1 Boards

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

– 56 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

(6) H2, H3 Boards

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

– 57 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

(7) QU, S1, S2, T1, T3 Boards

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

– 58 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

4-6. SEMICONDUCTORS
LM75BIM-5/NOPB
D2SB60A-F04 D4SBS6

+

1

~

TOP VIEW

~–

8 pins
+

MM1431ATT TC7SET32FU(TE85L)

~

~

1

5 pins PQ09RD21J00H

DTZ10B MA113-(TX) MMDL914T1 RD5.6SB-T1 UDZ-TE-17-3.9B UDZ-TE-17-7.5B

ANODE CATHODE

PQ30RV11J00H

ERA22-08KFLB S3L20UF4
CATHODE

ANODE

1 4

2SA1576A-T106-QR 2SB709A-QRS-TX 2SC1623-L5L6 2SC4081-R 2SD2114K 2SD601A-Q DTC114EU
C B E

MM3Z11VT1 MM3Z15VT1 MM3Z7V5T1 RD6.2SB
2

1

2

1

10ERB20-TB3 D1NS6 UF4005/23
CATHODE

ANODE

1SS226
3 2 1
3 2 1

D10SC6M

12
1 2

3
3

– 59 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1

SECTION 5
NOTE:
• Items with no part number and no description are not stocked because they are seldom required for routine service • The construction parts of an assembled part are indicated with a collation number in the remark column.

RM-Y914

RM-Y914

EXPLODED VIEWS
• Items marked " * " are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items. The components identified by shading and mark ! are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

1. SCREEN, COVERS

Les composants identifies par une trame et une marque ! sont critiques pour la securite. Ne les remplacer que par une piece portant le numero specifie.

15 3 4 15 7 6 15
#1 #1

15 15

8 15

11 10 9 15 15
#1 #1

5 4 15 15
#1

15 15

#1

#1

16 5 13 15 12 2

1

14

#1

15

REF. NO. 1 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 6 7 7 8 8

PART NO. DESCRIPTION REMARK A-1153-225-A SCREEN FRM BEZEL (50) ASSY X-1153-224-A SCREEN FRM BEZEL (60) ASSY X-2059-788-1 DOOR ASSY, LAMP 2-633-426-01 BOX (L) (60), SPEAKER (R60XBR1) 2-633-669-01 BOX (L) (50), SPEAKER (R50XBR1) 1-826-236-11 1-826-237-11 2-630-902-11 2-630-904-11 1-788-162-21 LOUDSPEAKER LOUDSPEAKER PLATE (50L), DIFFUSION PLATE (60L), DIFFUSION PLATE (50F), DIFFUSION

REF. NO. 9 9 10 11 12 12 13 14 15 16 #1

PART NO. DESCRIPTION 2-633-452-01 BRACKET (50), H1 2-633-472-01 BRACKET (60), H1 2-633-473-01 H1 BUTON A-1123-100-A H1 BOARD, COMPLETE 2-633-427-01 BOX (R) (60), SPEAKER 2-633-670-01 BOX (R) (50), SPEAKER A-1123-101-A H2 BOARD, COMPLETE 2-633-425-01 PANEL,H2 2-580-640-01 SCREW, +BVTP2 4X16 2-633-437-01 COVER, REAR

REMARK (R50XBR1) (R60XBR1)

(R60XBR1) (R50XBR1)

(R50XBR1) (R60XBR1) (R50XBR1) (R60XBR1) (R50XBR1) (R60XBR1)

2-630-905-11 PLATE (60F), DIFFUSION A-1153-223-A MIRROR (50) A-1146-733-A MIRROR (60)

7-685-648-79 SCREW +BVTP 3X12 TYPE2 IT-3

– 60 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

2. BOTTOM BLOCK-1

Main chassis assembly

59

56 58 57

#1

51 58 58 59

#1

59

54 59 59 53 59

53

The components identified by shading and mark ! are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

52

59

51 60
Les composants identifies par une trame et une marque ! sont critiques pour la securite. Ne les remplacer que par une piece portant le numero specifie.

REF. NO. –––––––– 51 0 52 0 53 0 54 56

PART NO. ––––––––– 8-835-860-11 1-468-936-12 8-835-859-11 1-576-885-11 1-791-192-13

DESCRIPTION REMARK –––––––– PART NO. ––––––––––––– ––––––––– REF. NO. ––––––––– MOTOR, DC SFF21C/C-NP 57 0 1-787-333-11 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK 58 2-580-628-01 MOTOR, DC SFF22A/C-NP 59 2-580-640-01 THERMOSTAT 60 2-580-654-01 CORD, NOISE FILTER WITH POWER #1 7-685-648-79

DESCRIPTION ––––––––––––– D.C. FAN SCREW, +BVST 3X6 SCREW, +BVTP2 4X16 SCREW, +PWTP2 4X16 SCREW +BVTP 3X12 TYPE2 IT-3

REMARK –––––––––

– 61 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

3. BOTTOM BLOCK-2

104

105 106

109
#1

107 109

103 102

108
#1 #1

101

#1

109

REF. NO. –––––––– 101 102 103 104 105

PART NO. DESCRIPTION ––––––––– ––––––––––––– A-1144-528-A T3 BOARD, COMPLETE 3-252-830-01 SCREW (B3), (+) PWH TAPPING A-1123-099-A S2 BOARD, COMPLETE 2-633-441-01 COVER, FRONT 2-580-602-01 SCREW, +PSW M4X12

REMARK –––––––– PART NO. DESCRIPTION ––––––––– REF. NO. ––––––––– ––––––––––––– 106 A-1127-174-A BLOCK ASSY, OPTICS 106 A-1148-155-A BLOCK ASSY, OPTICS 107 1-830-856-11 FLEXIBLE FLAT CABLE 108 A-1123-096-A T1 BOARD, COMPLETE 109 2-580-640-01 SCREW, +BVTP2 4X16 #1

REMARK ––––––––– (R60XBR1) (R50XBR1)

7-685-648-79 SCREW +BVTP 3X12 TYPE2 IT-3

– 62 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

4. MAIN CHASSIS ASSEMBLY

166 156 162 157 166 155 158

159

154

166 160 166
#1

164 166 161

153 166 151

164 167 152

166 166 166 166 166

152

#1

166

163

165

REF. NO. ––––––––– DESCRIPTION REMARK –––––––– PART NO. DESCRIPTION –––––––– PART NO. ––––––––––––– ––––––––– REF. NO. ––––––––– ––––––––––––– 151 * A-1073-391-A QU BOARD, COMPLETE 161 A-1152-712-A Q BOX ASSY 152 3-682-691-00 NUT, WASHER HEXAGON 161 A-1152-713-A Q BOX ASSY 153 8-597-906-00 ANTENNA SWITCHE RFD-SA801 162 A-1152-714-A ASU/DSU ASSY 154 A-1123-095-A AK BOARD, COMPLETE 162 A-1152-715-A ASU/DSU ASSY 155 A-1138-895-A K BOARD, COMPLETE 163 A-1152-716-A PD BOARD, COMPLETE 156 157 158 159 160 A-1119-915-A F BOARD, COMPLETE A-1123-102-A H3 BOARD, COMPLETE A-1060-186-A HM BOARD, COMPLETE A-1138-898-A G BOARD, COMPLETE A-1123-098-A S1 BOARD, COMPLETE 164 165 166 167 #1 * 3-952-863-11 1-830-193-11 2-580-628-01 2-580-626-01 SPACER, CIRCUIT BOARD CABLE, USB SCREW, +BVST 3X6 SCREW, SP 4-4O UNC

REMARK ––––––––– (R60XBR1) (R50XBR1) (R60XBR1) (R50XBR1)

7-685-648-79 SCREW +BVTP 3X12 TYPE2 IT-3

– 63 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1

SECTION 6 ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
The components identified by shading and mark ! are critial for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

RM-Y914

RM-Y914

AK
• RESISTORS All resistors are in ohms F : nonflammable • CAPACITORS PF : µµF • There are some cases the reference number on one board overlaps on the other board. Therefore, when ordering parts by the reference number, please include the board name.

• Items marked " * " are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items. • All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B, unless otherwise noted.

Les composants identifies par une trame et une marque ! sont critiques pour la securite. Ne les remplacer que par une piece portant le numero specifie.

When indicating parts by reference number, please include the board name.

REF. NO. –––––––

PART NO. ––––––––

DESCRIPTION –––––––––––

REMARK –––––––

REF. NO. –––––––

PART NO. ––––––––

DESCRIPTION ––––––––––– < IC >

REMARK –––––––

A-1123-095-A AK BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** IC2600 IC2601 IC2602 IC2603 IC2612 IC2614 8-759-825-15 6-703-046-01 6-702-821-01 6-705-403-01 6-706-056-01

< CAPACITOR > C2605 C2608 C2609 C2621 C2622 C2629 C2630 C2631 C2632 C2633 C2675 C2692 C2757 C2758 C2760 C2761 C2762 C2763 C2764 C2765 C2766 C2767 C2768 C2769 1-107-826-11 1-162-915-11 1-162-915-11 1-162-970-11 1-107-826-11 1-117-681-11 1-107-826-11 1-107-826-11 1-117-681-11 1-125-891-11 1-107-826-11 1-107-826-11 1-126-206-11 1-107-826-11 1-126-206-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-107-826-11 1-107-826-11 1-107-826-11 1-164-245-11 1-107-826-11 1-107-826-11 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 0.1µF 10pF 10pF 0.01µF 0.1µF 100µF 0.1µF 0.1µF 100µF 0.47µF 0.1µF 0.1µF 100µF 0.1µF 100µF 0.01µF 0.01µF 0.1µF 0.1µF 0.1µF 0.015µF 0.1µF 0.1µF 0.1µF 10% 16V 0.50PF 50V 0.50PF 50V 10% 25V 10% 16V 20% 10% 10% 20% 10% 10% 10% 20% 10% 20% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 16V 16V 16V 16V 10V 16V 16V 6.3V 16V 6.3V 25V 25V 16V 16V 16V 25V 16V 16V 16V

IC IC IC IC IC

LC89056W-E SN74LVC1G08DCKR R3112N421A-TR-FA PQ070XZ01ZPH SN74LVC2GU04DCKR

6-703-046-01 IC SN74LVC1G08DCKR

< TRANSISTOR > Q2602 8-729-907-00 TRANSISTOR DTC114EU

< RESISTOR > R2601 R2602 R2603 R2606 R2607 R2608 R2609 R2610 R2611 R2612 R2613 R2614 R2615 R2616 R2617 R2618 R2619 R2620 R2621 R2623 R2627 R2628 R2632 R2635 R2636 R2639 R2642 R2643 R2645 R2679 R2680 R2681 R2682 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-805-11 1-216-857-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-817-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-853-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-809-11 SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 47 1M 0 0 470 0 0 0 0 0 10K 0 100 100 100 0 100 100 10 470K 0 0 100 33K 4.7K 5.6K

5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W

5%

1/10W

< CONNECTOR > CN2604 1-819-443-11 HEADER ASEEMBLY FOR PWB 15P

5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

< DIODE > D2601 8-719-065-68 DIODE MAZF04700LS0

< FERRITE BEAD > FB2602 FB2603 FB2604 FB2605 FB2608 FB2609 FB2610 FB2611 1-414-228-11 1-414-228-11 1-414-228-11 1-414-228-11 1-414-228-11 FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE 0µH 0µH 0µH 0µH 0µH 0µH 0µH 0µH

5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

1-414-228-11 FERRITE 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 1-414-228-11 FERRITE

1-216-839-11 METAL CHIP 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 1-216-830-11 METAL CHIP

– 64 –

Les composants identifies par une trame et une marque ! sont critiques pour la securite. Ne les remplacer que par une piece portant le numero specifie.

The components identified by shading and mark ! are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

AK F G
REF. NO. ––––––– PART NO. –––––––– DESCRIPTION ––––––––––– < COIL > REMARK ––––––– L6002 0 1-456-856-21 LINE FILTER COIL L6003 0 1-456-856-21 LINE FILTER COIL

REF. NO. ––––––– R2696 R2711 R2713 R2714 R2715 R2716 R2717 R2718 R2719 R2720 R2721 R2722 R2723 R2724 R2725 R2726 R2730 R2744 R2745 R2746 R2763 R2764 R2765 R2781 R2789 R2790

PART NO. –––––––– 1-216-833-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-805-11 1-218-692-11 1-218-704-11 1-218-704-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-218-716-11 1-218-714-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-801-11

DESCRIPTION ––––––––––– METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP

10K 100 47 1K 3.3K 3.3K 0 10K 0 0 0 0 0 10K 8.2K 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 22

5% 5% 5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5%

REMARK ––––––– 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

< RESISTOR > R6002 R6063 1-240-938-91 METAL 1-240-938-91 METAL 1.5M 1.5M 5% 5% 0.5W 0.5W

5%

1/10W

< VARISTOR > VD600101-804-995-21 VARISTOR VD600201-804-995-21 VARISTOR 0.5% 1/10W 0.5% 1/10W *************************************************************** A-1138-898-A G BOARD, COMPLETE ********************* * 1-694-592-21 TERMINAL 2-580-594-01 SCREW, +PSW M3X12 * 4-042-408-02 PIN(45), WIRE

< CAPACITOR > C6001 C6002 C6008 C6101 C6102 1-162-970-11 1-162-974-11 1-165-531-31 1-161-964-91 1-161-964-91 CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP MYLAR CERAMIC CERAMIC CERAMIC ELECT CERAMIC CERAMIC ELECT CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CERAMIC CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CERAMIC MYLAR CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 0.01µF 0.01µF 1µF 0.0047µF 0.0047µF 47pF 22µF 470pF 470pF 470µF 0.1µF 100µF 100µF 4.7µF 2.2µF 0.001µF 0.047µF 0.0047µF 0.0047µF 0.022µF 0.1µF 0.01µF 0.47µF 0.0047µF 0.0047µF 1µF 100pF 0.001µF 0.01µF 470pF 470pF 100µF 0.022µF 0.001µF 220µF 0.1µF 0.01µF 0.022µF 0.1µF 10µF 10% 10 250V 250V 5% 20% 10% 10% 20% 10% 20% 20% 20% 20% 25V 50V 0V

5%

1/10W

< TEST POINT > TP2600 TP2601 1-535-757-11 CHIP, CHECKER 1-535-757-11 CHIP, CHECKER

< VIBRATOR > X2600 1-813-049-21 VIBRATOR, CRYSTAL

C6105 1-107-974-11 C6106 1-100-780-31 C6107 1-165-127-11 C6111 0 1-119-886-51 C6113 1-165-729-31 C6114 C6115 C6116 C6117 C6118 C6119 C6202 C6203 C6204 C6205 0V 0V 250V 250V C6206 C6207 C6208 C6209 C6210 C6212 C6213 C6215 C6216 C6217 1-107-826-11 1-128-526-11 1-107-910-11 1-107-905-11 1-107-903-11 1-162-964-11 1-104-760-11 1-161-964-91 1-161-964-91 1-163-037-11 1-115-339-11 1-163-021-91 1-107-823-11 1-161-964-91 1-161-964-91 1-112-024-21 1-162-927-11 1-162-964-11 1-163-021-91 1-162-962-11

2KV 450V 500V 250V 16V 16V 25V 50V 50V 50V

************************************************************** A-1119-915-A F BOARD, COMPLETE ******************** 1-533-223-11 FUSE HOLDER 0A 0V

< CAPACITOR > C6002 C6004 C6005 C6006 0 0 0 0 1-165-531-21 1-165-529-31 1-119-886-51 1-119-886-51 MYLAR MYLAR CERAMIC CERAMIC 1µF 0.22µF 470pF 470pF 10 10 10% 10%

10% 50V 10% 50V 250V 250V 10% 50V 10% 50V 10% 50V 10% 16V 250V 250V 10% 5% 10% 10% 10% 10% 20% 10% 10% 20% 10% 10% 10% 10% 20% 450V 50V 50V 50V 50V 250V 25V 50V 50V 25V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V

< CONNECTOR > CN6001* CN6018* CN6051 CN6052 CN6053 1-580-843-11 1-580-843-11 1-695-915-11 1-695-915-11 1-695-915-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (POWER) PIN, CONNECTOR (POWER) TAB (CONTACT) TAB (CONTACT) TAB (CONTACT)

CN6054 1-695-915-11 TAB (CONTACT)

C6218 0 1-119-886-51 CERAMIC C6219 1-128-526-11 ELECT C6220 1-163-037-11 CERAMIC CHIP C6221 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP C6222 1-107-889-11 ELECT C6223 C6225 C6226 C6227 C6228 1-115-339-11 1-163-021-91 1-163-037-11 1-115-339-11 1-107-906-11 CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT

< FUSE > F6001 0 1-576-233-51 FUSE 6.3A 250V

– 65 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

G
REF. NO. ––––––– C6229 C6230 C6231 C6232 C6233 C6234 C6235 C6236 C6237 C6238 C6239 C6240 C6241 C6242 C6243 C6244 C6245 C6246 C6247 C6248 C6249 C6250 C6251 C6252 C6253 C6254 C6256 C6258 C6259 C6260 C6301 C6302 C6304 C6305 C6306 C6307 C6308 C6309 C6310 C6311 C6313 C6314 C6315 C6317 C6318 C6319 C6321 C6332 C6405 C6406 C6407 C6408 C6411 C6413 C6414 C6417 C6423 C6426 C6427 C6429 C6430 C6432 C6433 C6435 PART NO. –––––––– 1-115-416-11 1-104-760-11 1-100-613-81 1-100-613-81 1-163-145-00 1-163-037-11 1-163-021-91 1-100-613-81 1-100-613-81 1-117-753-11 1-162-964-11 1-162-970-11 1-163-021-91 1-117-753-11 1-162-964-11 1-162-970-11 1-163-021-91 1-163-021-91 1-107-905-11 1-107-888-11 1-107-905-11 1-162-970-11 1-107-902-11 1-162-970-11 1-107-910-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-117-227-11 1-117-227-11 1-163-021-91 1-137-639-21 1-162-970-11 1-107-905-11 1-107-909-11 1-100-831-91 1-107-906-11 1-115-339-11 1-162-964-11 1-115-340-11 1-162-970-11 1-107-888-11 1-162-970-11 1-107-910-11 1-100-613-81 1-100-919-11 1-162-970-11 1-117-227-11 1-163-021-91 1-128-954-11 1-165-176-11 1-137-921-31 1-135-362-31 1-162-974-11 1-126-926-11 1-107-884-11 1-162-974-11 1-164-315-11 1-104-653-11 1-126-934-11 1-162-974-11 1-162-974-11 1-162-974-11 1-162-974-11 1-137-921-31 DESCRIPTION ––––––––––– CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CERAMIC CERAMIC CHIP REMARK ––––––– 0.001µF 5% 25V 0.047µF 10% 50V 470pF 5% 1KV 470pF 5% 1KV 0.0015µF 5% 50V 10% 10% 5% 5% 20% 10% 10% 10% 20% 10% 10% 10% 10% 20% 20% 20% 10% 20% 10% 20% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 20% 20% 2% 20% 10% 10% 10% 10% 20% 10% 20% 5% 3% 10% 10% 10% 20% 10% 20% 20% 20% 20% 50V 50V 1KV 1KV 450V 50V 25V 50V 450V 50V 25V 50V 50V 50V 25V 50V 25V 50V 25V 50V 25V 25V 450V 450V 50V 450V 25V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 25V 25V 25V 25V 50V 1KV 1KV 25V 450V 50V 25V 16V 10V 16V 50V 10V 16V 50V 50V 16V 16V 50V 50V 50V 50V 10V REF. NO. ––––––– C6436 C6437 C6438 C6439 C6442 C6443 C6445 C6446 C6447 C6448 C6449 C6450 C6451 C6452 C6453 C6454 C6455 C6456 C6503 PART NO. DESCRIPTION –––––––– ––––––––––– 1-164-315-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-164-315-11 1-164-315-11 1-164-315-11 1-164-315-11 1-128-954-11 1-164-315-11 1-164-315-11 1-164-315-11 1-164-315-11 1-164-315-11 1-164-315-11 1-164-315-11 1-164-315-11 1-164-315-11 1-164-315-11 CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 470pF 470pF 470pF 470pF 470pF 1000µF 470pF 470pF 470pF 470pF 470pF 470pF 470pF 470pF 470pF 470pF 470pF 470pF 1000µF 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 20% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 20% REMARK ––––––– 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 25V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V

CERAMIC CHIP 0.022µF CERAMIC CHIP 0.01µF CERAMIC 470pF CERAMIC 470pF ELECT(BLOCK) 470µF CERAMIC CHIP 0.001µF CERAMIC CHIP 0.01µF CERAMIC CHIP 0.01µF ELECT(BLOCK) 470µF CERAMIC CHIP 0.001µF CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP MYLAR MYLAR CERAMIC CHIP MYLAR CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC FILM CERAMIC CHIP MYLAR CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT 0.01µF 0.01µF 0.01µF 4.7µF 47µF 4.7µF 0.01µF 1µF 0.01µF 100µF 0.01µF 0.01µF 1µF 1µF 0.01µF 0.47µF 0.01µF 4.7µF 47µF 0.001µF 10µF 0.1µF 0.001µF 0.22µF 0.01µF 47µF 0.01µF 100µF 470pF 0.027µF 0.01µF 1µF 0.01µF 1000µF 0.047µF 1500µF 1500µF 0.01µF 1000µF 1000µF 0.01µF 470pF 220µF 220µF 0.01µF 0.01µF 0.01µF 0.01µF 1500µF

1-164-315-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-164-315-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-107-914-11 ELECT

< CONNECTOR > CN6014* CN6015* CN6301 CN6501* 1-580-843-11 1-785-701-11 1-695-915-11 1-793-660-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (POWER) PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 3P TAB (CONTACT) PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 3P

< DIODE > D6001 D6021 D6100 D6101 D6102 D6103 D6104 D6105 D6106 D6201 D6202 D6203 D6204 D6205 D6206 D6207 D6208 D6209 D6210 D6211 D6212 D6213 D6214 D6215 D6216 D6217 D6218 D6219 D6225 D6226 D6302 D6305 D6306 D6307 D6308 8-719-081-97 8-719-081-97 8-719-077-76 8-719-036-94 6-500-849-01 6-500-567-31 6-500-567-31 8-719-032-12 6-500-567-31 8-719-304-63 8-719-056-84 8-719-081-97 8-719-056-84 8-719-054-89 8-719-081-97 6-500-137-01 8-719-304-63 6-500-254-01 6-500-137-01 6-500-137-01 8-719-041-97 8-719-041-97 6-501-043-01 6-501-043-01 8-719-304-63 6-500-407-01 8-719-081-97 8-719-059-51 6-500-849-01 6-500-849-01 8-719-082-03 8-719-979-64 6-501-043-01 6-501-043-01 6-500-567-31 DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE MMDL914T1 MMDL914T1 D2SB60A-F04 RD5.6SB-T1 ERA22-08KFLB 10ERB20-TB3 10ERB20-TB3 D1NS6 10ERB20-TB3 RM11C UDZ-TE-17-7.5B MMDL914T1 UDZ-TE-17-7.5B D15XB60 MMDL914T1 BAT54HT1 RM11C MM3Z7V5T1 BAT54HT1 BAT54HT1 MA113-(TX) MA113-(TX) UMZ16NT106 UMZ16NT106 RM11C SF20L60U-4015 MMDL914T1 MA3J142E0LSO ERA22-08KFLB ERA22-08KFLB MM3Z15VT1 UF4005/23 UMZ16NT106 UMZ16NT106 10ERB20-TB3

5% 20% 20%

20%

– 66 –

Les composants identifies par une trame et une marque ! sont critiques pour la securite. Ne les remplacer que par une piece portant le numero specifie.

The components identified by shading and mark ! are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

G
REF. NO. ––––––– Q6205 Q6206 Q6207 Q6208 Q6209 Q6210 Q6211 Q6212 Q6213 Q6214 Q6215 Q6216 Q6217 Q6218 Q6219 Q6301 Q6302 Q6303 Q6304 PART NO. –––––––– 8-729-807-17 6-551-336-01 6-551-336-01 8-729-026-53 8-729-905-35 8-729-905-35 8-729-905-35 8-729-905-35 8-729-026-53 8-729-907-00 8-729-905-35 8-729-026-53 8-729-026-53 8-729-804-41 8-729-040-89 6-551-297-01 6-551-297-01 8-729-905-35 8-729-026-53 DESCRIPTION ––––––––––– TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR REMARK ––––––– 2SD1621-S 2SK3934(LBS1SONY.Q 2SK3934(LBS1SONY.Q 2SA1576A-T106-QR 2SC4081-R 2SC4081-R 2SC4081-R 2SC4081-R 2SA1576A-T106-QR DTC114EU 2SC4081-R 2SA1576A-T106-QR 2SA1576A-T106-QR 2SB1122-S 2SK1590-T1B 2SK3568(LBS1SONY.Q 2SK3568(LBS1SONY.Q 2SC4081-R 2SA1576A-T106-QR

REF. NO. ––––––– D6309 D6311 D6312 D6401 D6406 D6407 D6408 D6410 D6416 D6418 D6501

PART NO. –––––––– 8-719-081-67 6-500-137-01 8-719-080-69 8-719-510-09 8-719-510-09 8-719-060-88 8-719-510-09 8-719-510-09 6-500-551-01 8-719-081-97

DESCRIPTION ––––––––––– DIODE M1FM3 DIODE BAT54HT1 DIODE M1FS4-4063 DIODE D10SC6M DIODE D10SC6M DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE D4SBS6 D10SC6M D10SC6M MM3Z11VT1 MMDL914T1

REMARK –––––––

8-719-510-73 DIODE S3L20UF4

< FERRITE BEAD > FB6001 * FB6002 * FB6301 FB6401 FB6402 FB6403 FB6404 1-469-670-21 1-469-670-21 1-410-397-21 1-410-397-21 1-410-397-21 FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE 0µH 0µH 1.1µH 1.1µH 1.1µH 1.1µH 1.1µH

1-410-397-21 FERRITE 1-410-397-21 FERRITE

< RESISTOR > R6001 R6002 R6005 R6006 R6007 R6101 R6102 R6103 R6104 R6105 R6106 R6107 R6108 R6109 R6110 R6111 R6112 R6113 R6114 R6115 R6116 R6117 R6118 R6119 R6120 R6121 R6122 R6123 R6124 R6125 R6201 R6202 R6203 R6204 R6205 R6206 R6207 R6208 R6209 R6210 R6211 R6212 1-216-835-11 1-216-829-11 1-202-962-11 1-202-962-11 1-217-781-31 1-216-353-00 1-249-381-11 1-260-129-11 1-216-813-11 1-249-393-11 1-249-385-11 1-216-823-11 1-216-817-11 1-216-839-11 1-218-871-11 1-216-864-11 1-218-871-11 1-208-830-11 1-208-830-11 1-208-830-11 1-208-830-11 1-208-830-11 1-208-830-11 1-208-830-11 1-208-830-11 1-208-830-11 1-208-830-11 1-208-830-11 1-208-830-11 1-216-841-11 1-216-121-11 1-216-857-11 1-218-899-11 1-245-470-21 1-245-474-21 1-245-474-21 1-218-895-11 1-245-470-21 1-245-474-21 1-245-474-21 METAL CHIP METAL CHIP CEMENTED CEMENTED FUSIBLE METAL OXIDE CARBON CARBON METAL CHIP CARBON CARBON METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL METAL METAL METAL CHIP METAL METAL METAL 15K 4.7K 3.3 3.3 2.2 2.2 1 330K 220 10 2.2 1.5K 470 33K 10K 0 10K 100K 100K 100K 100K 100K 100K 100K 100K 100K 100K 100K 100K 47K 1M 1M 150K 220K 330K 330K 100K 220K 330K 330K 18K 220K 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 0.5% 1/10W 1/10W 10W 10W 5W 1W 1/4W 1/2W 1/10W 1/4W 1/4W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

< IC > IC6101 IC6102 IC6201 IC6202 IC6203 IC6204 IC6301 IC6401 IC6402 IC6405 6-600-279-01 8-759-682-42 6-704-924-01 6-703-132-01 8-759-058-50 8-759-321-95 6-706-852-01 8-759-653-07 8-759-098-24 8-759-682-42 IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC STR-A6169 MM1431ATT PQ12DZ5UJ00H UC3854BN XRA10324AF HA17431PA CXD9841M PQ09RD21J00H PQ30RV11J00H MM1431ATT

< COIL > L6101 L6202 L6203 L6204 L6301 L6302 L6401 L6402 L6407 L6501 L6502 1-414-934-21 1-416-489-11 1-456-531-11 1-456-531-11 1-406-667-11 1-406-977-21 1-406-971-21 1-406-971-21 1-412-525-31 1-412-519-11 INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR 10µH 143µH 58µH 58µH 220µH 100µH 10µH 10µH 10µH 3.3µH 100µH

0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 5% 5% 5% 0.5% 1% 1% 1% 0.5% 1% 1% 1%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/16W 1/4W 1/4W 1/4W 1/10W 1/4W 1/4W 1/4W

1-412-537-31 INDUCTOR

< PHOTOCOUPLER > PH610108-749-016-82 PH620108-749-016-82 PH620208-749-016-82 PH620308-749-016-82 PH630108-749-016-82 PHOTOCOUPLER PC123GY2J00F PHOTOCOUPLER PC123GY2J00F PHOTOCOUPLER PC123GY2J00F PHOTOCOUPLER PC123GY2J00F PHOTOCOUPLER PC123GY2J00F

< TRANSISTOR > Q6001 Q6201 Q6202 Q6203 Q6204 8-729-023-22 8-729-907-00 8-729-907-00 8-729-820-86 8-729-905-35 TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR 2SD2114K DTC114EU DTC114EU 2SB1121-ST 2SC4081-R

1-218-877-11 METAL CHIP 1-245-470-21 METAL

0.5% 1/10W 1% 1/4W

– 67 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

G
REF. NO. ––––––– R6213 R6214 R6215 R6216 R6217 R6218 R6219 R6220 R6222 R6223 R6224 R6225 R6226 R6227 R6228 R6229 R6230 R6231 R6232 R6233 R6234 R6235 R6236 R6237 R6238 R6239 R6240 R6241 R6242 R6243 R6244 R6245 R6246 R6247 R6248 R6249 R6250 R6251 R6252 R6253 R6254 R6255 R6256 R6257 R6258 R6259 R6260 R6261 R6262 R6263 R6264 R6265 R6266 R6267 R6268 R6269 R6270 R6271 R6272 R6273 R6274 R6275 R6276 PART NO. –––––––– 1-245-474-21 1-245-474-21 1-216-121-11 1-216-825-11 1-218-847-11 1-218-875-11 1-216-857-11 1-216-830-11 1-216-837-11 1-243-665-11 1-243-665-11 1-249-397-11 1-216-802-11 1-216-825-11 1-216-837-11 1-249-397-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-802-11 1-216-833-11 1-249-393-11 1-249-401-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-837-11 1-249-393-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-849-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-837-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-833-11 1-218-867-11 1-218-851-11 1-218-869-11 1-208-830-11 1-208-830-11 1-208-830-11 1-216-845-11 1-216-835-11 1-216-837-11 1-215-882-00 1-215-882-00 1-216-121-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-841-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-809-11 1-208-830-11 1-208-830-11 1-208-830-11 1-216-837-11 1-216-847-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-841-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-841-11 DESCRIPTION ––––––––––– METAL METAL RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL METAL CARBON METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP CARBON METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP CARBON CARBON METAL CHIP METAL CHIP CARBON METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL OXIDE METAL OXIDE RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP 330K 330K 1M 2.2K 1K 15K 1M 5.6K 22K 0.05 0.05 22 27 2.2K 22K 22 10K 27 10K 10 47 10K 22K 10 4.7K 220K 10K 22K 4.7K 10K 6.8K 1.5K 8.2K 100K 100K 100K 100K 15K 22K 22 22 1M 10K 1K 47K 10K 10K 100 100K 100K 100K 22K 150K 10K 1K 1K 1K 47K 10K 1K 4.7K 4.7K 47K 1% 1% 5% 5% 0.5% 0.5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% REMARK ––––––– 1/4W 1/4W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 5W 5W 1/4W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/4W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/4W 1/4W 1/10W 1/10W 1/4W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 2W 2W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W REF. NO. ––––––– R6277 R6278 R6279 R6280 R6281 R6282 R6283 R6284 R6285 R6286 R6287 R6288 R6289 R6290 R6291 R6292 R6293 R6294 R6297 R6298 R6299 R6301 R6302 R6303 R6304 R6305 R6306 R6307 R6308 R6309 R6311 R6312 R6313 R6314 R6315 R6316 R6317 R6318 R6319 R6321 R6322 R6325 R6341 R6402 R6403 R6404 R6406 R6407 R6411 R6412 R6413 R6414 R6415 R6416 R6417 R6423 R6426 R6427 R6428 R6450 R6454 R6455 R6601 R6602 PART NO. –––––––– 1-216-797-11 1-216-849-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-833-11 1-218-863-11 1-218-831-11 1-218-855-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-841-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-841-11 1-216-833-11 1-249-393-11 1-216-837-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-827-11 1-216-825-11 1-216-861-11 1-249-393-11 1-202-933-61 1-218-865-11 1-216-833-11 1-245-478-21 1-245-478-21 1-218-877-11 1-216-821-11 1-218-823-11 1-219-230-71 1-219-230-71 1-218-825-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-260-304-51 1-216-833-11 1-216-361-00 1-216-821-11 1-216-833-11 1-202-933-61 1-216-864-11 1-216-857-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-793-11 1-216-821-11 1-218-863-11 1-218-875-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-841-11 1-218-847-11 1-218-847-11 1-218-855-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-817-11 DESCRIPTION ––––––––––– METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP CARBON METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP CARBON FUSIBLE METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL METAL METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP FUSIBLE FUSIBLE METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP CARBON METAL CHIP METAL OXIDE METAL CHIP METAL CHIP FUSIBLE SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP 10 220K 4.7K 4.7K 10K 4.7K 220 2.2K 10K 47K 10K 10K 10K 47K 10K 10 22K 10K 3.3K 2.2K 2.2M 10 0.1 5.6K 10K 470K 470K 18K 1K 100 22 22 120 10K 10K 10 10K 0.22 1K 10K 0.1 0 1M 1K 0 1K 4.7 1K 4.7K 15K 0 47K 1K 1K 2.2K 10K 0 0 0 1K 10K 0 1K 470 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 10% 0.5% 5% 1% 1% 0.5% 5% 0.5% 5% 5% 0.5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 10% 5% 5% REMARK ––––––– 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/4W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/4W 1/2W 1/10W 1/10W 1/4W 1/4W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/6W 1/6W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/2W 1/10W 2W 1/10W 1/10W 1/2W 1/10W 1/10W

5% 5% 5% 0.5% 0.5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

– 68 –

Les composants identifies par une trame et une marque ! sont critiques pour la securite. Ne les remplacer que par une piece portant le numero specifie.

The components identified by shading and mark ! are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

G HM
REF. NO. ––––––– C7224 C7224 PART NO. –––––––– 1-164-156-11 1-164-156-11 DESCRIPTION ––––––––––– CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 0.1µF 0.1µF REMARK ––––––– 25V 25V < CONNECTOR >

REF. NO. ––––––– R6603

PART NO. DESCRIPTION –––––––– ––––––––––– 1-216-864-11 SHORT CHIP

REMARK ––––––– 0

< VARIABLE RESISTOR > RV6201 1-225-626-91 RES, VAR, ADJ, CERMET 1K CN7201 1-779-677-11 CONNECTOR, USB (B) CN7204 1-817-653-11 MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR < RELAY > RY600101-755-418-12 RELAY (AC POWER) RY600201-755-418-12 RELAY (AC POWER) D7201 D7202 D7210 D7212 8-719-800-76 8-719-056-77 6-500-182-01 8-719-056-77 < DIODE > DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE 1SS226 UDZ-TE-17-3.9B L-1503CB/1ID-F01 UDZ-TE-17-3.9B

< TRANSFORMER > T6101 0 1-443-313-21 TRANSFORMER, CONVERTER (SBT) T6302 0 1-443-797-11 DC-DC CONVERTER TRANSFORMER

< FERRITE BEAD > < THERMISTOR > TH6101 1-803-586-11 THERMISTOR, NTC TH6201 1-809-789-71 THERMISTOR, POSITIVE *************************************************************** A-1060-186-A HM BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** IC7201 IC7202 IC7203 FB7201 FB7202 FB7203 1-414-921-11 FERRITE 1-414-921-11 FERRITE 1-414-921-11 FERRITE 0µH 0µH 0µH

< IC > 6-703-076-01 IC XC6204B332MR 6-704-548-01 IC 90C36LC1B-LF 6-704-067-01 IC M24128-BWMN6T(A)

< CAPACITOR > < COIL > C7203 C7203 C7204 C7204 C7205 C7205 C7206 C7206 C7207 C7207 C7208 C7208 C7209 C7209 C7210 C7210 C7211 C7211 C7212 C7212 C7213 C7213 C7215 C7215 C7216 C7216 C7217 C7217 C7218 C7218 C7219 C7219 C7220 C7220 C7221 C7221 1-162-910-11 1-162-910-11 1-162-911-11 1-162-911-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-107-826-11 1-107-826-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-125-837-91 1-125-837-91 1-107-826-11 1-107-826-11 1-127-760-11 1-127-760-11 1-125-837-91 1-125-837-91 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-164-156-11 1-164-156-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-125-837-91 1-125-837-91 1-164-156-11 1-164-156-11 1-164-156-11 1-164-156-11 1-164-156-11 1-164-156-11 1-164-156-11 CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 5pF 5pF 6pF 6pF 0.01µF 0.01µF 0.01µF 0.01µF 0.1µF 0.1µF 0.01µF 0.01µF 1µF 1µF 0.1µF 0.1µF 4.7µF 4.7µF 1µF 1µF 0.01µF 0.01µF 0.1µF 0.1µF 0.01µF 0.01µF 1µF 1µF 0.1µF 0.1µF 0.1µF 0.1µF 0.1µF 0.1µF 0.1µF 0.1µF 0.25PF 50V 0.25PF 50V 0.50PF 50V 0.50PF 50V 10% 25V 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 25V 25V 25V 16V 16V 25V 25V 6.3V 6.3V 16V 16V 6.3V 6.3V 6.3V 6.3V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 6.3V 6.3V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V L7201 1-414-394-11 INDUCTOR 2.2µH

< TRANSISTOR > Q7201 Q7202 8-729-424-02 TRANSISTOR 2SB709A-QRS-TX 8-729-422-27 TRANSISTOR 2SD601A-Q

< RESISTOR > R7201 R7202 R7203 R7204 R7206 R7209 R7210 R7211 R7212 R7214 R7215 R7216 R7217 R7218 R7219 R7221 R7222 R7223 R7224 R7225 R7226 R7227 R7228 R7229 R7231 R7234 1-216-864-11 1-414-228-11 1-216-837-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-857-11 1-414-228-11 1-216-803-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-803-11 1-216-823-11 1-414-228-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-817-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-811-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-825-11 SHORT CHIP FERRITE METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP FERRITE METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP FERRITE METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP 0 0µH 22K 100 1M 0µH 33 1K 33 1.5K 0µH 1K 1K 4.7K 470 1K 150 100 100 100 0 0 0 1K 2.2K 100

5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

10% 10% 10% 10%

5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

1-164-156-11 CERAMIC CHIP

1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP

– 69 –

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

HM H1 H2 H3
REF. NO. ––––––– X7201 PART NO. –––––––– DESCRIPTION ––––––––––– < VIBRATOR > REMARK ––––––– REF. NO. ––––––– IC7020 IC7021 IC7022 PART NO. –––––––– DESCRIPTION ––––––––––– < IC > REMARK ––––––– 1-760-965-21 VIBRATOR, CRYSTAL *************************************************************** A-1123-100-A H1 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************* L7000 < CAPACITOR > C7000 1-100-597-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1µF 10% 25V Q7020 Q7021 Q7022 Q7023 8-729-120-28 8-729-120-28 8-729-120-28 8-729-120-28 < TRANSISTOR > TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR 2SC1623-L5L6 2SC1623-L5L6 2SC1623-L5L6 2SC1623-L5L6 6-703-744-01 IC GP1UE26SXKOF 6-706-481-01 IC TC7SET32FU(T5RSOJF) 8-759-695-94 IC TAR5S33(TE85R)

< COIL > 1-469-555-21 INDUCTOR 10µH

< DIODE > D7001 8-719-083-58 DIODE UDZSTE-173.9B

< RESISTOR > R7001 R7002 R7003 R7004 R7005 1-218-684-11 1-218-688-11 1-218-692-11 1-218-700-11 1-218-708-11 METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP 470 680 1K 2.2K 4.7K 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W R7020 R7021 R7022 R7023 R7024 R7025 R7026 R7027 R7028 R7029 R7030 R7031 R7032 R7036 R7039 R7041 A-1123-101-A H2 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************* 1-216-823-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-817-11 1-216-817-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-817-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-817-11 1-216-805-11 1-216-833-11

< RESISTOR > METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP 1.5K 0 10K 10K 470 470 10K 10K 470 10K 10K 10K 470 47 10K 470K 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

< SWITCH > S7000 S7001 S7002 S7003 S7004 S7005 1-762-196-21 1-762-196-21 1-762-196-21 1-762-196-21 1-762-196-21 SWITCH, TACT SWITCH, TACT SWITCH, TACT SWITCH, TACT SWITCH, TACT

1-762-196-21 SWITCH, TACT

*************************************************************** 1-216-853-11 METAL CHIP

< SWITCH > < CAPACITOR > C7020 C7021 C7022 C7023 C7024 C7025 C7026 C7027 C7029 C7030 C7031 C7032 C7033 C7034 1-164-156-11 1-124-779-00 1-162-974-11 1-162-974-11 1-162-974-11 1-164-156-11 1-162-974-11 1-162-974-11 1-164-156-11 1-128-993-21 1-164-156-11 1-162-974-11 1-128-993-21 1-164-156-11 CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 0.1µF 10µF 0.01µF 0.01µF 0.01µF 0.1µF 0.01µF 0.01µF 0.1µF 22µF 0.1µF 0.01µF 22µF 0.1µF 25V 16V 50V 50V 50V 25V 50V 50V 25V 10V 25V 50V 10V 25V S7020 1-762-196-21 SWITCH, TACT

*************************************************************** A-1123-102-A H3 BOARD, COMPLETE *********************

20%

< CAPACITOR > C7057 C7058 C7059 C7060 C7061 1-128-991-21 1-128-991-21 1-125-891-11 1-126-603-11 1-126-603-11 ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP 10µF 10µF 0.47µF 4.7µF 4.7µF 20% 20% 10% 20% 20% 50V 50V 10V 35V 35V

20%

20%

< CONNECTOR > CN7050 1-784-646-11 TERMINAL, S CN7051 1-695-915-11 TAB (CONTACT)

< DIODE > D7022 D7023 D7024 D7025 D7026 6-500-861-01 8-719-064-07 6-500-861-01 8-719-158-19 8-719-158-19 DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE SML-020MVT-T86 SML-310LTT86 SML-020MVT-T86 RD6.2SB RD6.2SB

< DIODE > D7050 D7051 D7052 8-719-977-28 DIODE DTZ10B 8-719-977-28 DIODE DTZ10B 8-719-977-28 DIODE DTZ10B

– 70 –

Les composants identifies par une trame et une marque ! sont critiques pour la securite. Ne les remplacer que par une piece portant le numero specifie.

The components identified by shading and mark ! are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

H3 QU S1 S2 T1 T3
REMARK ––––––– REF. NO. ––––––– PART NO. –––––––– DESCRIPTION ––––––––––– < RESISTOR > METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP 22 22 0 0 0 5% 5% REMARK ––––––– R7101 R7102 R7104 R7106 R7108 1-216-801-11 1-216-801-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1/10W 1/10W

REF. NO. –––––––

PART NO. ––––––––

DESCRIPTION ––––––––––– < JACK >

J7050

1-819-646-11 PHONO JACK 3P

< RESISTOR > R7050 R7051 R7052 R7053 R7054 R7055 R7056 R7057 R7058 R7059 R7060 R7061 R7062 R7063 R7064 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-813-11 1-216-851-11 1-216-851-11 1-216-813-11 1-216-813-11 1-216-813-11 1-216-813-11 1-216-813-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-813-11 1-216-813-11 1-216-813-11 SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP 0 0 0 220 330K 330K 220 220 220 220 220 0 220 220 220

*************************************************************** 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W IC7120 A-1123-099-A S2 BOARD, COMPLETE *********************

< CAPACITOR > C7120 C7121 C7122 C7123 1-164-156-11 1-165-908-11 1-162-915-11 1-162-915-11 CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 0.1µF 1µF 10pF 10pF 25V 10% 10V 0.50PF 50V 0.50PF 50V

< IC > 6-707-223-01 IC LM75BIM-5/NOPB

< VARISTOR > < RESISTOR > VD7051 1-803-974-21 VARISTOR, CHIP (1608) VD7052 1-803-974-21 VARISTOR, CHIP (1608) VD7053 1-803-974-21 VARISTOR, CHIP (1608) *************************************************************** * A-1073-391-A QU BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** R7121 R7122 R7124 R7125 R7126 1-216-801-11 1-216-801-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP 22 22 0 0 0 5% 5% 1/10W 1/10W

************************************************************** A-1123-096-A T1 BOARD, COMPLETE *********************

< CAPACITOR > C7951 C7952 C7953 C7954 1-115-156-11 1-115-156-11 1-164-156-11 1-164-156-11 CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 1µF 1µF 0.1µF 0.1µF 10V 10V 25V 25V

< SWITCH > S7150 1-786-591-11 SWITCH, MICRO

************************************************************** < CONNECTOR > CN7951* 1-573-768-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (1.5mm) (SMD)5P CN7952* 1-818-486-11 PCMCIA CONNECTOR (SMD) CN7953* 1-818-483-11 FFC/FPC CONNECTOR (ZIF) 80P A-1144-528-A T3 BOARD, COMPLETE **********************

< SWITCH > < TEST POINT > TP7950 1-694-766-21 TERMINAL (ONBOARD CONTACT) S7156 1-786-591-11 SWITCH, MICRO

************************************************************** MISCELLANEOUS ***************** 0 0 0 0 0 A-1127-174-A BLOCK ASSY, OPTICS A-1148-155-A BLOCK ASSY, OPTICS 1-468-936-11 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK 1-576-885-11 THERMOSTAT 1-787-333-11 D.C. FAN (R60XBR1) (R50XBR1)

*************************************************************** A-1123-098-A S1 BOARD, COMPLETE *********************

< CAPACITOR > C7100 C7101 C7102 C7103 1-164-156-11 1-165-908-11 1-162-915-11 1-162-915-11 CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 0.1µF 1µF 10pF 10pF 25V 10% 10V 0.50PF 50V 0.50PF 50V

0 1-791-192-13 1-826-236-11 1-826-237-11 1-829-702-11 1-829-794-51 1-830-193-11 1-830-407-11 1-830-856-11 1-830-878-11

CORD, NOISE FILTER WITH POWER SPEAKER UNIT SPEAKER UNIT COAXIAL CABLE WITH F-PLUG CORD WITH CONNECTOR CABLE, USB RF CABLE FLEXIBLE FLAT CABLE LEAD WIRE WITH CONNECTOR(LVDS)

< IC > IC7100 6-707-223-01 IC LM75BIM-5/NOPB

– 71 –

Les composants identifies par une trame et une marque ! sont critiques pour la securite. Ne les remplacer que par une piece portant le numero specifie.

The components identified by shading and mark ! are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

KDS-R50XBR1/R60XBR1
RM-Y914 RM-Y914

REF. NO.

PART NO.

DESCRIPTION

REMARK

1-830-900-11 LEAD WIRE WITH CONNECTOR(LVDS) 8-597-906-00 ANTENNA SWITCHE RFD-SA801 0 8-835-859-11 MOTOR, DC SFF22A/C-NP 0 8-835-860-11 MOTOR, DC SFF21C/C-NP ************************************************************** ACCESSORIES & PACKING MATERIALS ************************************ * 2-581-446-11 BAG, PROTECTION (R60XBR1) * 2-587-561-01 SHEET, PROTECTION (R60XBR1) 2-637-151-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (US) (R60XBR1) 2-637-152-11 QSG (US) (R60XBR1) 2-637-710-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (US) (R50XBR1) 2-637-710-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FR) (R50XBR1) 2-637-710-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ES) (R50XBR1) 2-637-711-11 QSG (US) (R50XBR1) 2-637-711-21 QSG (FR) (R50XBR1) 2-637-711-31 QSG (ES) (R50XBR1) * 4-030-895-01 JOINT * 4-097-659-01 BAG, PROTECTION * 4-097-660-01 SHEET, PROTECTION (R60XBR1) (R60XBR1) (R60XBR1)

< REMOTE COMMANDER> 1-478-337-11 REMOTE COMMANDER (RM-Y914)

< OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES> 93-0876-00 LAMP XL-5100

9-872-762-01

Sony EMCS Corporation Ichinomiya TEC

English 2005HR02-1 ©2005.8

2-637-151-11(1)

SXRD Projection TV Operating Instructions

KDS-R50XBR1 KDS-R60XBR1
© 2005 Sony Corporation

Owner’s Record
The model and serial numbers are located at the rear of the TV. Record these numbers in the spaces provided below. Refer to them whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding this product.

Model No. Serial No.

Contacting Sony
If, after reading the following instructions, you have additional questions related to the use of your Sony® TV, please call one of the following numbers. Customers in the continental United States contact the Direct Response Center at: 1-800-222-SONY (7669) or visit http://www.sonystyle.com/tv/ Customers in Canada contact the Customer Relations Center at: 1-877-899-SONY (7669) or visit http://www.sonystyle.ca/tv/

2

WARNING
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.

Declaration of Conformity
Trade Name: SONY Model: KDS-R50XBR1/KDS-R60XBR1 Responsible Party: Sony Electronics Inc. Address: 16450 W. Bernardo Dr., San Diego, CA 92127 U.S.A. Telephone Number: 858-942-2230 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION
RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS OUVRIR

PRECAUCION
RIESGO DE CHOQUE ELECTRICO NO ABRIR

NOTIFICATION
This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment.

This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.

CAUTION
To prevent electric shock, do not use this polarized AC plug with an extension cord, receptacle or other outlet unless the blades can be fully inserted to prevent blade exposure.

CAUTION
When using TV games, computers, and similar products with your projection TV, keep the brightness and contrast functions at low settings. If a fixed (non-moving) pattern is left on the screen for long periods of time at a high brightness or contrast setting, the image can be permanently imprinted onto the screen. Continuously watching the same program can cause the imprint of station logos onto the TV screen. These types of imprints are not covered by your warranty because they are the result of misuse.

For Customers in Canada
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Safety
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Operate the TV only on 120 V AC. Use the AC power cord specified by Sony and suitable for the voltage where you use it. The plug is designed, for safety purposes, to fit into the wall outlet only one way. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, contact your dealer. If any liquid or solid object should fall inside the cabinet, unplug the TV immediately and have it checked by qualified service personnel before operating it further. If you will not be using the TV for several days, disconnect the power by pulling the plug itself. Never pull on the cord. For details concerning safety precautions, see “Important Safety Instructions” on page 5.

Note on Caption Vision
This TV provides display of TV closed captioning in accordance with §15.119 of the FCC rules.

For Customers in the United States
If you have any questions about this product, you may call; Sony Customer Information Services Center 1-800-222-7669 or http://www.sony.com/

(Continued)

3

Installing
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ The TV should be installed near an easily accessible power outlet. To prevent internal heat buildup, do not block the ventilation openings. Do not install the TV in a hot or humid place, or in a place subject to excessive dust or mechanical vibration. Use the TV at temperatures between 41°F (5°C) and 95°F (35°C). If the TV is transported directly from a cold to a warm location, or if the room temperature changes suddenly, the picture may be blurred or show poor color due to moisture condensation. In this case, please wait a few hours to let the moisture evaporate before turning on the TV. To obtain the best picture, do not expose the screen to direct illumination or direct sunlight. It is recommended to use spot lighting directed down from the ceiling or to cover the windows that face the screen with opaque drapery. It is desirable to install the TV in a room where the floor and walls are not of a reflective material. See pages 13 and 14 for more information on the installation.

Trademark Information
CableCARD™ is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc. TruSurround, SRS and the symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. TruSurround technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. Licensed by BBE Sound, Inc. under USP4638258, 4482866. "BBE" and BBE symbol are trademarks of BBE Sound, Inc. Macintosh is a trademark licensed to Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S.A and other countries. WEGA, Steady Sound, Digital Reality Creation, CineMotion, BN Smoother, Memory Stick, Memory Stick Duo, Memory Stick PRO, Memory Stick PRO Duo, MagicGate, MID and Twin View are trademarks of Sony Corporation. i.LINK is a trademark of Sony Corporation and used only to designate that a product contains an IEEE 1394 connector. All products with an i.LINK connector may not communicate with each other. PlayStation is a trademark of Sony Computer Entertainment, Inc. This TV is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. This TV incorporates High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI™) technology. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

CAUTION
Use the following Sony appliance(s) only with the following TV STAND. Use with other TV STAND may cause instability and possibly result in injury. SONY APPLIANCE MODEL NO. KDS-R50XBR1 KDS-R60XBR1 SONY TV STAND MODEL NO. SU-GW12 SONY THEATRE STAND SYSTEM MODEL NO. RHT-G2000

To Customers
Sufficient expertise is required for installing the specified product. Be sure to subcontract the installation to Sony dealers or licensed contractors and pay adequate attention to safety during the installation.

For Customers in the United States
This product contains mercury. Disposal of this product may be regulated if sold in the United States. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance (http://www.eiae.org).

Note
This digital television is capable of receiving analog basic, digital basic and digital premium cable television programming by direct connection to a cable system providing such programming. A security card provided by your cable operator is required to view encrypted digital programming. Certain advanced and interactive digital cable services such as video-on-demand, a cable operator’s enhanced program guide and data-enhanced television services may require the use of a set-top box. For more information call your local cable operator. This television also includes a QAM demodulator which should allow you to receive unscrambled digital cable television programming via subscription service to a cable service provider. Availability of digital cable television programming in your area depends on the type of programming and signal provided by your cable service provider.

4

Important Safety Instructions
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. 14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. ❑ Be sure to observe the TV’s “For Safety” section on page 6. 13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.

6)

Clean only with dry cloth.

7)

Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

Antennas
Outdoor Antenna Grounding
If an outdoor antenna is installed, follow the precautions below. An outdoor antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can come in contact with such power lines or circuits.

8)

Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

WHEN INSTALLING AN OUTDOOR ANTENNA SYSTEM, EXTREME CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN TO KEEP FROM CONTACTING SUCH POWER LINES OR CIRCUITS AS CONTACT WITH THEM IS ALMOST INVARIABLY FATAL. Be sure the antenna system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Section 810 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) in USA and Section 54 of the Canadian Electrical Code in Canada provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

9)

Antenna Grounding According to the NEC
Refer to section 54-300 of Canadian Electrical Code for Antenna Grounding.

10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Ground clamp 11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. Electrical service equipment 12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

Antenna lead-in wire

Antenna lead-in wire (NEC Section 810-20) Grounding conductors (NEC section 810-21) Ground clamps Power service grounding electrode system (NEC Art 250 Part H)

NEC: National Electrical Code

(Continued)

5

Cleaning
❑ ❑ Clean the rear cover area of the TV regularly. Dust in the rear cover area may cause a problem with the cooling system of the TV set. Clean the cabinet of the TV with a dry soft cloth. To remove dust from the screen, wipe it gently with a soft cloth. Stubborn stains may be removed with a cloth slightly dampened with solution of mild soap and warm water. Never use strong solvents such as thinner or benzine for cleaning. If the picture becomes dark after using the TV for a long period of time, it may be necessary to clean the inside of the TV. Consult qualified service personnel. Unplug the AC power cord when cleaning this unit. Cleaning this unit with a plugged AC power cord may result in electric shock.

About the TV
Although the TV is made with high-precision technology, black dots may appear or bright points of light (red, blue, or green) may appear constantly on the screen. This is a structural property of the panel and is not a defect.

Installation
❑ If direct sunlight or other strong illumination shines on the screen, part of the screen may appear white due to reflections from behind the screen. This is a structural property of the TV. Do not expose the screen to direct illumination or direct sunlight. The picture quality may be affected by your viewing position. For the best picture quality, install your TV according to “Recommended Viewing Area” on page 15. Leave some space around your TV. Otherwise, adequate air-circulation may be blocked causing overheating and cause fire or damage the unit. For details, see “When Installing Your TV against a Wall” on page 14.

❑ ❑

On Contamination on the Screen Surface
The screen surface has a special coating to reduce reflections. To prevent screen damage, clean the screen as follows: ❑ ❑ Clean the screen with a soft cloth. To remove hard contamination, use a cloth moistened with a solution of mild detergent and water. Do not spray cleaning solution directly onto the TV. It should only be sprayed to moisten the cleaning cloth. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, alkaline cleaner, acid cleaner, scouring powder, chemical cloth, or solvent such as alcohol, benzene or thinner, as these may scratch the screen’s coating. ❑

Projection Lamp
Your TV uses a projection lamp as its light source. It is time to replace the lamp with a new one (not supplied) when: • the lamp replacement indicator on the front panel blinks in red, • screen images become dark, • no image appears on the display after prolonged use. In rare instances, the bulb may pop inside the lamp unit, but the lamp unit is designed to contain all of broken glass pieces inside the lamp unit. (See “Replacing the Lamp” on page 104.) When the lamp eventually burns out, you may hear a noticeable pop sound. This is normal and is inherent in this type of lamp.

Service
Damage Requiring Service
Do not attempt to service the set by yourself since opening the cabinet may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Unplug the set from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel.

Disposal of Used Batteries
To preserve our environment, dispose of used batteries according to your local laws or regulations.

Objects and Liquid Entry
Do not place any objects on the unit. The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.

Replacement Parts
When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician certifies in writing that he has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer that have the same characteristics as the original parts. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards. See “Replacing the Lamp” on page 104.

Cooling Fan
This TV uses a cooling fan. You may hear the noise of fan running, depending on the placement of your TV. The noise may be more noticeable during the night or when the background noise level is low. Also the noise of cooling fan may become louder when High Altitude is set to On.

For Safety
Be Careful When Moving the TV
When you place the TV in position, be careful not to drop it on your foot or fingers. Watch your footing while installing the TV.
STD/DUO

POWER

Carry the TV in the Specified Manner
If you carry the TV in a manner other than the specified manner and without the specified number of persons, it may drop and a serious injury may be caused. Be sure to follow the instructions mentioned below. ❑ ❑ ❑ Carry the TV with the specified number of persons (see page 13). Hold the TV tightly when carrying it. Before carrying the TV, disconnect any accessories or cables.

6

Contents
Introducing the TV
Welcome ................................................................ 9 Package Contents............................................ 9 Features........................................................... 9 Enjoying Your TV................................................ 11 Notes on the TV ............................................. 11 Screen............................................................ 11 Indicators ....................................................... 12 Projection Lamp ............................................. 12 Installing the TV .................................................. 13 Carrying Your TV ........................................... 13 Take Precaution during Installation................ 13 Preventing the TV from Toppling Over .......... 14 When Installing Your TV against a Wall......... 14 Recommended Viewing Area ........................ 15 TV Controls and Connectors ............................. 16 Front Panel .................................................... 16 Front Connectors ........................................... 17 Rear Panel ..................................................... 18 Using Initial Setup ..........................................34 Connecting Optional Equipment .......................35 VCR and Cable ..............................................36 VCR and Cable Box .......................................37 DVD Player with Component Video Connectors...........................................39 DVD Player with S VIDEO and Audio Connectors ....................40 Personal Computer ........................................41 Camcorder or PlayStation ..............................42 Audio Receiver ...............................................43

Watching the TV
Overview ..............................................................45 Inserting Batteries into the Remote Control.....45 Button Descriptions............................................46 Programming the Remote Control ....................48 Using Other Equipment with Your Remote Control...........................................................50 Special Buttons on the Remote Control ...........51 Using the GUIDE Button ................................51 Using the WIDE Button ..................................53 Using the JUMP Button ..................................54 Using the FREEZE Button..............................54 Using Twin View..................................................55 Displaying Twin Pictures ................................55 Activating the Picture......................................55 Changing the Picture Size..............................57 Using Favorite Channels ....................................58 Using the Channel Menu................................58 Using the Favorite Channels Guide ...............59 Using the PC Input ..............................................60 Displaying the PC Screen ..............................60

Connecting the TV
Overview.............................................................. 21 Making Video and Audio Connections ........... 21 About Using S VIDEO.................................... 22 About Using HDMI to DVI Adapter................. 22 Basic Connections ............................................. 23 Cable System or VHF/UHF............................ 24 Cable Box and Antenna ................................. 25 Cable Box ...................................................... 26 Satellite Receiver ........................................... 27 Digital Cable Box or Digital Satellite Receiver ................................ 28 Equipment with HDMI Connection ................. 29 Equipment with DVI Connection .................... 30 Equipment with Digital Audio (Optical)........... 31 Using the CableCARD Device............................ 32 About Using the CableCARD Device............. 32 Activating CableCARD Service...................... 32 Removing the CableCARD Device ................ 33 Setting Up the Channel List............................... 34

Using the Memory Stick Viewer
About Memory Stick ...........................................61 Features .........................................................61 Memory Stick Compatibility ............................61 File Compatibility ............................................62 Inserting and Removing a Memory Stick/ Memory Stick Duo ........................................63

(Continued)

7

Inserting a Memory Stick/ Memory Stick Duo.......................................... 63 Removing a Memory Stick/ Memory Stick Duo.......................................... 63 Viewing Photo or Movie Files ............................ 64 Using the Photo Viewer ................................. 65 Using the Movie Viewer ................................. 66 Using the Menu Bar Options.......................... 67 Memory Stick Precautions ............................. 70 Memory Stick Functionality ............................ 71

Remote Control ............................................108 CableCARD Device......................................109 Memory Stick................................................109 Video ............................................................111 Audio ............................................................111 Channels ......................................................112 General.........................................................113 Specifications ...................................................115

Index
Index...................................................................117

Using i.LINK
Connecting i.LINK Devices ................................ 73 Selecting an i.LINK Device................................. 75 Using the i.LINK Control Panel.......................... 76 i.LINK Setup ........................................................ 78

Using the Settings
Overview.............................................................. 79 Accessing the Video Settings ........................... 81 Selecting Video Options................................. 81 Selecting PC Video Options........................... 85 Accessing the Audio Settings ........................... 86 Selecting Audio Options................................. 86 Selecting PC Audio Options........................... 87 Accessing the Screen Settings ......................... 88 Selecting Screen Options .............................. 88 Accessing the Channel Settings ....................... 90 Selecting Channel Options ............................ 90 Accessing the Parental Lock Settings.............. 92 Selecting Parental Lock Options.................... 92 Viewing Blocked Programs ............................ 93 Selecting Custom Rating Options .................. 94 Accessing the Setup Settings ........................... 96 Selecting Setup Options ................................ 96 Programming Caption Vision ......................... 98 Selecting PC Setup Options .......................... 99 Accessing the Applications Settings.............. 101 Selecting Applications Options .................... 101

Other Information
Overview............................................................ 103 Contacting Sony ............................................... 103 Replacing the Lamp.......................................... 104 How to Replace the Lamp............................ 105 Troubleshooting ............................................... 108 Twin View..................................................... 108

8

Introducing the TV
Welcome
Thank you for purchasing this Sony SXRD projection TV. This manual is for models KDS-R50XBR1 and KDS-R60XBR1.
Introducing the TV

Package Contents

Along with your new TV, the packing box contains a remote control and two AA (R6) batteries. See page 116 for the complete list of packaging contents. Some of the features that you will enjoy with your new TV include:

Features

❑ SXRD: SXRD is a Silicon X-tal Reflective Display technology that ❑
delivers high-level resolution, greater contrast ratio, faster response speed and film-like reproduction compared to other conventional devices. WEGA Engine: Delivers superb picture quality from any video source by minimizing the signal deterioration caused by digital-to-analog conversion and stabilizing the signal processing. This engine features unique Sony technology, including: ● The first step in the digital processing system, Composite Component Processor (CCP-X), which enhances input signal-tonoise ratio by chroma decoder digital processing. ● DRC® (Digital Reality Creation)-MF V2: Unlike conventional line doublers, the DRC Multifunction feature replaces the signal’s NTSC waveform with the near-HD equivalent by digital mapping processing. The DRC Palette option lets you customize the level of detail (Reality) and smoothness (Clarity) to create up to three custom palettes. ● IFP (Image Format Processor): The Digital Texture Enhancer function of this chip provides the optimal contrast by utilizing a wide dynamic range. This chip also reduces signal noise, by using an improved motion vector algorithm, while maintaining image sharpness. Advanced Iris: This advance iris shutter works automatically open and close according to the incoming signal level to create brighter whites and better contrast in dark scenes. Integrated HDTV: You can watch digital television programs and enjoy the improved audio/video quality offered by these programs. CineMotion®: Using the reverse 3-2 pull down technology, the CineMotion feature provides smoother picture movement when playing back movies or other video sources on film. (Continued)

❑ ❑ ❑

9

Introducing the TV

❑ BN Smoother™: Reduces the block noise caused by digital video ❑ ❑ ❑
encoding and decoding process. S-master Full Digital Amplifier: Delivers superb clear dialog and reproduces the original sound quality while minimizing any sound fragmentation or jitter noise. Wide Screen Mode: Allows you to watch 4:3 normal broadcasts in wide screen mode (16:9 aspect ratio). Twin View®: Twin View allows you to watch two programs side by side with the ability to zoom in on one picture and listen to the program in the selected window. You can watch pictures from two different sources (480i) simultaneously. Memory Stick Viewer: Allows you to view digital photos (JPEG) and movies (MPEG1) from Memory Stick media on your TV screen. Favorite Channels: Allows you to select from 16 of your favorite channels without leaving the current channel. CableCARD™ slot: Provides cable subscribers with access to digitally encrypted cable channels — without the need for a set-top box — that will enable you to receive not only standard definition but also high definition television. The CableCARD device, which is provided by your cable TV company, is inserted into the TV’s rear panel CableCARD slot. After the service is activated with your cable TV company, the card replaces the need for a separate set-top box. (Check with your cable TV company about CableCARD service details, limitations, pricing, and availability. For more information about the CableCARD device in this manual, see page 32.) PC input: Allows you to connect your PC and display the PC screen on your TV. HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface): Provides an uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface between this TV and any HDMI-equipped audio/video component, such as a set-top box, DVD player, and A/V receiver. HDMI supports enhanced, or highdefinition video, plus two-channel digital audio. i.LINK: Provides a secure digital interface to other digital home entertainment devices. i.LINK allows for the secure transfer of copyright-protected high-definition content between these devices and your TV.

❑ ❑ ❑

❑ ❑

10

Introducing the TV

Enjoying Your TV
To enjoy your TV for years to come and maintain its original picture quality, you should perform periodic maintenance.

Notes on the TV

To enjoy clear picture ❑ ❑

Introducing the TV

Prevent sunlight or other light sources from shining directly on to the screen. The screen surface is easily scratched. Do not rub, touch, or tap it with sharp or abrasive objects (see “On Contamination on the Screen Surface” on pages 6).

When not using the TV for a long period of time ❑

Unplug the AC power cord from the outlet if you anticipate not using the TV for more than a week.

When turning off the power ❑

The cooling fan will continue to operate for about two minutes. Allow several minutes before unplugging from the outlet or switching the breaker off.

On moisture condensation ❑

If your TV is moved directly from a cold to a warm location or is placed in a humid room, or if the room temperature changes suddenly, the picture may blur or show poor color. This is caused by moisture condensation on the lenses inside. Wait a few hours to let the moisture evaporate before turning on the TV. When the condensation has evaporated, the picture will return to normal.

Screen

To minimize reflection, the screen surface has a special coating. Inappropriate cleaning methods could damage the screen surface. Special care is required.
Cleaning the Screen Surface

Dust and dirt on the screen can affect the picture quality. To dust off the screen use a soft cloth. Be sure to follow the cleaning instruction on page 6 for stubborn stains and dirt.

11

Introducing the TV

Indicators
Screen

POWER/STANDBY
STD/DUO

LAMP

TIMER

POWER

Indicators

The indicators show the current status of your TV. If there is a change in the condition or a problem with the TV, the indicators will flash or light up in the manner described below to let you know that it requires your attention.
Indicator POWER/ STANDBY flashing Green Red Flashing because... The lamp for the light source is preparing to turn on. When it is ready, it turns on.

LAMP indicator flashes TIMER indicator is lit

The lamp door or the lamp is not securely attached. The red indicator will continue to flash in intervals of three blinks at a time until the lamp door or the lamp is placed correctly. The red indicator is on when i.LINK STANDBY is on or when your TV is in the PC power saving mode. The projection lamp has burned out. Replace it with new one (see page 104). When one of the timers is set the indicator will remain lit (will not flash) even when the TV is turned off.

Projection Lamp
How to replace the lamp, see page 104.

Your TV uses a projection lamp as its light source. As with any lamp, it has limited life and needs to be replaced when the Lamp indicator flashes or the screen becomes darker. Note the following: ❑ After turning on your TV, it may take a while (1 minute or less) before the picture appears.

When the projection lamp wears out, the screen goes dark. Replace the lamp with a new Sony XL-5100 replacement lamp (not supplied).
The light emitted from the lamp is quite bright when your TV is in use. To avoid eye discomfort or injury, do not look into the light housing when the power is on.

12

Introducing the TV

Installing the TV
Carrying Your TV
Carrying the TV requires at least two people. Do not hold the TV by the pedestal or the front panel. Doing so may cause these parts to break off.
Introducing the TV

Do not grasp the pedestal or the front panel of the TV.

When moving the TV, place one hand in the hole on the lower portion of the TV while grasping the top with the other hand, as shown in the illustration below.

Do not carry the TV by grasping only the front panels.

If you have connected cables and cords, be sure to unplug them before moving the TV.

Take Precaution during Installation

To ensure the safety of children and the TV, keep children away from the TV during installation. Climbing on or pushing the TV or its stand may cause it to fall and damage the TV.

13

Introducing the TV

Preventing the TV from Toppling Over

As a protective measure, secure the TV as follows.
Using the TV stand with support belts ❑ Sony strongly recommends using the SU-GW12 TV stand with a

support belt designed for your TV.

*

*You need to stretch the belt diagonally to attach it to the TV.

When using the SU-GW12 stand for your TV, you must use the support belt.

When Installing Your TV against a Wall

Keep your TV at least 4 inches (10 cm) away from the wall to provide proper ventilation. Blocking the ventilation opening of the cooling fan may cause a damage on the TV. Allow this much space;

11 7/8 inches (30 cm)

4 inches (10 cm)

4 inches (10 cm)

4 inches (10 cm)

POWER/STANDBY
STD/DUO

LAMP

TIMER

POWER

14

Introducing the TV

Recommended Viewing Area

Your viewing position may affect the picture quality. For the best picture quality, install your TV within the areas shown below.
Model Viewing distance

Introducing the TV

KDS-R50XBR1 KDS-R60XBR1
Horizontal Viewing Area
ft. KD (appr .min 9 ft S-R 560 ox. 2. ..6(6 0"X . af 0m 2 B p.pa t ( ) rppxo R1 SDR o r KS-R 600 .x1.80 . 2. 5X XB BR1 m)) R1 m 65 65˚ ˚ min . 6.6 70

min. 6.6 ft. (approx. 2.0 m) min. 7.0 ft. (approx. 2.2 m)
Vertical Viewing Area
min . 7.0

POWER

min KDS-R6 pprox. 2. 2m mi6 . n..8 0X ) 6.6t f f.t.((a BR1 app KDS p poo rr x .x . -R5 2 2 0XB .0 m) .1 m R1 )

ft. (a

65˚ 65.

POWER

30˚ 30˚

15

Introducing the TV

TV Controls and Connectors
Front Panel

6
CHANNEL

3 #
VOLUME

7 8 9

3
POWER/STANDBY
STD/DUO

LAMP

TIMER

POWER

#
TV/VIDEO

POWER/STANDBY TIMER LAMP

POWER

MENU

0

1
Item Description

2 34 5

1 POWER/ STANDBY LED

2 TIMER LED 3 LAMP LED 4 (IR) Infrared Receiver 5 POWER 6 Speaker 7 CHANNEL +/– 8 VOLUME +/– 9 TV/VIDEO q; MENU

Lights up in green when the TV is turned on. If the LED blinks in red continuously, this may indicate the display unit needs servicing (see “Contacting Sony” on page 2). When the red LED blinks only three times, the lamp door of the lamp unit or the lamp itself is not securely attached (see page 106). The red indicator is on when i.LINK STANDBY is on or when your TV is in the PC power saving mode. When lit, indicates one of the timers is set. When it is set, this LED will remain lit even if the TV is turned off. For details, see page 101. Lights up in red when the lamp for the light source has burned out. For details, see “Replacing the Lamp” on page 104. Receives IR signals from the remote control. Do not put anything near the sensor, as its function may be affected. Press to turn on and off the TV. Outputs audio signal. Press to scan through channels. To scan quickly through channels, press and hold either – or +. Press to adjust the volume. Press to confirm the selection or setting. Press repeatedly to cycle through the video equipment connected to the TV’s video inputs. Press to display the TV on-screen setting and activate the , B, b, v, and V buttons. Press again to exit the TV on-screen setting and activate the TV/VIDEO, VOLUME +/– and CHANNEL +/– buttons.

The CHANNEL + button has a tactile dot. Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating the TV.

16

Introducing the TV

Front Connectors

Introducing the TV

POWER/STANDBY
STD/DUO

LAMP

TIMER

POWER

i.LINK STD/DUO

S400

VIDEO 2 INPUT

(DV/HDV/MICROMV/TS)

S VIDEO

VIDEO L(MONO) - AUDIO - R

1

2

3

4

5

Push up to open the front panel using the small lip on the panel.

Front panel connectors are under the front panel cover

Item

Description

1 Memory Stick indicator 2 Memory Stick slot 3 i.LINK

4 S VIDEO

5 VIDEO/ L(MONO)-AUDIO-R

When lit, indicates that the Memory Stick is being read. (Do not remove the Memory Stick when the indicator is lit.) For inserting Memory Stick media to view on your TV. For details, See “Inserting and Removing a Memory Stick/Memory Stick Duo” on page 63. Connects to the i.LINK jack on your i.LINK-compatible portable device. Provides a secure digital connection between your TV and i.LINK-compatible portable device, such as a digital video camcorder. Connects to the S VIDEO OUT jack of your VCR, camcorder, or other S VIDEOequipped video component. Provides better picture quality than the VHF/UHF jacks or the VIDEO IN jack. Connects to the audio and video OUT jacks on your VCR or other video component.

17

Introducing the TV

Rear Panel

1

2

CABLE VHF/UHF DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) OUT PCM/DOLBY DIGITAL

qs qa

S400 i.LINK (DV/HDV/MICROMV/TV)

3

VIDEO IN

HD/DVD IN
(1080i/720p/480p/480i)

CONTROL S IN OUT

PC IN 8 AUDIO RGB

1

3

4

5

5
IN

6
AUDIO OUT (VAR/FIX)

0

6

7

7 4
AUDIO IN

9 8

Jack

Description

1 CABLE

Connects to your cable signal. This CABLE input jack, in conjunction with the VHF/UHF input jack, lets you set up your TV to switch between scrambled channels (coming through a cable box) and unscrambled cable channels. For details, see page 25.

2 VHF/UHF 3 CableCARD slot

4 5

6

7

Connects to your VHF/UHF antenna or cable box output jack. CableCARD provides cable subscribers with access to secure, digitally encrypted cable channels — without the need for a set-top box — that will enable you to receive not only standard definition but also high definition television. For details, see page 32. VIDEO 8 (PC) IN Connect to the video output connector and audio output jack on your personal computer. For details, see page 41. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) provides an uncompressed, all-digital (VIDEO 6 IN and audio/video interface between this TV and any HDMI-equipped audio/video component, VIDEO 7 IN) such as a set-top box, DVD player, and A/V receiver. HDMI supports enhanced, or highdefinition video, plus two-channel digital audio. You can also connect a DVI-equipped device to your TV by using an HDMI-to-DVI cable. S VIDEO Connects to the S VIDEO OUT jack of your VCR, camcorder, or other S VIDEOequipped video component. Provides better picture quality than the VHF/UHF jacks or the VIDEO IN jack. VIDEO/ Connects to the audio and video OUT jacks on your VCR or other video component. A L(MONO)-AUDIO-R third video input (VIDEO 2) is located on the front panel of the TV.

18

Introducing the TV
Jack Description

8 HD/DVD IN (1080i/ 720p/480p/480i) 9 AUDIO OUT (VAR/FIX) L/R 0 CONTROL S IN/OUT

Connects to your DVD player or digital set-top box’s component video (YPBPR) and audio (L/R) jacks. Connects to the left and right audio inputs of your audio or video component.

AUDIO OUT jacks are operable only when the TV’s Speaker is set to Off. For details, see page 87.

Introducing the TV

To control other Sony equipment with the TV's remote control, connect the CONTROL S IN jack of the equipment to the CONTROL S OUT jack on the TV with the CONTROL S cable. To control the TV with the remote control of another Sony product, connect the CONTROL S OUT jack of the equipment to the CONTROL S IN jack on the TV with the CONTROL S cable. Connects to the i.LINK jack on your i.LINK device. Provides a secure digital connection between your TV and i.LINK device, such as digital VCRs and digital set-top boxes. Connects to the optical audio input of a digital audio component that is PCM/Dolby digital compatible.

qa i.LINK qs DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) OUT (PCM/DOLBY* DIGITAL)

* Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

19

Connecting the TV
Overview
Your new SXRD projection TV can receive both analog and digital broadcasting signals from antenna, satellite and cable TV. To display clear crisp pictures, you must connect your TV correctly and choose the correct display format (see “Using the WIDE Button” on page 53). It is strongly recommended to connect the antenna using a 75-ohm coaxial cable to receive optimum picture quality signal. A 300-ohm twin lead cable can be easily affected by radio noise and the like, resulting in signal deterioration. If you use a 300-ohm twin lead cable, keep it as far away as possible from the TV.
Connecting the TV

Making Video and Audio Connections

To get the most out of your TV, the input signals to the TV (and connected devices) should use the connections that provide the best video and audio performance. The chart below shows typical connectors that are currently available on the latest A/V devices.
Connector type Separate audio connection required

Best Video Performance

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) DVI (Digital Visual Interface) * Component video (480i/480p/720p/1080i) S VIDEO Composite video RF/Coaxial

No

Yes
L-AUDIO-R

Y

PB

PR

No

* An adapter is necessary when you are connecting a DVI-equipped device to this TV (see page 22).

21

Connecting the TV

About Using S VIDEO

If the optional equipment you are connecting has an S VIDEO jack (shown at left), you can use an S VIDEO cable for improved picture quality (compared to an A/V cable). Because S VIDEO carries only the video signal, you also need to connect audio cables for sound, as shown below.
Example of an S VIDEO Connection
Rear of TV

S VIDEO cable

Equipment with S VIDEO

Cables are often color-coded to connectors. Connect red to red, white to white, etc.

Audio cable

About Using HDMI to DVI Adapter

If you are connecting equipment with a DVI connector to this TV, you will need to use an adapter. You can use an HDMI-to-DVI cable or an HDMI adapter (not supplied). Both are available at your local electronics store. When you use the adapter, you will also need to use separate audio cables for sound because the DVI connector carries video signals only.

HDMI-to-DVI cable

HDMI adapter

Audio cable

22

Connecting the TV

Basic Connections
The way in which you connect your TV will vary, depending on how your home receives a signal (antenna and satellite; cable and cable box) and whether or not you plan to connect a VCR.
If You Are Connecting
Cable System or VHF/UHF

See Page 24 Connecting the TV 25

❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

No cable box or VCR Cable box unscrambles only some channels (usually premium channels) No VCR
26

Cable Box and Antenna

Cable Box

Cable box unscrambles all channels No VCR
27

Satellite Receiver

Digital Cable Box or Digital Satellite Receiver 28 Equipment with HDMI Connection 29 Equipment with DVI Connection Equipment with Digital Audio (Optical)

30 31

If you are connecting a VCR ❑

See the connections described on pages 36 and 37.

23

Connecting the TV

Cable System or VHF/UHF

For best results, use this connection if you: ❑

Have a cable and/or an antenna. (This is convenient if you are using a separate rooftop antenna to receive additional channels that are not provided by your cable TV company.) Do not have a cable box or VCR. (If you have a cable box, see pages 25 and 26. If you have a VCR, see pages 36 and 37.)

Antenna System
Cable Type Connect As Shown

Cable TV (CATV) and Antenna
Antenna cable CATV cable

Notes on Using This Connection To Do This... Do This ... Switch the TV’s input between Press ANT to switch back and forth between the the cable and antenna TV’s VHF/UHF and CABLE inputs.

Do not use an indoor antenna, which is especially susceptible to radio noise.

24

Connecting the TV

Cable Box and Antenna
Before connecting a cable box, see “Using the CableCARD Device” on page 32.

For best results, use this connection if: ❑

Your cable company scrambles some channels, such as premium channels (which requires you to use a cable box), but does not scramble all channels. You do not have a VCR. (If you have a VCR, see pages 36 and 37.)
Connecting the TV

With this connection you can: ❑

Use the TV’s remote control to change channels coming through the cable box to the TV’s CABLE input. (You must first program the remote control for your specific cable box; see “Programming the Remote Control” on page 48.) Use the TV’s remote control to change channels coming directly into the TV’s VHF/UHF input jack.
CATV cable
IN OUT

Cable box Coaxial cable Antenna cable
VHF/UHF CABLE

Rear of TV

Notes on Using This Connection To Do This ... Use the cable box Do This ... Tune the TV to the channel the cable box is set to (usually channel 3 or 4) and then use the cable box to switch channels.

Set up the TV remote control to operate the cable Program the remote control. See “Programming the Remote box Control” on page 48. Activate the remote control to operate the cable box Press SAT/CABLE (FUNCTION) once, and the SAT/CABLE indicator lights up.

Prevent the accidental switching of TV channels Use the Channel Fix setting to set the channels for the cable box. See “Accessing the Channel Settings” on page 90. Switch the TV’s input between the cable box and Press ANT to switch back and forth between the TV’s VHF/UHF antenna (antenna) and CABLE inputs.

25

Connecting the TV

Cable Box
Before connecting a cable box, see “Using the CableCARD Device” on page 32.

For best results, use this connection if: ❑ ❑

Your cable company scrambles all channels, which requires you to use a cable box. You do not have a VCR. (If you have a VCR, see pages 36 and 37.)

With this connection you can: ❑

Use the TV’s remote control to change channels coming through the cable box to the TV’s VHF/UHF input jack. (You must first program the remote control for your specific cable box.)

To connect the cable box

1 2 3

Connect the CATV cable to the cable box’s input jack. Use a coaxial cable to connect the cable box’s output jack to the TV’s VHF/UHF input jack. Run Auto Program, as described in “Setting Up the Channel List” on page 34.
CATV cable Coaxial cable
VHF/UHF

Rear of TV

IN Cable box

OUT

Notes on Using This Connection To do this... Use the cable box Do This ... Tune the TV to the channel the cable box is set to (usually channel 3 or 4) and then use the cable box to switch channels.

Set up the TV remote control to operate the cable Program the remote control. See “Programming the Remote box Control” on page 48. Activate the remote control to operate the cable box Press SAT/CABLE (FUNCTION) once, and the SAT/CABLE indicator lights up.

Prevent the accidental switching of TV channels Use the Channel Fix setting to set the channels for the cable box. See “Accessing the Channel Settings” on page 90.

26

Connecting the TV

Satellite Receiver

Disconnect all power sources before making any connections.

1 2 3

Rear of TV

Connect the satellite antenna cable to the satellite receiver’s SATELLITE IN jack. Use A/V and S VIDEO cables to connect the satellite receiver’s AUDIO and S VIDEO OUT jacks to the TV’s AUDIO and S VIDEO IN jacks. Use a coaxial cable to connect your cable to the TV’s CABLE jack, or your antenna to the TV’s VHF/UHF jack.
If your satellite receiver is not equipped with S VIDEO, use a VIDEO cable (yellow) instead of the S VIDEO cable. Connecting the TV

CABLE VHF/UHF

S VIDEO Coaxial cable

VIDEO AUDIO-L AUDIO-R

Satellite receiver

Satellite antenna cable A/V cable
Cables are often color-coded to connectors. Connect red to red, white to white, etc.

S VIDEO cable

27

Connecting the TV

Digital Cable Box or Digital Satellite Receiver

Disconnect all power sources before making any connections.

1 2

Connect the RF coaxial cable from the CATV or satellite dish to the input of the digital cable box or digital satellite receiver. Use a component video cable to connect the digital cable box or satellite receiver’s YPBPR jacks to the TV’s YPBPR jacks. Use the HD/DVD IN 4 or 5 input.
Component video (YPBPR) connection is necessary to view 480p, 720p, and 1080i formats. Note that this TV displays all format types of picture in a resolution of 1920 dots x 1080 lines.

3

Use an audio cable to connect the digital cable box or satellite receiver’s AUDIO OUT jacks to the TV’s AUDIO IN jacks.
The YPBPR jacks do not provide audio, so audio cables must be connected to provide sound.

Digital cable box or satellite receiver

OUT IN Rear of TV Component video cable
Cables are often color-coded to connectors. Connect red to red, white to white, etc.

Y PB PR

RF coaxial cable Audio cable AUDIO-L AUDIO-R

28

Connecting the TV

Equipment with HDMI Connection
z The HDMI jack provides both video and audio signals, so it is not necessary to connect an audio cable.

Use this hookup if: ❑ Your equipment has a High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI).
Disconnect all power sources before making any connections.

Using an HDMI cable, connect the equipment’s HDMI OUT jack to the TV’s HDMI IN jack.
Connecting the TV
Rear of TV
IN

Equipment with HDMI output

HDMI cable

29

Connecting the TV

Equipment with DVI Connection

Disconnect all power sources before making any connections.

If you are connecting with DVI-HDTV output, you can connect to the TV’s HDMI IN jack by using an HDMI-to-DVI cable or an adapter (both not supplied).
Rear of TV
IN

Cables are often color-coded to connectors. Connect red to red, white to white, etc.

Equipment with DVI output

AUDIO-R AUDIO-L

HDMI-to-DVI cable or adapter

Audio cable

When using a HDMI-to-DVI cable or an adapter, be sure to connect the DVI output connector first; then connect to the HDMI input on your TV.

30

Connecting the TV

Equipment with Digital Audio (Optical)

Disconnect all power sources before making any connections.

You can use the TV’s DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) OUT jack to connect a digital audio device that is PCM/Dolby Digital compatible, such as an audio amplifier. Using an optical audio cable, connect the device’s OPTICAL IN jack to the TV’s DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) OUT jack.
Rear of TV

Connecting the TV

DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) OUT PCM/DOLBY DIGITAL

Optical audio cable The DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) OUT jack is available when the TV receives a digital TV channel.

Audio amplifier
LINE OUT
L AUDIO R

LINE IN

OPTICAL IN

You should also connect the TV’s analog audio output jacks to the amplifier's analog audio input jacks so that the amplifier can output audio for analog channels. For details, see page 43.

31

Connecting the TV

Using the CableCARD Device
The CableCARD device provides cable subscribers with access to digitally encrypted cable channels — without the need for a set-top box — that will enable you to receive not only standard definition but also high definition television. The CableCARD device, which is provided by your cable TV company, is inserted into the TV’s rear panel CableCARD slot. After the service is activated with your cable TV company, the card replaces the need for a separate set-top box.

About Using the CableCARD Device

If you are planning to use a separate cable box for digital cable TV services, you may be able to receive programming using this TV with the CableCARD device instead — except in the following circumstances: ❑ Your cable TV company does not provide CableCARD service in your viewing area. ❑ You want to access your cable TV company’s interactive or advanced features (such as video-on-demand or, in some cases, pay-per-view). At this time, these services require a bidirectional link, which are only available through the use of a separate set-top box. CableCARD device is currently a unidirectional device only, and cannot provide these advanced services. Check with your cable TV company for CableCARD service details, limitations, pricing, and availability, all of which are determined by your cable TV company — not Sony. Before you can use CableCARD service, you need to insert the CableCARD device (supplied by your cable TV company) and activate the service, as described below:

Activating CableCARD Service

1

Insert the CableCARD device into the CableCARD slot.


z You can also access information about your CableCARD device in the Applications settings (see page 102).

CAUTION: When inserting the CableCARD device, the rear side of the card should be on your left side. Inserting the CableCARD incorrectly may result in permanent damage to the card and the TV.

2 3

Gently push the card into the slot until it locks into place. After 1-2 minutes, the CableCARD device setup screen is automatically displayed. This screen includes information your cable TV company will request before they can activate your service.

32

Connecting the TV

4 5

Follow the displayed instructions: Phone your cable TV company. A representative will guide you through the activation process. After your CableCARD device is activated, your cable TV company will download the service information, including the channel list, to the the CableCARD device. After the CableCARD device has acquired channels from your cable TV company, the TV tunes to the lowest available channel.
Connecting the TV

Removing the CableCARD Device

In the event you want to cancel your service, contact your cable TV company.

Once the CableCARD device is removed, your TV will no longer decrypt digital cable TV programming services that require CableCARD.

1

Push the eject button on the CableCARD slot to release the card.
Eject button

2

Pull the CableCARD device straight out of the slot to remove it. To install a different CableCARD device, follow the instructions in “Activating CableCARD Service” on page 32.

33

Connecting the TV

Setting Up the Channel List
After you finish connecting the TV, you can run the Initial Setup to create a list of available analog and digital channels. The Initial Setup screen appears when you turn on the TV for the first time after hooking it up. If you choose to set up the channels at a later time, select the Auto Program option in the Channel setting to scan available channels (see below).

The Intitial Setup feature does not apply for installations that use a cable box for all channel selection.

Using Initial Setup

To run Initial Setup the first time you turn on your TV

1 2

Press to turn on the TV. The Initial Setup screen appears.

Press V or v to highlight the onscreen display language. Then press . The message “First please connect cable/antenna.” appears. This may require 50+ minutes for completion and “Start auto program now?” appears. 3 Press V or v to highlight “Yes” then press . Auto Program performed through Initial Setup will automatically create a list of receivable channels from both VHF/UHF antenna and cable TV channels if both sources are connected.

Auto Program may take a while (20 to 50 minutes) to complete. A progress bar is displayed while available channels are being scanned. If you cancel the Auto Program before all receivable channels are scanned, you may want to perform the task later (see “To run Auto Program again at a later time” below). If you selected “No” during the Initial Setup, the Initial Setup message will appear each time you turn on the TV as a reminder until you complete the Auto Program.

To run Auto Program again at a later time ❑

Use the Auto Program feature as described on page 90.

To add individual digital channels ❑

Use the Digital Channels feature as described on page 90.

34

Connecting the TV

Connecting Optional Equipment
You can connect a variety of optional equipment to your TV. This section provides some of the individual connections you can make. For multiple connections, refer to the separate Quick Setup Guide.
If You Are Connecting See Page

VCR and Cable VCR and Cable Box DVD Player with Component Video Connectors DVD Player with S VIDEO and Audio Connectors Personal Computer Camcorder or PlayStation Audio Receiver

36 37 39 40 41 42 43 Connecting the TV

35

Connecting the TV

VCR and Cable

Use this hookup if: ❑ You have cable TV that does not require a cable box.
Disconnect all power sources before making any connections.

1 2 3 4

Rear of TV

Connect the CATV cable to the single (input) jack of the splitter. Use a coaxial cable to connect one of the output jack of the splitter to the TV’s CABLE jack. Use a coaxial cable to connect the splitter’s other output jack to the VCR’s input jack. Use A/V and S VIDEO cables to connect the VCR’s AUDIO and S VIDEO OUT jacks to the TV’s AUDIO and S VIDEO IN jacks.
If your VCR is not equipped with S VIDEO, use a VIDEO cable (yellow) instead of the S VIDEO cable.

CABLE VHF/UHF

Coaxial cable S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO-L AUDIO-R CATV cable Splitter

VCR

A/V cable
Cables are often color-coded to connectors. Connect red to red, white to white, etc.

S VIDEO cable Coaxial cable

36

Connecting the TV

VCR and Cable Box
Before connecting a cable box, see “Using the CableCARD Device” on page 32.

Use this hookup if: ❑ Your cable TV company scrambles some channels, but not all of them (pay channels vs. regular cable channels) and you need to use a cable box.

With this connection you can: Use the TV’s remote control to change channels on your cable box when the signal is scrambled. To program your Sony remote control to operate your cable box, see “Programming the Remote Control” on page 48. Use the TV’s remote control to change channels on your TV when the signal is not scrambled. Your TV’s tuner provides a better picture quality than the output of your cable box.

Connecting the TV

Disconnect all power sources before making any connections.

1 2 3 4 5 6

Connect the CATV cable to the single (input) jack of the splitter. Use a coaxial cable to connect one of the output jack of the splitter to the TV’s CABLE jack. Use a coaxial cable to connect the splitter’s other output jack to the cable box’s input jack. Use a coaxial cable to connect the cable box’s output jack to the VCR’s RF input jack. Use an A/V cable to connect the cable box’s A/V output jacks to the TV’s A/V input jacks. Use an A/V and S VIDEO cables to connect the VCR’s AUDIO and S VIDEO OUT jacks to the TV’s AUDIO and S VIDEO IN jacks.
If your VCR is not equipped with S VIDEO, use a VIDEO cable (yellow) instead of the S VIDEO cable.

7

Run Initial Setup, as described in “Setting Up the Channel List” on page 34.
To view scrambled channels, tune the TV to the channel the cable box is set to (usually channel 3 or 4) and then use the cable box to switch channels.

(Continued)

37

Connecting the TV

Rear of TV

CABLE VHF/UHF

S VIDEO cable Coaxial cable

VIDEO AUDIO-L AUDIO-R CATV cable

VIDEO AUDIO-L AUDIO-R

VCR

6
A/V cable Splitter Cable box Coaxial cable

A/V cable

Coaxial cable
Cables are often color-coded to connectors. Connect red to red, white to white, etc. If you are connecting a digital cable box, you will need a special bidirectional splitter designed to work with your cable box.

38

Connecting the TV

DVD Player with Component Video Connectors

Use this hookup if: ❑ Your DVD player has component (YPBPR) jacks.
Disconnect all power sources before making any connections.

1

Use a component video cable to connect the DVD player’s YPBPR jacks to the TV’s YPBPR jacks. Use the HD/DVD IN 4 or 5 input.
Connecting the TV The YPBPR jacks on your DVD player are sometimes labeled YCBCR, or Y, B-Y and R-Y. If so, connect the cables to like colors.

2

Use an audio cable to connect the DVD player’s AUDIO OUT jacks to the TV’s AUDIO IN jacks. Be sure to use the same row of inputs that you used for the video connection (HD/DVD IN 4 or 5).

Component video cable Y PB PR

DVD player

Rear of TV

Cables are often color-coded to connectors. Connect red to red, white to white, etc.

AUDIO-R AUDIO-L

Audio cable

To take advantage of the Wide Mode feature, set the DVD player’s aspect ratio to 16:9. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with your DVD player.

39

Connecting the TV

DVD Player with S VIDEO and Audio Connectors

Use this hookup if: ❑ Your DVD player does not have component (YPBPR) jacks.
Disconnect all power sources before making any connections.

1 2

Use an A/V cable to connect the DVD player’s AUDIO OUT jacks to the TV’s AUDIO IN jacks. Use an S VIDEO cable to connect the DVD player’s S VIDEO jack to the TV’s S VIDEO jack.
Rear of TV

S VIDEO S VIDEO cable

DVD player

AUDIO-R AUDIO-L

VIDEO

Cables are often color-coded to connectors. Connect red to red, white to white, etc.

A/V cable

✍ ✍

If your DVD player is not equipped with S VIDEO, use a VIDEO cable (yellow) instead of the S VIDEO cable. To watch the DVD, press TV/VIDEO repeatedly to select the DVD input (VIDEO 1 in the illustration). If you have a non-Sony DVD player and want to set up the TV remote control to operate it, you must program the remote control. See “Programming the Remote Control” on page 48. To control DVD functions with the TV remote control, See “Operating a DVD Player” on page 50. To easily identify equipment connected to the TV, see “Label Video Inputs” on page 96.

✍ ✍

40

Connecting the TV

Personal Computer

To connect a PC (personal computer)

If you connect your PC to the TV, you can watch your personal computer’s display on the TV.
z When connecting to an Apple Macintosh computer, use the HD15-HD15 cable to connect PC IN of the TV to the video output connector of the computer. For some Apple Macintosh computers, it may be necessary to use an adapter (not supplied). If this is the case, connect the adapter to the computer before connecting the HD15HD15 cable. z If the picture is noisy or flickering, adjust the Phase and Pitch in the Screen settings on page 99.

When your PC is connected to the TV with the HD15-HD15 cable and optional audio cable, you can view and listen to the PC’s video and audio output on the TV.
Rear of TV

Connecting the TV

HD15-HD15 cable (analog RGB)

Audio cable (stereo mini plugs)

To audio output jack

To monitor port (15-pin D-Sub)

PC IN 8 AUDIO RGB

41

Connecting the TV

Camcorder or PlayStation

Disconnect all power sources before making any connections.

For easy connection to a camcorder or PlayStation, the TV has front audio and video inputs (shown below). Use A/V and S VIDEO cables to connect the camcorder or PlayStation AUDIO and S VIDEO OUT jacks to the TV’s AUDIO and S VIDEO IN jacks.

If your camcorder is not equipped with S VIDEO, use a VIDEO cable (yellow) instead of the S VIDEO cable.

Front Panel
VIDEO 2 INPUT

PlayStation

Camcorder
S VIDEO VIDEO L(MONO) - AUDIO - R

or S VIDEO AUDIO-R AUDIO-L VIDEO

To S VIDEO jack

To A/V output jacks

S VIDEO cable

A/V cable

42

Connecting the TV

Audio Receiver

For improved sound quality, you may want to play the TV’s audio through your stereo system (see page 87).
Disconnect all power sources before making any connections.

Using an audio cable, connect the TV’s AUDIO OUT (VAR/FIX) jacks to the audio receiver’s audio LINE IN jacks.

Connecting the TV

AUDIO OUT jacks are operable only when the TV's Speaker is set to Off.

Rear of TV
AUDIO OUT (VAR/FIX)

AUDIO-L

AUDIO-R

Audio cable

Line input
Cables are often color-coded to connectors. Connect red to red, white to white, etc.

Audio receiver

43

Watching the TV
Overview
This chapter includes the following topics:
Topic Page

Inserting Batteries into the Remote Control Button Descriptions Programming the Remote Control Manufacturer’s Codes Using Other Equipment with Your Remote Control Special Buttons on the Remote Control

45 46 48 49 50 51 Watching the TV

Inserting Batteries into the Remote Control
Insert two size AA (R6) batteries (supplied) by matching the e and E on the batteries to the diagram inside the battery compartment.

e E e E

Use a coin to unscrew the lock

✍ ✍ ✍

To avoid possible damage from battery leakage, remove the batteries if you anticipate the remote control will not be used for an extended period. Handle the remote control with care. Avoid dropping it, getting it wet, or placing it in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in high humidity. Your remote control can be programmed to operate most video equipment. (See “Programming the Remote Control” on page 48)

45

Watching the TV

Button Descriptions
Button 1 MUTING 2 FUNCTION Description Press to mute the sound. Press again or press VOL + to unmute. Press repeatedly until the indicator of the equipment (TV, SAT/CABLE, DVD/VCR, i.LINK) that you want to operate lights up. Press repeatedly to cycle through the available audio effect modes: Dolby Virtual, TruSurround, Simulated, Off. For details, see “Selecting Audio Options” on page 86. Press repeatedly until the TV displays the time in minutes (15, 30, 45, 60 or 90) that you want the TV to remain on before shutting off. To cancel Sleep Timer, press SLEEP repeatedly until Off appears. Press to display the digital TV program guide.

3

4 SLEEP

5 GUIDE

While FUNCTION is switched to SAT/CABLE, press to display the program guide of your satellite program provider. 6 Use with 0-9 and ENTER buttons to select digital channels (for example, 2.1). For details on selecting digital channels, see page 90. 7 PICTURE Press repeatedly to cycle through the available video picture modes: Vivid, Standard, Pro. The video picture modes can be also accessed in the Video setting. For details, see “Selecting Video Options” on page 81. 8 WIDE Press repeatedly to cycle through the wide screen mode setting: Wide Zoom, Normal, Full and Zoom. For details, see “Using the WIDE Button” on page 53. 9 V/v/B/b When the setting is displayed, move the on-screen cursor. X/x/m/M X: Pause x: Stop m: Fast-Reverse M: Fast-Forward q; H: Play z The 5 button and CH+ button have a tactile dot. Use the tactile as a reference when operating the remote control. qa (Twin View) qs ANT INDEX qd VOL +/– : When the setting is displayed, select the item. Press to turn on/off Twin View. For details, see “Using Twin View” on page 55. Press to change between the VHF/UHF input and the CABLE input. While FUNCTION is switched on SAT/CABLE, press to display index of your satellite program provider. Press to adjust the volume.

46

Watching the TV Button qf POWER buttons qg REC RESET Description Press to turn on and on/off the TV and other audio/video equipment you have programmed into the remote control. For details, see “Programming the Remote Control” on page 48. Record Press when in a menu to reset the settings to the factory defaults. ✍ RESET menu does not operate when in PC menu, Advanced Video, and White Balance. Press to cycle through the video equipment connected to your TV’s video inputs: TV, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, VIDEO 4, VIDEO 5, VIDEO 6, VIDEO 7 and VIDEO 8. Press once to display the current time and channel label (if set) and channel number. Press again to turn Display off. See page 102 for details on setting the time. Press to jump back and forth between two channels. The TV alternates between the current channel and the last channel that was selected. Press 0 - 9 to select a channel: the channel changes after 3 seconds. Press ENTER to change channels immediately. Press to display the Favorite Channels list. For details, see “Using Favorite Channels” on page 58. Press to freeze the current picture. Press again to restore the picture. For details, see “Using the FREEZE Button” on page 54. Press to display the i.LINK Control Panel. For details on using the i.LINK Control Panel, see page 76. Also available in the Applications setting (page 101). Press to display the Memory Stick Menu. For details, see “Using the Memory Stick Viewer” on page 61. Press to display the TV on-screen setting. Press again to exit from the setting. Press to scan through channels. To scan quickly through the channels, press and hold down either +/– button. Press to exit the on-screen setting or display and return to normal viewing.

qh TV/VIDEO

Watching the TV

qj DISPLAY

qk JUMP

ql 0 – 9 and ENTER w; FAVORITES wa FREEZE

ws i.LINK

wd MEMORY STICK wf MENU wg CH +/– wh EXIT

47

Watching the TV

Programming the Remote Control
The remote control is preset to operate Sony brand video equipment.
Function DVD/VCR SAT/CABLE i.LINK Equipment Sony Dream System Sony Satellite Receiver Sony DVD player (i.LINK) Programmable Code Number 751 801 901

3 2

If you have video equipment other than Sony brand that you want to control with the TV’s remote control, use the following procedure to program the remote control.

The equipment must have infrared (IR) remote capability in order to be used with the remote control.

4 1 5

Turn to the list of “Manufacturer’s Codes” on page 49, and find the three-digit code number for the manufacturer of your equipment. (If more than one code number is listed, use the number listed first.) Press repeatedly until the DVD/VCR, SAT/CABLE or i.LINK indicator lights up. SAT/CABLE Press for five seconds until the indicator of the selected input flashes. While the desired indicator is flashing, enter the three-digit manufacturer’s code number. Press .
You must do step 5 within 10 seconds of step 4, or you must redo steps 4 through 5.
FUNCTION

2 3 4 5

To check if the code number works

Aim the TV’s remote control at the equipment and press that corresponds with that equipment. If it responds, you are done. If not, try using another code listed for that manufacturer.

SAT/CABLE

✍ ✍ ✍

If no code is input within the above specified time, or an invalid or incorrect code number is input, the remote control automatically goes back to the previous setting. In some cases, you may not be able to program your remote control to operate other equipment. In such cases, use the equipment’s own remote control. Removing the batteries or using dead batteries may cause the programmed codes to be lost and revert back to the factory setting. Reprogramming the codes may be necessary.

48

Watching the TV Manufacturer’s Codes DVD Players
Manufacturer Sony Sony (i.LINK) General Electric Hitachi JVC Magnavox Mitsubishi Oritron Panasonic Philips Pioneer RCA/PROSCAN Samsung Toshiba Zenith Code 751 901 755 758 756 757 761 759 753 757 752, 778 755 758 754 760 Manufacturer JC Penney JVC Kenwood LG LXI (SEARS) Magnavox Marantz Marta Memorex Minolta Mitsubishi/ MGA Multitech NEC Olympic Optimus Orion Panasonic Pentax Philco Philips Pioneer Quasar RCA/ PROSCAN Realistic Sansui Samsung Sanyo Scott Sharp Signature 2000 (M. Ward) SV2000 Sylvania Symphonic Tashiro Tatung Teac Technics Toshiba Wards Yamaha Code 304 305, 309, 314, 330, 336, 337 314, 336, 337, 345, 346, 347 314, 332, 336, 337 332 305, 330, 332, 335, 338 308, 309, 310 314, 336, 337 332 309, 335 304, 305 323, 324, 325, 326 321, 325, 338 314, 336, 337 308, 309 327 317 306, 307, 308, 309 304, 305 308, 309 308, 309, 310 308 306, 308, 309 304, 305, 308, 309, 310, 311, 312, 313, 329 309, 324, 328, 330, 335, 338 314 313, 321, 322 330, 335 312, 313, 321, 323, 324, 325, 326, 335 327, 328 327, 338 338 308, 309, 310, 338 338 332 314, 336, 337 314, 336, 337, 338 308, 309 311, 312 327, 328, 331, 332, 335 314, 330, 336, 337 Manufacturer Zenith Code 331

Cable Boxes
Manufacturer Sony Hamlin/Regal Jerrold/ General Inst./ Motorola Oak Panasonic Pioneer Scientific Atlanta Tocom Zenith Code 230 222, 223, 224, 225, 226 201, 202, 203, 204, 205, 206, 207, 208, 218 227, 228, 229 219, 220, 221 211, 214, 215 209, 210, 211 216, 217 212, 213

Watching the TV

Satellite Receivers
Manufacturer Sony Dish Network Echostar General Electric Hitachi Hughes Mitsubishi Panasonic RCA/PROSCAN Toshiba Code 801 810 810 802 805 804 809 803 802, 808 806, 807

Laserdisc Players
Manufacturer Sony Panasonic Pioneer Code 701 704, 710 702

VCRs
Manufacturer Sony Admiral (M. Ward) Aiwa* Audio Dynamic Broksonic Canon Citizen Craig Criterion Curtis Mathes Daewoo DBX Dimensia Emerson Fisher Funai General Electric Go Video Goldstar Hitachi Instant Replay Code 301, 302, 303 327 338, 344 314, 337 317, 319 308, 309 332 302, 332 315 304, 309, 338 309, 312, 341 314, 336, 337 304 316, 317, 318, 319, 320, 341 330, 335 338 304, 309, 329 322, 339, 340 332 304, 305, 306, 338 308, 309

* If an Aiwa VCR does not work even though you enter the code for Aiwa, enter the code for Sony instead.

49

Watching the TV

Using Other Equipment with Your Remote Control
To operate other equipment connected to your TV, first turn to page 48 and program the necessary code. For operating video equipment, press TV/VIDEO repeatedly until you see the video input on screen for your connected equipment. Remote control tips are provided below.
Operating a VCR
To Do This ... Activate the remote control to operate the VCR Turn on/off Change channels Record Play Press FUNCTION repeatedly until the DVD/VCR indicator lights up. SAT/CABLE CH +/– z REC To Do This ... Stop Fast forward Rewind the tape Pause Search the picture forward or backward Press x M m X M or m during playback (release to resume normal playback)

Operating a Satellite Receiver
To Do This ... Activate the remote control to operate the satellite receiver Turn on/off Select a channel Change channels Back to previous channel Press FUNCTION repeatedly until the SAT/CABLE indicator lights up. SAT/CABLE 0-9, ENTER CH +/– JUMP To Do This ... Display channel number Display SAT Index Display SAT Guide Display SAT Menu Move highlight (cursor) Select item Press DISPLAY INDEX GUIDE MENU VvBb

Operating a Cable Box
To Do This ... Activate the remote control to operate the cable box Turn on/off Press FUNCTION repeatedly until the SAT/CABLE indicator lights up. SAT/CABLE To Do This ... Select a channel Change channels Back to previous channel Press 0-9, ENTER CH +/– JUMP

Operating a DVD Player
To Do This ... Activate the remote control to operate the DVD Turn on/off Play Stop Press FUNCTION repeatedly until the DVD/VCR indicator lights up. SAT/CABLE x To Do This ... Pause Step through different tracks of the disc Step through different chapters of a video disc Press X M to fast forward or m to step backward CH+ to fast forward or CH– to step backward

Operating an MDP (Laserdisc Player)
To Do This ... Activate the remote control to operate the MDP Press FUNCTION repeatedly until the indicator of the position you programmed for the MDP player lights up. SAT/CABLE x To Do This ... Pause Search the picture forward or backward Search a chapter forward or backward Press X M or m during playback (release to resume normal playback) CH +/–

Turn on/off Play Stop

50

Watching the TV

Special Buttons on the Remote Control
This TV comes with convenient features that can be accessed using special buttons on the remote control.

Using the GUIDE Button

This TV is equipped to show program information if it is available from the station. The Program Guide lets you review program information, and select both analog and digital channels.
To display the Program Guide: Watching the TV

1 2

Tune your TV to a channel by using the 0-9,

, and ENTER buttons.

Press GUIDE on the TV’s remote control. The Program Guide will appear with the currently selected program showing in the background.

Channel number, call letters, etc. Program title and description, program duration, time remaining, rating information, closed-caption availability, etc. Selectable channel list.

Make Way for Ducks!
Series follows the aquatic misadventures of Henry and Riley, two wayward ducks on a unique mission. Time remaining: 1:26
1 10 23.1 36 65 68 ABC DISC FAM TLC HIST SHOW TV-G
CC

C23.1 FAM

Program information in the guide is provided by the broadcasters. As a result, it may sometimes include only the channel number, without a program title or description.

(Continued)

51

Watching the TV Using the Program Guide

The Program Guide allows you to select the channels from a drop down list. The Guide also provides information about the current program being shown on each channel.

Make Way for Ducks!
Series follows the aquatic misadventures of Henry and Riley, two wayward ducks on a unique mission. Time remaining: 1:26
1 10 23.1 36 65 68 ABC DISC FAM TLC HIST SHOW Alternate Video Alternate Audio Main Video 1 Video 2 Video 3 TV-G
CC

C23.1 FAM

Subchannels are additional channels of programming broadcast simultaneously. For example, channel 4 might include three subchannels (4.1, 4.2, 4.3) that are showing programs at the same time.

Using the Program Options Setting

The Program Options setting allows you to customize the program settings on the currently tuned channel.
Option Alternate Video (When available) Alternate Audio (When available) Description Each program has a main video stream (the video that you see when the channel is first tuned), and may have alternate video streams. This option allows you to switch among these alternate video streams. Each program has a main audio stream (the audio you hear when the channel is first tuned), and may have alternate audio streams. This option allows you to switch among these alternate audio streams (e.g., for different languages).

52

Watching the TV

Using the WIDE Button

Wide screen mode lets you watch 4:3 normal broadcasts in several wide screen modes (16:9 aspect ratio).
4:3 Original source (Standard definition source) 16:9 Original source (High definition source)

Wide Mode Wide Zoom Wide Mode Normal Wide Mode Full Wide Mode Zoom

Wide Mode Wide Zoom Wide Mode Full Wide Mode Zoom

Watching the TV

z When the TV receives a 720p or 1080i signal that is 4:3 aspect ratio picture with a black bar at each side, Full returns the picture to its original size. z You can also access the Wide Mode settings in the Screen settings. For details, see page 88.

When the TV receives a 720p or 1080i signal, the Normal Wide Mode setting is not available.

Changing the Wide Mode

4:3 Original source
Standard definition

16:9 Original source
High definition

Wide Zoom

Normal
This mode is not available

Full

Zoom

53

Watching the TV

Using the JUMP Button

The JUMP button allows you to jump back and forth between the current channel and the last channel that was selected.

Previous channel

Using the FREEZE Button

The FREEZE button allows you to temporarily capture a program’s picture. You can use this feature to write down information such as phone numbers, recipes, etc. To cancel FREEZE and return to normal viewing, press the FREEZE button again.
Current program in progress
Freeze

Frozen picture

54

Watching the TV

Using Twin View
Twin View lets you see two pictures from two sources — from an antenna, VCR, DVD, etc. — on the screen at the same time. You hear the sound from only one of the sources at a time, but you can choose which source’s sound is selected. You can also change the relative size of each of the pictures.

Displaying Twin Pictures

To display Twin View

1 2

Make sure your TV is tuned to a working channel.
Watching the TV

Press . A second picture appears. A picture.

mark appears above the activated

, ,

C8.1 FOX

Video 1

DVD

To cancel Twin View and watch the active picture ❑

Press

again (or press

).

Activating the Picture

You can use the B or b buttons to activate the left and right pictures while using Twin View.
To activate the right picture ❑ To activate the left picture

Press b.
C8.1 FOX
Video 1

Press B.
DVD

, ,

C8.1 FOX

Video 1

DVD

(Continued)

55

Watching the TV

Functions available in the active window
To Do This ... Tune to a channel Do This ... To tune to analog channels, press 0-9 and then ENTER. For digital subchannels, press 0-9, , press 0-9 again, and then ENTER. For example, to select subchannel 21.13, press 2+1+ +1+3, and then press ENTER. Adjust the volume Mute the sound Switch the TV’s input between sources connected to the TV’s VHF/UHF and CABLE inputs Press VOL +/–. Press MUTING (press again or press VOL + to restore the sound). Press ANT.

Switch the TV’s input between Press TV/VIDEO. sources connected to the TV’s A/V inputs Change the picture size Press V or v. (For details, see “Changing the Picture Size” on page 57.)

Factors Affecting Twin View ❑

If you use a cable box to view all channels, the same channel appears in both windows because the cable box unscrambles and sends only one channel at a time. (To view the picture in dual picture features such as Twin View, Freeze, etc., see “Cable Box and Antenna” on page 25.) If you use a cable box and other video equipment, you can view the cable box output in one window and view a different source (such as a VCR or DVD player) in the second window by using the TV/VIDEO button. Digital TV channels, as well as any sources connected to the HD/DVD IN 4-5, and HDMI IN 6-7 inputs display in the left window, but not the right. If you are viewing a 4:3 source and a 16:9 enhanced source (such as a DVD) side by side, the 4:3 source appears larger. Twin View does not display channels that are blocked by parental lock settings (see page 92).

❑ ❑

56

Watching the TV

Changing the Picture Size

The zoom feature lets you change the size of the left and right pictures.
To enlarge the left picture (reduce the right) To enlarge the right picture (reduce the left)

1

Press B to activate the left picture (if not already activated). Press V to enlarge the picture and v to reduce the picture.

1

Press b to activate the right picture (if not already activated). Press V to enlarge the picture and v to reduce the picture.

Watching the TV

2

2

When you adjust the picture sizes in Twin View, the TV memorizes the change. The next time you use the Twin View function, the memorized sizes appear.

57

Watching the TV

Using Favorite Channels
The Favorite Channels feature lets you select programs from a list of up to 16 favorite channels that you specify. You can create a list using the Favorite Channels option in the Channel setting, or by using the Add to Favorites feature in the Favorite Channels guide.

Using the Channel Menu
z For details on using the Channel setting, see page 90.

1 2 3 4

Press MENU to display the setting. Press V or v to highlight the Channel icon and press . Press to select Favorite Channels. Use the 0-9 and ENTER buttons to enter the channel number that you want to assign to the favorite channel number. A preview of the highlighted channel appears in the upper right of the screen.
Digital channels do not display in the preview window.

Press

to select that channel as a favorite channel.
, 0-9

To enter digital channel numbers in step 4, use the 0-9, and ENTER buttons.

5 6

To add more channels to your favorites list, repeat step 4. To clear a favorite channel, press V or v to highlight the channel you want to clear. Press RESET. Press MENU to exit the setting.

58

Watching the TV

Using the Favorite Channels Guide

1

Press FAVORITES. The Favorite Channels list appears.
Preview of highlighted Favorite Channel Favorite Channels

Favorite Channels
Add to Favorites 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8.14 15.8 27 45.12 98 112.3 120 PBS NBC HGTV TNT CNN ESPN NICK

Watching the TV

2

Press V or v to highlight the channel you want to watch. A preview of the highlighted favorite channel appears.
Digital channels do not display in the preview window.

Add to Favorites and press

To add the current channel to the list of Favorite Channels, highlight . to select the channel you want to watch.

3

Press

To change your Favorite Channels list or delete a channel from the list, highlight Edit Favorites and press .

59

Watching the TV

Using the PC Input
The PC Input feature allows you to connect a personal computer to your TV so you can play PC content through the TV's large display and audio speakers.

For details on how to connect a personal computer to your TV, see “Personal Computer” on page 41.

Displaying the PC Screen

To display the PC screen: ❑

Press TV/VIDEO repeatedly until VIDEO 8 (PC) appears.
You can change the settings for the PC input while the TV is displaying the PC screen. For details, see pages 85, 87, and 99.

Notes on the PC Input Feature ❑

If the i.LINK button on the remote control is pressed while the TV is displaying the PC screen, the following message will appear: Feature Not Available. If the Memory Stick button on the remote control is pressed while the TV is displaying the PC screen, the Memory Stick Index will appear on the TV screen. Pressing TV/VIDEO repeatedly on the remote control will skip VIDEO 8 (PC) if Twin View is in use.

60

Using the Memory Stick Viewer
About Memory Stick
Memory Stick (sold separately) is a compact, portable, and versatile Integrated Circuit recording medium with a data capacity that exceeds that of a floppy disk. Memory Stick is specially designed for sharing digital data among Memory Stick compatible products such as digital cameras and digital video cameras. Because it is removable, Memory Stick can also be used for external data storage.
Using the Memory Stick Viewer

Features

With the Memory Stick Viewer, you can: ❑ View photo (JPEG) and movie (MPEG1) files in a thumbnail index or Slide Show ❑ Set customized Slide Show options, including transitions and background audio ❑ Pan, zoom, and rotate photos ❑ Mark photos and set quantities of prints to be output when the Memory Stick is inserted into your photo printer (not supplied) ❑ Lock (protect) or delete files on the Memory Stick For more information about handling Memory Stick media, see “File Compatibility” on page 62. This TV is compatible with the following Sony brand Memory Stick media types: ❑ Memory Stick Media ❑ Memory Stick Duo and PRO Duo Media (can be used without the Memory Stick adaptor)

Memory Stick Compatibility

CAUTION: The Memory Stick slot on your TV has been designed to accommodate standard and compact versions of Memory Stick. It is not necessary to use an adaptor for Memory Stick Duo and Memory Stick PRO Duo. If you use an adaptor, it may damage the adaptor and Memory Stick slot.

❑ ❑

Memory Stick Media with Memory Select Function Memory Stick PRO Media

About Memory Stick PRO Media

Memory Stick PRO media features vary by and are dependent upon the design of host hardware devices. Memory Stick PRO in this TV has been tested to support up to 1 GB media capacity and does not support high-speed transfer, MagicGate copyright protection technology, or access control security features.

61

Using the Memory Stick Viewer

File Compatibility

The Memory Stick Viewer is compatible with JPEG images taken with Sony digital still cameras and MPEG1* movies taken with Sony digital cameras and camcorders. To be viewable in the Memory Stick Viewer, files must have the following file name extensions:
* Some variations of MPEG1 movies may not play back correctly. File Type JPEG MPEG1 Supported File Name Extensions .jpg .jpeg .mpg .mpeg

Most Sony brand digital still and video cameras automatically record still photo and movie files using DCF compliant directory and file names. If you selected the Digital Camera Folders option, as described on page 69, you might want to have your digital camera’s instruction manual handy in order to check how files and directories are organized for your specific model of digital camera. DCF stands for “Design Rules for Camera File Systems,” which are specifications established by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA: formerly JEIDA).

62

Using the Memory Stick Viewer

Inserting and Removing a Memory Stick/Memory Stick Duo
Inserting a Memory Stick/Memory Stick Duo
Locate the Memory Stick slot and insert the Memory Stick/Memory Stick Duo into the Memory Stick slot as illustrated below. When inserted properly, it should slide in with little resistance and click into place.

STD / DUO

STD /DUO

Using the Memory Stick Viewer

✍ ✍

Be sure to insert the Memory Stick/Memory Stick Duo in the correct direction. Forcing the Memory Stick/Memory Stick Duo in the wrong way may result in permanent damage to it and the TV. Insert only Memory Stick/Memory Stick Duo media into the Memory Stick slot. Attempting to insert other objects into the Memory Stick slot may damage the TV.

Removing a Memory Stick/Memory Stick Duo

1

Check that the Memory Stick indicator is off. (When the light is on, this indicates that the TV is reading data from the Memory Stick/Memory Stick Duo.)
Removing the Memory Stick/Memory Stick Duo while a file is being accessed (when the Memory Stick indicator on the TV’s front panel is lit) may damage the Memory Stick/Memory Stick Duo or its contents.

2

Push the Memory Stick/Memory Stick Duo gently into the Memory Stick slot, and then release it. The Memory Stick/Memory Stick Duo media is ejected.
When removing the Memory Stick/Memory Stick Duo, do not attempt to pull it from its slot without first pushing it in to release it.

3

Pull the Memory Stick/Memory Stick Duo completely out of the slot.
To protect small children from injury by Memory Stick/Memory Stick Duo media, remove all Memory Stick/Memory Stick Duo media from the TV’s Memory Stick slot and store in a safe location when not in use.

STD / DUO

STD / Duo

STD / Duo

63

Using the Memory Stick Viewer

Viewing Photo or Movie Files
The Memory Stick Index enables you to view all photo or movie files contained in a Memory Stick as thumbnails and let you choose the files you want to display.

1
Information about the highlighted photo or movie Highlighted thumbnail

Turn on the TV and insert a Memory Stick that contains the photo or movie files you want to view. The Memory Stick Index appears on the screen.
Summer 2005 / DSC0001 Jul 30, 2005 12:59PM 640x480 1 of 25

Thumbnails of photos and movies

Memory Stick menu bar

Slide Show

Contents

Memory Stick

If the Memory Stick was inserted before you turn on the TV, the Memory Stick Index will not appear on the screen. Press on the remote control to display the Memory Stick Index.

2 3

Press V v B b to highlight the photo or movie you want to display. Press to select.
Y

To display the previous or next page of thumbnails

Press V v B b to select

, and press V v to change pages.

To exit Memory Stick Viewer

Press

on the remote control.

About the Lock and Movie Icons on the Thumbnail Images Indicates the thumbnail is a movie (MPEG1) file instead of a photo (JPEG) file. Indicates the thumbnail is locked. Locked files cannot be changed or deleted. For details, see “Protect” on page 67. Indicates that the photo is marked to be printed. Indicates that the photo has an associated voice memo.

64

Using the Memory Stick Viewer

Using the Photo Viewer
Information about selected photo Selected photo

When you select a photo from the Memory Stick Index (described on page 64), it displays as shown below, with the following controls.
Summer 2005 / DSC00012 Jul 30, 2005 12:59PM 640x480 12 of 25
x2

Using the Memory Stick Viewer

Previous/Next buttons Photo menu bar
Index Slide Show View File

JPEGs captured using a digital video camera may appear to display motion in full screen. This is a result of the way digital video cameras record still images, and is not a result of a malfunction with the TV.

To Do This ... Display the previous or next file on the Memory Stick Hide the Photo menu bar, displaying only the photo Display the hidden Photo menu bar

Do This ... Press V to highlight the (Previous/Next) button. Then press B to go to the previous file, or b to go to the next file. With the highlight in the Photo menu bar, press v. Press V.

z When the menu is hidden, press B or b to go to the previous or next photo.

Play the JPEG voice memo Highlight B (Play) and then press . To pause the voice memo, highlight X (Pause) and then press . ( files only) Display the Memory Stick Index again Access additional options in the Photo menu bar Exit Memory Stick Viewer Press B or b to highlight Index in the Photo menu bar and press . For details on the Memory Stick Index, see page 64. See “Using the Menu Bar Options” on page 67. Press on the remote control.

65

Using the Memory Stick Viewer

Using the Movie Viewer
Information about selected movie

When you select a movie from the Memory Stick Index (described on page 64), it displays as shown below, with the following controls.
Summer 2005 / MOV00012 Jul 30, 2005 12:59PM 640x480
12 of 25

Selected movie

Enlarge button Play/Pause button Previous/Next buttons Movie menu bar

MPEG movies recorded in VX Fine mode with Sony digital cameras cannot be played back with the Memory Stick Viewer.

To Do This ... z The quality of the movie when enlarged depends on the resolution of the MPEG1 file. See your camera’s instruction manual for details. Enlarge the movie window

Do This ... Press V or v to highlight Enlarge, and then . To display the movie controls again, press . press Press V or v to highlight B (Play) and then press . While the movie is playing, the B button changes to the X (Pause) button. Press V or v to highlight X (Pause) and then . press

Play the movie with the movie controls displayed Pause the movie

Display the previous or next Press V or v to highlight the (Previous/Next) file on the Memory Stick button. Then press B to go to the previous file, or b to go to the next file. Hide the Movie menu bar, displaying only the movie Display the hidden Movie menu bar With the highlight in the Movie menu bar, press v. Press V.

Access additional options in See “Using the Menu Bar Options” on page 67. the Movie menu bar Exit Memory Stick Viewer Press on the remote control.

66

Using the Memory Stick Viewer

Using the Menu Bar Options

Option Index Slide Show View (only for photo)

Description Displays the Memory Stick Index, with the highlight on the currently displayed photo or movie’s thumbnail. Displays the Slide Show menu. For details, see “Slide Show Option” on page 68. Rotate Allows you to rotate the photo in 90 degree increments clockwise or counterclockwise.

1

z JPEG/MPEG1 files that are protected are indicated by the Lock icon. Zoom/Pan z You cannot rotate a photo that has been protected. z Pan is available only when the photo is magnified using Zoom. z The Print Quantity feature is also known as DPOF (Digital Print Order Format).

In the Photo menu bar, press B or b to highlight View. 2 Press V or v to highlight Rotate. 3 To rotate clockwise, press V or v to highlight Clockwise and press . To rotate counterclockwise, press V or v to highlight Counterclockwise and press . The photo is rotated 90 degrees each time you press . Allows you to magnify and pan across the photo. In the Photo menu bar, press B or b to highlight View. 2 Press V or v to highlight Zoom/Pan and press . 3 Specify the zoom center point by using V v B b; then press to set the center. Use the arrow buttons to Zoom or Pan, and press when you want to stop. Allows you to protect the JPEG/MPEG1 file from any changes. When a JPEG/MPEG1 file is protected, it cannot be rotated (only for JPEG) or deleted. Select On or Off. Allows you to indicate the number of prints to make of the specific photo when the Memory Stick is inserted into a compatible photo printer (not supplied). Deletes the JPEG/MPEG1 file from the Memory Stick. You cannot delete a JPEG/MPEG1 file that has been protected (or if the Memory Stick is locked).

Using the Memory Stick Viewer

1

File

Protect

Print Quantity (only for photo) Delete

(Continued)

67

Using the Memory Stick Viewer Slide Show Option Option Start z The Slide Show menu is the same whether you select it from the Memory Stick Index (page 64), Photo (page 65), or Movie (page 66) menus. Music Description Starts the Slide Show. Allows you to select background audio to play during the Slide Show. Off No additional background audio is played during the Slide Show. Audio that is associated with the JPEG or MPEG1 files will play.

Play Memory Plays all MP3 files on the Memory Stick. The Stick Piano MP3 file is not played. Piano (Built-in music) (List of MP3 Files) Plays the MP3 file stored in the TV’s internal memory. Displays a list of all MP3 files found at the top level (root) of the Memory Stick. To show additional MP3 files stored in other folders on the Memory Stick, select Complete list.

z When you select Complete list, it may take a moment to display the list of all MP3 files.

Complete list Displays a list of all available MP3 files. The list is sorted in alphabetical order, grouped by folder. Transition Effect Slide Advance Allows you to select an effect to be used when advancing to the next file in the Slide Show. Allows you to specify when to advance to the next slide. Fast Slide advances after about 3 seconds. Slide advances after about 6 seconds. Slide advances after about 12 seconds. Slide advances only after you press B or b.

z Some JPEG files may take longer to display than others, which may make it seem longer than the interval you selected for Slide Advance.

Medium Slow Manual advance File Information Repeat

Determines whether file information is displayed. Select On or Off. On Off Slide Show continuously loops. Slide Show plays once through all files and ends.

68

Using the Memory Stick Viewer Contents Options Option Select Folder Description Allows you to select different folders to view in the Memory Stick Viewer. Digital Camera Folders Selects all folders within the directories defined by the DCF rules used by Sony digital cameras (see page 62). JPEG and MPEG1 files in those directories are recognized even if they do not conform to the DCF file naming rules. Allows you to access individual folders on the Memory Stick. Using the Memory Stick Viewer

Select a Folder File Order z The Rotate and Protect functions do not change the file’s modification date.

Allows you to change the order in which the Memory Stick files are displayed. Date Order Date Order Reverse Alphabetical Displays files in chronological order by modification date. Displays files in reverse chronological order by modification date. Displays files in alphabetical order by filename.

Filter

Allows you to selectively display specific file types within the selected folder. Show Photos and Displays all readable files. Movies Show Photos Only Show Movies Only Show All Print Marks Displays only photo (JPEG) files. Displays only movie (MPEG1) files. Displays all files marked with the Print Mark feature, regardless of the currently selected folder. For details, see “Print Quantity (only for photo)” on page 67.

Memory Stick Options

The Memory Stick menu displays the current status of the Memory Stick, including total capacity, used capacity, and free capacity.

69

Using the Memory Stick Viewer

Memory Stick Precautions

When using Memory Stick media, follow these precautions:

To avoid permanent damage to still image data, do not turn off the TV or remove Memory Stick media from the insertion slot while data is being read (as indicated by the Memory Stick indicator light being on). Avoid touching the terminal of Memory Stick media or bringing it into contact with a metal object. Do not drop, bend, or submit Memory Stick media to external shock. Do not disassemble or modify Memory Stick media. Avoid getting liquid on Memory Stick media. Apply labels only within the designated label area.
Label Area

❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

To avoid permanent damage to still image data, do not use or store Memory Stick media in a location subject to:
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

High temperature (such as near a heater or inside a hot car) High humidity Direct sunlight Corrosive substances Magnetic fields Excessive dust Static electricity or electric noise Electric surges

❑ ❑ ❑

Store and carry Memory Stick media in its original case to ensure protection of stored data. Save a backup of stored data. When using the Memory Stick Duo, insert it without using the Memory Stick Duo adaptor. For details, see page 63.

70

Using the Memory Stick Viewer

Memory Stick Functionality

Sony cannot guarantee or assure the Memory Stick functionality on this TV in the following cases:
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

You are using non-Sony brand Memory Stick media. You are using video or audio clips that have been processed on a computer. You are using files that were obtained from the Internet or from a printed film processing center. The Memory Stick has been formatted on a personal computer.

Sony recommends that you back up all data stored on Memory Stick media to avoid potential data loss. In the above cases, in order to avoid potential data corruption, be sure to back up data prior to use with the TV’s Memory Stick Viewer. Sony cannot accept responsibility in the event that data recorded to Memory Stick media is lost or damaged. For certain non-Sony brand Memory Stick media, you can view images, but you cannot rotate, delete or protect/unprotect images on the TV. An error message will occur if you attempt any of these operations. This is a result of the unique file directory structure on these particular flash memory media and is not a malfunction of the TV.

Using the Memory Stick Viewer

71

Using i.LINK
Connecting i.LINK Devices
This TV has three S400 i.LINK terminals (one on the front panel, and two on the back panel). You can use the following i.LINK cables with this TV:

Sony Model Length
VMC-IL4415
4-pin i.LINK cable

1.5 meters 3.5 meters Using i.LINK

VMC-IL4435

Do not use cables other than the ones listed above.

i.LINK provides a secure digital interface to other digital home entertainment devices, such as digital VCRs, digital camcorders, set-top boxes, and other devices that also are equipped with i.LINK. i.LINK allows for the secure transfer of copyright-protected digital content between these devices and your digital television. All products with an i.LINK connector may not communicate with each other.

Before connecting this unit to i.LINK-compatible equipment, read the instruction manual of the i.LINK device to be connected.

To connect a digital i.LINK device (using only a digital signal)

1

Using an i.LINK cable, connect the device’s i.LINK jack to any of the TV’s i.LINK jacks.

To connect an i.LINK device that supports an EIA-775A connection

1 2

Using an i.LINK cable, connect the device’s i.LINK jack to any of the TV’s i.LINK jacks. Using an A/V cable, connect the i.LINK device’s A/V output jacks to the TV’s VIDEO 3 A/V input jacks.
Only one i.LINK cable should connect the TV and any given i.LINK device.

(Continued)

73

Using i.LINK

Rear of TV
VIDEO IN

i.LINK cable

HD/DVD IN
(1080i/720p/480p/480i)

CONTROL S IN OUT

1
DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) OUT PCM/DOLBY DIGITAL

3

4

Cables are often colorcoded to connectors. Connect red to red, white to white. i.LINK-equipped device

5

S400 i.LINK (DV/HDV/MICROMV/TV)

AUDIO OUT (VAR/FIX)

AUDIO-R AUDIO-L VIDEO A/V cable

Notes on Using This Connection To Do This ... Do This ... Set up a digital i.LINK For digital i.LINK devices (devices that require only the device i.LINK connection), no setup is necessary. The TV automatically recognizes the device as soon as the connection is made. Set up an i.LINK device 1 that supports an EIA775A analog connection 2 Connect analog A/V cables to the VIDEO 3 input (see page 73). Use the i.LINK Control Panel to activate the analog connection to your i.LINK device (see page 75).

Notes on Connecting i.LINK Devices

To connect two or more i.LINK devices, use i.LINK cables to connect them as shown below.
A
i.LINK

B
i.LINK

C
i.LINK

D
i.LINK

E

You can connect up to 63 i.LINK devices. However, the maximum number of cables in any serial route is 16.
A
i.LINK

B
i.LINK

C
i.LINK

D
i.LINK

E

F
i.LINK i.LINK

G

Do not connect i.LINK devices in a way that creates a loop.
i.LINK

A
i.LINK

B
i.LINK

C

Connecting non-compatible devices, such as PCs or PC peripherals, may result in malfunctions.

74

Using i.LINK

Selecting an i.LINK Device
Before an i.LINK device can be viewed, it must first be selected via the i.LINK Device List.

1

Connect the i.LINK device that you wish to operate.
For instructions on connecting i.LINK devices, see page 73.

2

Press i.LINK on the media receiver unit or the remote control.
i.LINK Device List

DTV Digital VCR Status: Viewing.

Sony DTV

Using i.LINK

The TV (DTV), along with all devices connected by i.LINK to the TV, appear on the i.LINK Device List. Devices that are not supported by the TV appear on the Device List as “Other Device,” but cannot be controlled using the TV’s remote control or on-screen i.LINK Control Panel. For these devices, use the remote control supplied with the device.

3

Press V or v to navigate among the i.LINK-connected devices.
i.LINK devices can be connected to one another and to the TV while the TV is powered on. The Device List will automatically update to include the newly connected device. See page 73 for more information on connecting i.LINK devices.

4

Press to select the desired device and display the device’s i.LINK Control Panel. Use the i.LINK Control Panel to operate the selected device. For details, see page 76.

75

Using i.LINK

Using the i.LINK Control Panel
After you select an i.LINK device using the Device List, the TV displays the i.LINK Control Panel, which allows you to use the TV’s remote to control the selected i.LINK device.

1

If the i.LINK Control Panel is not already displayed, press i.LINK on the remote control.
If i.LINK is pressed while the TV is displaying an analog or digital channel (not the i.LINK device), then the Device List will appear. Select the desired device from the list and press to display the Control Panel.

2 3 4

Press V v B b on the remote control to navigate through the options available in the i.LINK Control Panel. Press to select a desired option.

Press EXIT to exit the Control Panel and view the i.LINK device in fullscreen.
To exit i.LINK mode, select DTV from the Device List or press CH +/–.

i.LINK Control Panel

Back to Device List Setup Exit i.LINK

Power Swap Audio Full Screen VICTOR HM-DH35000

52.3

The DTV window appears only if the i.LINK menus were entered while watching a digital TV channel

Status: Playing.

00:00:31

The i.LINK Control Panel displays the signal from the TV to the left on screen (if available), and the signal from the currently selected device to the right on screen.

76

Using i.LINK

To Do This ... Go to the Device List

Do This ... Press V v B b to highlight Back to Device List and press . . An icon appears next

Change the audio being played from the Press V v B b to highlight Swap Audio and press TV to the current selected device, and to the window that currently has sound. vice versa Play a recording from the selected i.LINK camcorder or digital VCR Press V v B b to highlight and press or .

Fast-forward or rewind a recording from Press V v B b to highlight the selected i.LINK camcorder or digital VCR Record from TV to the selected i.LINK digital VCR Stop a recording from the selected i.LINK digital VCR Turn the selected device power on and off Setup the selected device

and press

.

If the (Record) button is available, press V v B b to highlight and press . Press V v B b to highlight and press . Using i.LINK . . For more details on Setup,

Press V v B b to highlight Power and press Press V v B b to highlight Setup and press see page 78.

Notes About Controlling i.LINK Devices ❑ You can control the functions of the selected i.LINK device by using the equivalent buttons on the TV’s

remote control. To program the remote control to operate i.LINK devices, see “Programming the Remote Control” on page 48.
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

Some options on the i.LINK Control Panel may not be available, depending on the device being controlled. Only i.LINK-equipped digital camcorders and digital VCRs can be controlled directly through the i.LINK Control Panel. Not all functions are supported for all i.LINK devices. If you are using a digital VCR, turn off any Auto LINC functionality of the VCR. For details, see the digital VCR’s user manual.

77

Using i.LINK

i.LINK Setup
You can use the i.LINK Control Panel to access digital setup options, some of which are also available through the Program Guide (described on page 52).
To set up the selected device:

Press V v B b to highlight Setup and press
i.LINK Control Panel
Back to Device List Setup

.

Alternate Video Alternate Audio Analog Video

Power Swap Audio Full Screen Sony DV-VCR

888.888

The following options are displayed:
Option Description

Alternate Each program has a main video stream (the video that you see Video when the channel is first tuned), and may have alternate video (when available) streams. This option allows you to switch among these alternate video streams. Alternate Each program has a main audio stream (the audio that you hear Audio when the channel is first tuned), and may have alternate audio (when available) streams. This option allows you to switch among these alternate audio streams (e.g., for different languages). Analog Video The TV is able to accept an analog signal from a selected set-top box. The set-top box must be EIA-775A compliant and must be connected to the TV’s VIDEO 3 input. To associate the device with the TV’s analog VIDEO 3 input, press V or v to select Analog Video and press . All EIA-775A-compliant devices will be shown in the list. Select the desired device from the list and press .

Notes on i.LINK ❑

The TV can act as an i.LINK repeater, so that i.LINK signals are relayed to another device even when the TV is powered off. To enable this feature, set the i.LINK Standby option to On using the Setup setting as described on page 97. Parental Lock settings apply to the signal from a selected device. For more details, see page 92.

78

Using the Settings
Overview
The Settings give you access to the following features: (Depending on the signal tuned, you may see different Setting options on your screen. Settings displayed here are with the 720p signal.)
Settings Video
Antenna

Allows you to set/change

Video

Picture Mode Iris Picture Brightness Color Hue Sharpness Color Temp. Noise Reduction

Standard Max 58 31 31 0 25 Cool Medium

Picture Mode (page 81) Iris (page 81) Picture (page 81) Brightness (page 81) Color (page 81) Hue (page 81) Sharpness (page 81) Color Temp. (page 82) Noise Reduction (page 82) Direct Mode (page 82) Sound Mode (page 86) Treble (page 86) Bass (page 86) Balance (page 86) Steady Sound (page 86) Effect (page 86) MTS (page 87) Audio Out (page 87) Speaker (page 87) Wide Mode (page 88) Game Picture (page 88) 4:3 Default (page 89) Overscan (page 89) Vertical Center (page 89) Vertical Size (page 89)

Game Mode (page 82) Advanced Video (page 82)

Using the Settings

Audio
Antenna

Audio
Sound Mode Treble Bass Balance Steady Sound Effect MTS Audio Out Speaker Dynamic 32 32 0 Off Dolby Virtual Stereo Variable On

Screen
Antenna

Screen
Wide Mode Game Picture 4:3 Default Overscan Vertical Center Vertical Size Full 0 Off Normal 0 0

(Continued)

79

Using the Settings
Settings Channel
Antenna

Allows you to set/change

Channel
Favorite Channels Channel Fix Digital Channels Auto Program Show/Hide Channels Label Channels Off

Favorite Channels (page 90) Channel Fix (page 90) Digital Channels (page 90) Auto Program (page 90) Show/Hide Channels (page 91) Label Channels (page 91)

Parental Lock
Antenna

Parental Lock
Password

Parental Lock (page 92) Change Password (page 93) Select Country (page 93)

Setup
Antenna

Setup
Caption Vision Info Banner Label Video Inputs Language i.LINK Standby Menu Color High Altitude Power Saving English Off Gray Off Standard Off On

Caption Vision (page 96) Info Banner (page 96) Label Video Inputs (page 96) Language (page 97) i.LINK Standby (page 97) Menu Color (page 97) High Altitude (page 97) Power Saving (page 97)

Applications
Antenna

Applications
Memory Stick i.LINK Clock/Timers Diagnostics CableCARD

Memory Stick (page 101) i.LINK (page 101) Clock/Timers (page 101) Diagnostics (page 102) CableCARD (page 102)

80

Using the Settings

Accessing the Video Settings
1. Press MENU..........................
MENU

Antenna

Video
Custom settings
Picture Mode Standard

Vivid
Standard

2. Highlight ...............................

Iris
Picture Brightness

Max 58 31 31 0 25
Cool Medium

Pro

Color

3. Press to select ...................... To highlight an option and to change settings, press V v B b. to confirm the selection. Press To exit the Video settings, press .

Hue Sharpness

Color Temp.
Noise Reduction

Selecting Video Options
z To quickly and easily change from one Picture Mode to another, use PICTURE on the remote control.

The Video settings include the following options:
Option Picture Mode Customized picture viewing Description Vivid Select for enhanced picture contrast and sharpness. Standard Select for standard picture settings. Recommended for home entertainment. Pro Select to display a picture with minimum enhancements. ✍ You can alter the Video settings (Picture, Brightness, Color, etc.) for each Picture Mode and each video input. You can set up a Picture Mode (Vivid, Standard, Pro) independently for each Video input (Video 1-Video 7, including the Antenna input). Your Picture Mode settings are automatically saved after each selection. This allows you to customize the Picture Mode setting for each type of signal source. Adjust the contrast levels. Adjust to increase picture contrast and deepen the color or decrease picture contrast and soften the color. Adjust to brighten or darken the picture. Adjust to increase or decrease color intensity. Adjust to increase or decrease the green tones. Adjust to sharpen or soften the picture.

Using the Settings

Iris Picture Brightness Color Hue Sharpness

(Continued)

81

Using the Settings Option Color Temp. White intensity adjustment Description Choose from three color temperatures: Cool Select to give the white colors a blue tint. Neutral Select to give the white colors a neutral tint. Warm When Pro is selected in Picture Mode, select to give the white colors a red tint. Noise Select to reduce the noise level of connected equipment. This also reduces the noise level to the signal from the VHF/UHF jack. Select Reduction from High, Medium, Low and Off. Direct Mode On Select for a natural, soft picture. Off Select to turn off the Direct Mode. Game Mode On Select to optimize the lipsync when playing games. Off Select to turn off the Game Mode. Advanced Select Program to choose among the options described below. Video DRC Mode Creates a high-resolution picture with 4 x density, for Available in high quality sources (i.e., DVD player, satellite “Custom receiver). Picture Mode 1 Recommended for moving pictures. Mode” Mode 2 Recommended for still images and text. CineMotion Provides an optimized display by automatically detecting film content and applying a reverse 3-2 pulldown process. Moving pictures will appear clearer and more natural-looking. ✍ DRC Mode is not available when using multi-picture functions (Twin View, Freeze or Memory Stick), or when Direct Mode is set to On or Game Mode is set to On; also not available when watching 480p or 720p sources.

z Direct Mode and Game Mode are not available when watching 480p and 720p sources, or when using multipicture functions (Twin View, Freeze, or Memory Stick).

82

Using the Settings Option Advanced Video (Continued) Description DRC Allows you to customize the level of detail (Reality) Palette and smoothness (Clarity) for up to three input sources. For example, you can create one Custom setting to optimize your cable input’s picture, and create another to optimize your DVD player’s picture. You can switch among the three Custom settings.

1

Press the arrow buttons to highlight Custom 1, . Custom 2, or Custom 3 and then press The DRC palette appears.
Custom 1
Press to exit

Reality (25) Clarity (1)

Using the Settings

2

Press the arrow buttons to adjust the position of the marker (z). As you move the z higher along the Reality axis, the picture becomes more detailed. As you move the z to the right along the Clarity axis, the picture becomes smoother.

z The following settings are available, when Picture Mode is set to Pro; Advanced Iris, Color Corrector, DTE, Clear White, Detail Enhancer, Black Corrector, Gamma Corrector, White Balance.

To save the setting, press . To return the Custom options to the default factory settings, press the RESET button. ✍ DRC Palette is not available when watching 480p and 720p sources, using multi-picture functions (Twin View, Freeze or Memory Stick), or when Direct Mode is set to On or Game Mode is set to On. BN Select to reduce noise caused by digital video Smoother encoding and decoding process. It is especially effective for watching a DVD or digital TV picture. Select from High, Medium, Low and Off. ✍ BN Smoother may not be effective for some connected equipment. BN Smoother is not available when watching 480p, 720p, and 1080i sources, or when using multi-picture functions (Twin View, Freeze or Memory Stick). Advanced Allows you to enhance the black color in dark images Iris by controlling the iris automatically and improves its contrast by increasing the amplitude of the image.

3

(Continued)

83

Using the Settings Option Advanced Video (Continued) Description Color Select to make the colors more vivid. Select from Corrector High, Low, and Off. DTE Select to enhance the texture of the picture. Select from High, Medium, Low, and Off. Clear White Select to emphasize the white colors. Select from On or Off. Detail Select to sharpen picture definition. Select from High, Enhancer Medium, Low, and Off. Black Select to enhance the black colors to give the picture Corrector strong contrast. Select from High, Medium, Low, and Off. Gamma Select to adjust the balance between bright and dark Corrector areas of the picture. Select from High, Medium, Low, and Off. White Select to fine-adjust the white color intensity by Balance changing the red, green and blue levels. Select Adjust to choose among the R-Gain, G-Gain, B-Gain, RBias, G-Bias, and B-Bias options. To restore the factory default setting of White Balance, select Initial Set.

84

Using the Settings

Selecting PC Video Options

To display the PC screen: ❑

See “Using the PC Input” on page 60.

Video Display Mode Iris Picture Brightness Color Temp. Text

Text

Cool

Adjust the picture settings Resolution − − − x − − − / − − Hz
MENU Exit

The PC Input Video setting includes the following options:
Option Display Mode Iris Picture Brightness Color Temp. Description Video Text Select to view video images. Select to view text, charts or tables.

Adjust the contrast levels. Adjust to increase or decrease picture contrast. Adjust to brighten or darken the picture. Choose from three color temperatures: Cool Neutral Warm Select to give the white colors a blue tint. Select to give the white colors a neutral tint. Select to give the white colors a red tint. Using the Settings

Reset

Select to restore the factory default settings.

85

Using the Settings

Accessing the Audio Settings
1. Press MENU ........................
MENU

Antenna

Audio
Custom settings
Sound Mode Dynamic 32 32 0 Off Dolby Virtual Stereo Variable On Dynamic Clear Voice Custom

2. Highlight .............................

Treble Bass Balance Steady Sound

3. Press to select..................... To highlight an option and to change settings, press V v B b. to confirm the selection. Press To exit the Audio settings, press .

Effect MTS Audio Out Speaker

Selecting Audio Options
z Treble/Bass setting is available only when Sound Mode is set to Custom.

The Audio settings include the following options:
Option Sound Mode Description Dynamic Clear Voice Custom Treble Bass Balance Steady Sound Select to enhance treble and bass. Suitable for spoken dialog. Flat setting.

Adjust to increase or decrease higher-pitched sounds. Adjust to increase or decrease lower-pitched sounds. Adjust to emphasize left or right speaker balance. Auto Off Select to stabilize the volume across all programs and commercials. Select to turn off Steady Sound. Steady Sound is not available when Effect is set to Dolby Virtual, TruSurround or Simulated. Select for surround sound (for Dolby surround encoded programs only). Select for surround sound (for stereo programs only). Adds a surround-like effect to mono programs. Normal stereo or mono reception.


Effect z TruSurround attempts to create the same surround effect produced by a multichannel system using the left and right speakers.

Dolby Virtual TruSurround Simulated Off

86

Using the Settings Option Description Select for stereo reception when viewing a program broadcast in stereo. Select to automatically switch to second audio programs when a signal is received. (If no SAP signal is present, the TV remains in Stereo mode.) Select for mono reception. (Use to reduce noise during weak stereo broadcasts.)

MTS Stereo Enjoy stereo, bilingual and Auto SAP mono programs Mono


Audio Out Easy control of volume adjustments

MTS is available only for analog programs. The TV’s speakers are turned off, and the audio output from your audio system can still be controlled by the TV’s remote control. The TV’s speakers are turned off, and the audio output of the TV is fixed. Use your audio receiver’s volume control to adjust the volume (and other settings) through your audio system. Select to turn on the TV speakers. Select to turn off the TV speakers and listen to the TV’s sound only through your external audio system speakers.

This option can be set only when the Speaker option is set to Off. Variable

Fixed

Using the Settings

Speaker

On Off

Selecting PC Audio Options
z RESET button does not operate when PC Audio options is selected.

To display the PC screen: ❑

See “Using the PC Input” on page 60.

Audio Sound Mode Natural

Adjust the sound settings Resolution − − − x − − − / − − Hz
MENU Exit

The PC Input Audio setting includes the following option:
Option Sound Mode Description Dynamic Clear Voice Natural Select to enhance treble and bass. Suitable for spoken dialog. Flat setting.

87

Using the Settings

Accessing the Screen Settings
MENU

1. Press MENU ........................

Antenna

Screen
Automatic sizing for 4:3 pictures

2. Highlight .............................

Wide Mode Game Picture 4:3 Default Overscan

Full 0 Off Normal 0 0 Wide Zoom Normal Full Zoom Off

3. Press to select ..................... To highlight an option and to change settings, press V v B b. to confirm the selection. Press To exit the Screen settings, press .

Vertical Center Vertical Size

Selecting Screen Options
z Wide Mode is not available when using the Freeze function (page 54).

The Screen settings include the following options:
Option Wide Mode Select a screen mode to use for 4:3 sources. Description Wide Zoom Select to enlarge the 4:3 picture, to fill the 16:9 screen, keeping the original image as much as possible. Select to return the 4:3 picture to its original size and aspect ratio.

Normal


Full

Normal is not available when you are watching 720p or 1080i sources. Select to enlarge the 4:3 picture horizontally only, to fill the display area. Select to enlarge the 4:3 picture horizontally and vertically to an equal aspect ratio that fills the wide screen.

Zoom

To change from one Wide Mode setting to another, use the WIDE button on the remote control (see page 46). Allows you to move the position of the picture left and right in the window. (This feature also allows you to adjust the picture from any connected equipment.) Select while watching the picture to be adjusted. The TV stores the position in memory for each input. Press B or b and press to choose a correction between +10 and –10.

Game Picture

88

Using the Settings Option z If 4:3 Default is set to anything but Off, the Wide Mode setting changes only for the current channel. When you change channels (or inputs), Wide Mode is automatically replaced with the 4:3 Default setting. To retain the current Wide Mode setting as channels and inputs are changed, set 4:3 Default to Off. 4:3 Default Select the default screen mode to use for 4:3 sources. Description Wide Zoom Select to enlarge the 4:3 picture, to fill the 16:9 screen, keeping the original image as much as possible. Select to return the 4:3 picture to normal mode. Select to enlarge the 4:3 picture horizontally only, to fill the display area. Select to enlarge the 4:3 picture horizontally and vertically to an equal aspect ratio that fills the wide screen. Select to continue using the current screen mode setting when the channel or input is changed. Select to display the picture within the normal viewing area of the screen. Select to reduce the size of the picture to show the overscan (i.e. the portion of the picture outside of the normal viewing area). Using the Settings

Normal Full Zoom

Off

Overscan

Normal +1 or +2

Vertical Center

Allows you to move the position of the picture up and down in the window. (Available only in Zoom and Wide Zoom mode.) to choose a correction between +10 Press V or v and press and –10. Allows you to adjust the vertical size of the picture. (Available only in Zoom and Wide Zoom mode.) Press V or v and press to choose a correction between +10 and –10.

Vertical Size

89

Using the Settings

Accessing the Channel Settings
MENU

1. Press MENU ........................

Antenna

Channel
Program favorite channels
Favorite Channels

Program
Off

2. Highlight .............................

Channel Fix Digital Channels Auto Program Show/Hide Channels

3. Press to select ..................... To highlight an option and to change settings, press V v B b. to confirm the selection. Press To exit the Channel settings, press .

Label Channels

Selecting Channel Options

The Channel settings include the following options:
Option Favorite Channels Description Lets you set up a list of your favorite channels. For details, see “Using Favorite Channels” on page 58. Turns off Channel Fix. “Fix” your TV’s channel setting to one channel (2-6) and use the cable box, VCR or satellite receiver to change channels. Select one of these settings if you have connected the device to the VHF/UHF jack. “Fix” your TV’s channel setting to C2–C6 (CABLE input) and use the cable box or satellite receiver to change channels. Use when connecting a cable box. TV output should be connected through the cable box. Automatically adds the channel list on the TV for all receivable digital channels for current input. Select to start the Add.

Channel Fix Off Useful when you 2-6 have a cable box or satellite receiver connected C2–C6

Video 1, 4 Digital Channels Add

Auto Program

Automatically sets up the channel list on the TV for all receivable channels for the current input (VHF/UHF or CABLE). Select to start the Auto Program.

Auto Program may take between 20-50 minutes to complete. A progress bar will display the approximate progress of the Auto Program and Digital Channels/Add sequences. Auto Program will create a list of receivable channels for the current input (VHF/UHF antenna or CABLE). You will be required to run Auto Program for each RF input to create a list of available channels from both inputs.

90

Using the Settings Option z Channels that you set to Hidden can only be accessed with the 0-9 buttons. Show/Hide Channels Description Allows you to show or hide channels that appear in the Program Guide and when you use the CH+/- buttons to channel surf. Channels that are set to Hidden do not appear in the Program Guide or when you use the CH+/- buttons.

1

Press V or v to highlight the channel that you want to show or hide. To move between the Major and Digital subchannel lists, press B or b.

2 3 ✍

To change a channel’s setting to Shown or Hidden, press

.
To show or hide more channels, repeat steps 1 and 2. If you select to hide or show a major digital channel, all the subchannels are automatically hidden or shown. To show or hide an individual sub-channel within a digital channel, you must individually select that sub-channel to show or hide. Using the Settings If you hide all sub-channels of a major digital channel, that digital channel is automatically set to Hidden.

Label Channels Allows you to assign labels (such as station call letters) to channel numbers.

1 2

Press V or v to scroll through the channel numbers. Then press to select the channel number that you want to assign a label. Press V or v to scroll through the label characters (A-Z, 09, etc.). Then press to select the highlighted character. Repeat to add characters to the label.

3

Press B to return to the Channel setting, or press MENU to exit the settings.

91

Using the Settings

Accessing the Parental Lock Settings
MENU

1. Press MENU ........................

Antenna

Parental Lock
Press to change settings
Off Off Child U. S. A. Youth Y. Adult Custom Parental Lock

2. Highlight .............................

Change Password Select Country

3. Press to select ..................... To highlight an option and to change settings, press V v B b. to confirm the selection. Press To exit the Parental Lock settings, press . The Parental Lock setting allows you to set up the TV to block programs according to their content and rating levels.

You need your password for any future access to the Parental Lock settings. If you have lost your password, see “Lost password.” on page 113.

Selecting Parental Lock Options

The Parental Lock settings include the following options:
Option Parental Lock Turn ratings on/off and select a rating system Description Off Child Turn Parental Lock off. No programs are blocked from viewing. Maximum ratings permitted are: U.S.: TV-Y, TV-G, G Canada: C, G, TV-Y Maximum ratings permitted are: U.S.: TV-PG, PG Canada: C8+, PG, 8 ans+, TV-PG Maximum ratings permitted are: U.S.: TV-14, PG-13 Canada: 14+, 13 ans+, TV-14 Select to set ratings manually. U.S.: See page 94 for details. Canada: See page 95 for details.

Youth

z If you are not familiar with the Parental Guideline rating system, you should select Child, Youth, or Y.Adult to help simplify the rating selection. To set more restrictive ratings, select Custom.

Y. Adult

Custom

92

Using the Settings Option Change Password Select Country Description Select to change your password. U.S.A. Canada Select to use U.S.A. ratings (see page 94). Select to use Canadian ratings (see page 95).

To deactivate the parental control feature ❑

Set Parental Lock to Off when in the Parental Lock setting.

To change the password z For descriptions of Child, Youth, and Y.Adult ratings, see page 92.

1 2 3 4

In the Parental Lock setting, use the arrow buttons to highlight Change Password, and press to select it. Enter a new four-digit password using the 0-9 buttons. Confirm the new password by entering it again. Press MENU to exit the setting screen.
Using the Settings

Viewing Blocked Programs

You can view a blocked program by entering the password.

1 2

Press ENTER when tuned to a blocked program. Enter your password using the 0-9 buttons. Parental Lock will be canceled temporarily until you turn your TV off.

93

Using the Settings

Selecting Custom Rating Options
z To ensure maximum blocking capability, the age-based ratings should be blocked.

US custom rating options

If you selected U.S.A. as the country of residence on page 93, the Custom Rating setting includes the following options. (If you selected Canada, see page 95.)
Option Movie Rating Description G PG PG-13 R NC-17 and X TV Rating Block programs by their rating, content or both TV-Y TV-Y7 TV-G TV-PG TV-14 TV-MA FV D L S V All children and general audiences. Parental guidance suggested. Parental guidance for children under 13. Restricted viewing, parental guidance is suggested for children under 17. No one 17 and under.

Age-Based Options All children. Directed to children age 7 and older. General audience. Parental guidance suggested. Parents strongly cautioned. Mature audience only. Fantasy violence. Suggestive dialog. Strong language. Sexual situations. Violence. Allows programs and movies that are broadcast without a rating. Blocks all programs and movies that are broadcast without a rating.

Content-Based Options

z If you select Block, be aware that the following programs may be blocked: news, sports, weather, emergency broadcasts, political programs, public service announcements, and religious programs.

Unrated Allow Block programs or movies that are Block broadcast without a rating

The content ratings will increase depending on the level of the agebased rating. For example, a program with a TV-PG V (Violence) rating may contain moderate violence, while a TV-14 V (Violence) rating may contain more intense violence.

94

Using the Settings Canadian custom rating options

If you selected Canada as the country of residence on page 93, the Custom Rating setting includes the following options. (If you selected U.S.A., see page 94.)
Option English Rating Description C C8+ G PG 14+ 18+ French Rating G 8 ans+ 13 ans+ 16 ans+ 18 ans+ U.S.A. Rating All children. Children 8 years and older. General programming. Parental guidance. Viewers 14 and older. Adult programming. General programming. Not recommended for ages under 8. Not recommended for ages under 13. Not recommended for ages under 16. Programming restricted to adults. Using the Settings

See “TV Rating” on page 94 for details.

95

Using the Settings

Accessing the Setup Settings
1. Press MENU.......................
MENU

Antenna

Setup
Select Caption Vision options
Caption Vision Off On On Off Program English Off Gray Off Standard

2. Highlight ............................

Info Banner Label Video Inputs Language i.LINK Standby

3. Press to select .................... To highlight an option and to change settings, press V v B b. to confirm the selection. Press To exit the Setup settings, press .

Menu Color High Altitude Power Saving

Selecting Setup Options

The Setup settings include the following options:
Option Caption Vision Description Allows you to select from four closed caption modes (for programs that are broadcast with closed captioning). On Off Program Caption Vision is turned on. Caption Vision is turned off. Allows you to set basic and advanced Caption Vision options. See “Programming Caption Vision” on page 98.

Info Banner

Set to On or Off. Select On to display the program name, time remaining and other information (if the broadcaster offers this service). Also displays when the channel is changed or the DISPLAY button is pressed. Allows you to label the audio/video equipment you have connected to the TV so you can identify them when using the TV/VIDEO button to select inputs. 1 Press V or v to highlight an input to label, then press to select it. 2 Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the labels. 3 Press to select the equipment you connected to each of the input jacks on your TV. Select Skip if you do not have any equipment connected to a particular input.

Label Video Inputs

96

Using the Settings Option Label Video Inputs
(Continued)

Description Video 1-3 Video 1-3, VHS, DVD, Receiver, Satellite, Cable Box, 8mm, DTV, Game, LD, Beta, Skip Video 4-7, DVD, Satellite, Cable Box, DTV, HD, Game, PVR, Skip Video 8 (PC), Skip

Video 4-7 Video 8 (PC)


Language i.LINK Standby

If you select Skip, your TV skips the selected connection when you press TV/VIDEO.

Select to display all on-screen settings in your language of choice: English, Español, Français. On Allows the i.LINK signal to pass through to connected i.LINK devices even when the TV is turned off. The front panel POWER/STANDBY LED shows red. The TV uses more standby power than when this option is set to Off. Does not allow the i.LINK signal to pass through to connected i.LINK devices when the TV is turned off. The TV uses less standby power than when this option is set to On.

z If a CableCARD is inserted, the i.LINK Standby Off setting uses the same amount of power as the i.LINK Standby On setting.

Using the Settings

Off

Menu Color High Altitude Power Saving

Enables you to select a specific color for the on-screen settings: Gray, Red, Green, Indigo and Purple. Select On to use the TV at an altitude of 5,000 feet (1,500 m) or higher. Select Off to use the TV at normal altitude. Standard Reduced Select to view picture without the benefit of Power Saving. Select to view picture with reduced power consumption. The picture becomes darker, but also enhances the black level.

97

Using the Settings

Programming Caption Vision

If you selected the Program option under Caption Vision (see page 96), you can change the following settings:
Option Basic Description Allows you to select basic analog (EIA-608) closed caption options. CC1, CC2, CC3, CC4 Displays a printed version of the dialog or sound effects of a program. (Should be set to CC1 for most programs.)

Text1, Text2, Displays network/station information presented using Text3, Text4 either half or the whole screen (if available). Advanced Digital CC Advanced Settings Allows you to select advanced digital (EIA-708) closed caption options. Select from the available options. Allows you to set digital closed captioning to Basic (digital EIA-608) or Advanced (digital EIA-708). Allows you to make additional settings for digital (EIA-708) closed caption options. Select from As Broadcast, Small Text, Large Text, and Custom. Custom Allows you to customize the following settings: Character Size Character Style Character Color Edge Color Edge Type Small, Standard, Large Style 1-7 Color 1-8 Color 1-8 None, Raised, Depressed, Outline, Left shadow, Right shadow None, Color 1-8 None, Color 1-8

Background Color Window Color

98

Using the Settings

Selecting PC Setup Options
z When there is no signal input, settings for the PC Setup options except Power Management cannot be changed.

To display the PC screen: ❑

See “Using the PC Input” on page 60.

Setup Auto Adjustment Phase Pitch Horizontal Center Vertical Center Adjust PC setup options Resolution − − − x − − − / − − Hz
MENU Exit

The PC Input Setup setting includes the following options:
Option Auto Adjustment Description Select to automatically adjust the display position of the picture when the TV receives an input signal from the connected PC. Note that Auto Adjustment may not work well with certain input signals. In such cases, manually adjust the options below. Select to adjust the phase when the screen flickers. Select to adjust the pitch when the picture has unwanted vertical stripes. Select to adjust the horizontal position of the picture. Allows you to move the picture left and right in the window. Press B or b and press to choose a correction between +63 and -64. Select to adjust the vertical position of the picture. Allows you to move the picture up and down in the window. Press B or b and press to choose a correction between +63 and -64. Normal Full 1 Full 2 Select to display the picture in its original size. Select to enlarge the picture to fill the display area, keeping its original horizontal-to-vertical ratio. Select to enlarge the picture to fill the display area. Using the Settings

Phase Pitch Horizontal Center Vertical Center

Wide Mode

✍ ✍
z A warning message will appear before switching to the power saving mode.

A black frame will appear on the surrounding of the picture. When using SXGA signals and Wide Mode is set to Normal, the top and bottom of the picture will be cropped. When it is set to either Full 1 or Full 2 with SXGA signals, the picture will appear in reduced size. Select to automatically switch to the power saving mode when there is no signal input for 10 minutes. POWER/STANDBY LED will light up in red when your TV is in the power saving mode. Select to turn off Power Management.

Power Management

On


Off Reset

Select to restore the factory default settings.

(Continued)

99

Using the Settings PC Input Signal Compatibility Chart Resolution Signal VGA Horizontal (Pixel) Vertical (Line) 640 400 720 640 640 640 SVGA 640 800 800 800 800 800 XGA 1024 1024 1024 1024 WXGA SXGA 1280 1280 400 480 480 480 480 600 600 600 600 600 768 768 768 768 768 1024 Horizontal frequency (kHz) 31.5 31.5 31.5 37.9 37.5 43.3 35.1 37.9 48.1 46.9 53.7 48.4 56.5 60 68.7 47.8 64 Vertical frequency VESA standard (Hz) 70 70 60 72 75 85 56 60 72 75 85 60 70 75 85 60 60 –* –* –* ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

*: Corresponding to the VGA signal

✍ ✍ ✍ ✍

This TV does not support Sync on Green or Composite Sync. If a signal other than in the above chart is input, it may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed as you set. Normal display mode is not available when the signal other than 60 is used for Vertical frequency. For best results, use a Vertical frequency of 60 for your PC. If unsupported signals are used, you will see the message, “Unsupported Signal”.

100

Using the Settings

Accessing the Applications Settings
MENU

1. Press MENU .......................

Antenna

Applications
Start Memory Stick application
Memory Stick

Start

2. Highlight.............................

i.LINK Clock/Timers Diagnostics

3. Press to select ................... To highlight an option and to change settings, press V v B b. to confirm the selection. Press To exit the Applications settings, press .

CableCARD

Using the Settings

Selecting Applications Options
z You can also use the MEMORY STICK and i.LINK buttons on the remote control.

The Applications settings include the following options:
Option Memory Stick i.LINK Clock/Timers Description Start Start Displays the Memory Stick Viewer. For details, see page 61. Displays the i.LINK Device List. For details, see page 75.

Select to set the clock and to program your TV to turn on and off at two scheduled viewing times. Sleep Allows you to select the amount of time (Off, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 60 minutes or 90 minutes) that you want the TV to remain on before shutting off automatically. You can use the Timers to program the TV to turn on and off and tune to a specific channel at two scheduled viewing times.

Timer 1 Timer 2

Timer 1 and Timer 2 cannot be set until you set the Current Time.

1 ✍

Press V or v to highlight Timer 1 or Timer 2. To set the timer, press b. To go directly to programming Timer 1 or 2, press instead of pressing b.

(Continued)

101

Using the Settings Option Clock/Timers (Continued) Description

2

Press V or v to highlight one of the following options, then . press Program Off Select to set the Timer by day, time, duration, and channel. Select to turn off the Timer. (Your previous settings are saved.)

3

If you selected Program in step 2, press V and v to set the day(s), hour, minute, AM/PM, duration, and channel or press b to confirm each setting and number. Press move to the next setting. Press B to go back to the previous setting. Press MENU to exit the setting screen. An LED on the front panel will light, indicating the Timer has been set. You can set the current time. to select Current Time.

4

Current Time

1 2

Press

Press V and v to set the current time (day, hour, minute, (or press b) to confirm each and AM/PM). Press setting and move to the next setting. Press B to go back the previous setting. Press MENU to exit the setting screen.

3
Diagnostics

Display diagnostics information about the TV. This can be useful in providing information to an authorized technician or repair person. This list of selectable CableCARD options will vary, depending on your cable service provider.

CableCARD

102

Other Information
Overview
This chapter includes the following topics:
Topic Contacting Sony Replacing the Lamp Troubleshooting Specifications Optional accessories: Index Page 103 104 108 115 116 117

Contacting Sony
If, after reading these operating instructions, you have additional questions related to the use of your Sony television, please call our Customer Information Services Center. For US residents: 1-800-222-SONY (7669) or visit http://www.sonystyle.com/tv/ 1-877-899-SONY (7669) or visit http://www.sonystyle.ca/tv/
Other Information

For Canadian residents:

Before calling Sony customer support, please write down the model and serial numbers of your TV. You’ll find this information on the front cover of this manual.

103

Other Information

Replacing the Lamp
The projection lamp, which illuminates the picture, has a limited life. If the screen becomes dark, the color looks unusual, or the LAMP indicator on the front of the TV flashes, this indicates the lamp needs to be replaced with a new one (not supplied).
WARNING Electric appliances can cause fire or high temperature, resulting in injury or death. Be sure to follow the instructions below. ❑ ❑ ❑

Use a Sony XL-5100 replacement lamp (not supplied) for replacement. Use of any other lamp may damage the TV. Do not remove the lamp for any purpose other than replacement. Doing so may cause injury or fire. Do not put flammable materials and metal objects inside the lamp receptacle of the TV after removing the lamp. Doing so may cause fire or electrical shock. Do not touch the lamp receptable once the lamp has been removed. When the lamp eventually burns out, you may hear a noticeable “pop” sound. This is normal and it is inherent to this type of lamp. In rare instances, the bulb may pop inside the lamp unit, but the lamp unit is designed to contain all of the broken glass pieces inside the lamp unit. The lamps contain mercury. For proper disposal of the used lamps, follow and observe the local ordinances. See page 107.

❑ ❑

104

Other Information

How to Replace the Lamp

1

Turn off the power on the main unit. Wait several minutes, then unplug the power cord. (The cooling fan will continue to operate for about two minutes after turning the power off.) Wait at least 30 minutes after unplugging the power cord to allow the lamp to cool down before replacing it. To avoid being burned, do not touch the lamp receptacle once the lamp has been removed. Take the new lamp out of its package. Do not touch the glass portion of the new lamp.

2 3

✍ ✍

Do not shake the lamp. Vibration can damage the lamp or shorten its life. Avoid touching the front glass of a new lamp or the glass of the lamp receptacle. This may reduce picture quality or lamp life.

4

Turn the screw with a screwdriver counterclockwise and remove the outside lamp cover.

Other Information

5

Pull out the lamp. Place your index finger through the hoop of the lamp handle and pull it upwards, while placing your thumb on the dent on the top. Then pull the lamp out.

✍ ✍

The lamp is very hot after use. Never touch the glass portion of the lamp or the non-designated surrounding parts (shown in gray). After the used lamp has cooled, place it into the empty box of the replacement lamp. Never put the used lamp into a plastic bag.

(Continued)

105

Other Information

6

Place the lamp halfway in. Follow the gutter in the compartment to mount the new lamp securely.
Hold this part of the lamp

The lamp compartment is tilted, as shown in the following illustration.

7

Slide it in slowly by pressing the PUSH part of the front corners of the lamp until it stops with a firm clicking sound to lock.

PUS H

PUS H

✍ ✍

To ensure the lamp is securely installed, press the area marked PUSH before closing the lamp cover. If the lamp is not securely reattached, the self-diagnostic function may be triggered and the POWER/STANDBY indicator flashes in red three times (see page 12).

106

Other Information

8

Place the outside lamp cover back in its place. Turn the screw with a screwdriver clockwise and secure the cover.

✍ ✍

Consult your Sony dealer for a Sony XL-5100 replacement lamp. Take great care when replacing the lamp or plugging in/unplugging the connecting cords. Rough handling may cause the TV to fall, damaging the TV, the TV stand and the floor. Other Information

The used lamp

This product contains mercury. Disposal of this product may be regulated if sold in the United States. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance (http://www.eiae.org). ❑ Do not leave the used lamp near flammable materials or within the reach of children.

Do not pour water onto the used lamp or put any object inside the lamp. Doing so may cause the lamp to burst.

For replacement lamp information visit: U. S. residents: http://www.sonystyle.com/tv/ Canadian residents: http://www.sonystyle.ca/tv/

107

Other Information

Troubleshooting
Twin View
Problem Possible Remedies

I cannot get Twin View to work.

❏ ❏ ❏ ❏

If you are using a cable box to unscramble all channels (as shown on page 25), you cannot use the Twin View feature. This is because the cable box can unscramble only one channel at a time. You can use Twin View to view a signal from a different source that is connected to the TV’s A/V jacks (such as a VCR or DVD player) in the second window by pressing TV/VIDEO while in Twin View. Sources connected to the VIDEO 4, VIDEO 5, VIDEO 6 and VIDEO 7 inputs, as well as digital sources display only in the left Twin View window. Twin View is not available when using VIDEO 8 (PC) IN or i.LINK input. Be sure the Twin View window is set to a video input or channel that has a signal airing. You might be tuned to a video input with nothing connected to it. Try cycling through the video inputs by pressing TV/VIDEO. Try cycling through the video inputs by pressing TV/VIDEO. Check that the Label Video Inputs option is not set to Skip. (See the Setup setting on page 96.) Both Twin View windows might be set to the same channel. Try changing channels in either window.

There is no Twin View window, ❏ or it is just static. ❏ Twin View cannot display anything but TV channels. Twin View displays the same program in both windows. ❏ ❏

Remote Control
Problem Possible Remedies

Remote control does not operate.

❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏

The batteries could be weak. Replace the batteries. Check the orientation of the batteries. Press FUNCTION repeatedly until the TV indicator lights up. You may have inadvertently pressed FUNCTION, which changes the remote control to SAT or CABLE mode. Make sure this unit’s power cord is connected securely to the wall outlet. Locate the unit at least 3-4 feet away from fluorescent lights. If the “High Temperature Warning!” message appears, turn off the TV and wait until the TV’s projection lamp cools down (approximately 5 minutes). If the remote control still does not work, make sure to dust the ventilation slots on the rear of the TV and the cooling fan to provide adequate ventilation around the TV. If you are using the TV to change channels, first press FUNCTION repeatedly until the TV indicator lights up. If you are using another device to change channels, be sure you have not inadvertently switched your TV from the channel 3 or 4 setting. Use the Channel Fix option to “Fix” the channel based on the hookup you used (see page 90). If you are using another device to change channels, be sure to press FUNCTION for that device. For example, if you are using your cable box to change channels, be sure to press FUNCTION repeatedly until the SAT/CABLE indicator lights up.

Cannot change channels with the remote control.

❏ ❏ ❏

108

Other Information
Problem Possible Remedies

Remote control does not operate non-Sony video equipment.

❏ ❏ ❏

If you replaced the batteries to the remote recently, the code numbers for the video equipment may need to be reset. There may be more than one code for the equipment that you are attempting to operate. There is a possibility that some non-Sony equipment cannot be operated by your Sony TV remote. You may need to use the equipment’s original remote control.

CableCARD Device
Problem Possible Remedies

Problems using CableCARD ❏ device or CableCARD services. ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏

Check that the CableCARD is inserted properly (see page 32). The CableCARD device must be activated by your local cable TV provider before you can receive digital cable TV services. See the activation instructions on page 32. Check the Diagnostics and CableCARD setting options (see page 102). (This can be useful in providing information to an authorized technician or repair person.) Contact your cable TV provider. If you have moved, ask the CableCARD provider in your new location for a new CableCARD. Other Information

Memory Stick
Problem Possible Remedies

Image does not display/Cannot ❏ see all files. ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ JPEG image displays ❏ undesirable motion or flicker in full screen. Rotation not saved after ❏ Memory Stick is ejected or Memory Stick Viewer is closed. ❏ ❏ Cannot show (or hide) file information in full screen or Slide Show. Cannot see menu. ❏ ❏

Some variations of MPEG1 movies may not play back correctly. Make sure the image file is a JPEG (.jpg, .jpeg) file or an MPEG1 (.mpg, .mpeg) file. Make sure the Memory Stick is inserted properly (see page 63). Check the Filter option setting (see page 69). Check the Select Folder setting (see page 69) and ensure that files are either in DCF directories if Digital Camera Folders is selected (see page 69), or in the currently selected folder if Select a Folder is selected (see page 69). The maximum number of files the Memory Stick Viewer can display is 2,000 files total, including all JPEG, MPEG1, and MP3 files. JPEGs captured using a digital video camera may appear to display motion in full screen. This is a result of the way digital video cameras record still images, and is not a result of a malfunction with the TV. The Memory Stick might be locked. Unlock the Memory Stick and try rotating the image again. The file might not have information (EXIF data) that is usually generated when a digital camera records a photo. In this case, it is not possible to save the rotation. There might be insufficient space on the Memory Stick to save the rotated file. Try deleting one or more files and rotating the image again. Set the File Information option to On or Off (see page 68).

Press V to display the menu again.

(Continued)

109

Other Information
Problem Possible Remedies

Cannot hear audio while using Memory Stick.

❏ ❏

❏ Not all MP3 files on Memory ❏ Stick are included when the Music/Complete List option is ❏ selected (page 68). MP3 files on the Memory Stick ❏ are not listed. Music files are playing in wrong ❏ order.

Check the TV’s volume or Speaker (see page 87) settings. To hear JPEG voice memo, select the Digital Camera Folders option and set the Filter option to Show All Print Marks. Check that the Music option is not set to Off (see page 68). The Memory Stick Viewer can display a maximum of 2,000 files total, including all JPEG, MPEG1, and MP3 files. Make sure that the file is named with the file extension (.mp3). Only MP3 files that are named with the file extension (.mp3) are displayed in the list. MP3 files are played in alphabetical order, according to the folder in which they are stored. If you want to change the playlist order, rename your files alphabetically in the order in which you want them to play or create a MP3 playlist (.m3u file) on a PC. MP3 files on your Memory Stick only can be played as background music during a Slide Show (see page 68). Some variations of MPEG1 movies may not be compatible with the Memory Stick Viewer. MPEG movies recorded in VX Fine mode with Sony digital cameras cannot be played back with the Memory Stick Viewer. The quality of the movie when enlarged depends on the resolution of the MPEG1 file. See your camera’s instruction manual for details. No Memory Stick There is no Memory Stick in the slot. Memory Stick is The lock mechanism on the Memory Stick is engaged. locked Memory Stick error The Memory Stick in the slot might be damaged; try a different Memory Stick. Format Error The Memory Stick may have been formatted using a PC or other device that is not compatible with cameras. The file is not a valid MPEG1 or JPEG format, or it is a progressive JPEG (which is not supported). The thumbnail is not DCF-compatible. The file is a JPEG or an MPEG1, but the thumbnail is unreadable. The file is unreadable.

Cannot see MP3 list to play music. MPEG1 movie does not play back correctly.

❏ ❏ ❏

MPEG1 quality is poor when enlarged (page 66). Error message is displayed.

❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏

Error icon is displayed.

110

Other Information

Video
Problem Possible Remedies

No picture (screen not lit), no sound.

❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏

Dark, poor or no picture (screen lit), good sound.

No color/dark picture/color is not correct. Only snow and noise appear on ❏ the screen. ❏ ❏ Dotted lines or stripes. ❏ ❏ Double images. ❏ “Black box” on screen. ❏

If your TV does not turn on, and a red light keeps flashing, your TV may need service. Call your local Sony Service Center. Make sure the power cord is plugged in. Press POWER on the front of the TV. Press TV/VIDEO to cycle through the connected video sources. Try another channel; it could be station trouble. Adjust the Picture Mode option in the Video setting (see page 81). Adjust the Brightness option in the Video setting (see page 81). Check the antenna/cable connections. Adjust the Color option in the Video setting (see page 81). Check the antenna/cable connections. Try another channel; it could be station trouble. Press ANT to change the input mode (see page 46). Adjust the antenna. Move the TV away from noise sources such as cars, neon signs, or hair dryers. Using a highly directional outdoor antenna or a cable may solve the problem. You have selected a text option in the Setup setting and no text is available. (see page 96 to reset Setup selections.) To turn off this feature, set the Caption Vision option to Off. If you were trying to select closed captioning, select CC1 instead of Text 1-4. Some wide-screen programs are filmed in aspect ratios that are greater than 16:9 (this is especially common with theatrical releases). Your TV will show these programs with black bands at the top and bottom of the screen. For more details, check the documentation that came with your DVD (or contact your program provider). The compression used by certain digital broadcasts and DVDs may cause your TV’s screen to display less detail than usual, or cause artifacts (small blocks or dots, pixelations) to appear on your screen. This is due to your TV’s large screen and ability to show very fine detail, and is normal for certain digitally recorded programs. Adjust the reality/clarity in the DRC Palette setting (see page 83) to optimize the picture while viewing these sources.

Other Information

Black bands appear at the top and bottom of the screen.

Certain programs on DVD or ❏ other digital sources display a loss of detail, especially during fast-motion or dark scenes.

Audio
Problem Possible Remedies

Good picture, no sound.

❏ ❏ ❏ ❏

Press MUTING so that “Muting” disappears from the screen (see page 46). Make sure the Speaker option is set to On in the Audio setting (see page 87). Make sure the MTS option is set to Stereo or Mono (see page 87). When the HDMI IN input is in use, surround sound, such as AC-3 and DTS, cannot be input. Change the sound setting for the external input device to Linear PCM.

(Continued)

111

Other Information
Problem Possible Remedies

Audio noise.

Communication problems may occur if infrared communication equipment (e.g., infrared cordless headphones) is used near the TV. Please use headphones other than cordless headphones. Also, if you use infrared communication equipment other than infrared cordless headphones, move the infrared transceiver away from the TV until the noise is eliminated, or move the transmitter and receiver of the infrared communication equipment closer together. Increase the volume of the cable box using the cable box’s remote control. Then press FUNCTION repeatedly until the TV indicator lights up and adjust the TV’s volume. The TV’s audio might be set to Auto SAP or Mono, when it might be better set to Stereo. In the Audio setting (see page 87), set the MTS setting to Stereo. If already set to Stereo, switch to Mono (which may reduce background noise during weak stereo broadcasts). If the Speaker option is set to Off and the Audio Out option is set to Fixed (in order to output the sound to your audio system), use your audio receiver to adjust the sound (see page 87). Or, to use the TV remote control, set the Audio Out option to Variable. To turn on the TV speakers, set the Speaker option to On (see page 87).

Cannot gain enough volume when using a cable box. Sound seems weak or insufficient.

Cannot raise the volume on external speakers.

Channels
Problem Possible Remedies

Cannot receive upper channels ❏ (UHF) when using an antenna. ❏ TV is fixed to one channel. ❏ ❏ Cannot receive any channels when using cable TV. Cannot receive or select channels. ❏ ❏ ❏

Press ANT to select the VHF/UHF input (see page 46). Use Auto Program in the Channel setting to add receivable channels that are not presently in the TV’s memory (see page 90). Use Auto Program in the Channel setting to add receivable channels that are not presently in the TV’s memory (see page 90). Check your Channel Fix settings (see page 90). Use Auto Program in the Channel setting to add receivable channels that are not presently in the TV’s memory (see page 90). Press ANT to select the CABLE input (see page 46). Use Auto Program in the Channel setting to add receivable channels that are not presently in the TV memory (see page 90). Certain cable companies have limitations on the broadcast of digital cable channels. Check with your cable company for more information. The digital cable channel may be set to Hidden in the Channel setting (see page 91).

Some digital cable channels are ❏ not being displayed. ❏

112

Other Information

General
Problem Possible Remedies

How to reset TV to factory settings.

Turn on the TV. While holding down the V button on the remote control, press the POWER button on the TV. (The TV will turn itself off, then back on again.) Release the V button. WARNING: The reset will clear all of your customized settings including Parental Lock setting. Press RESET on the remote control while in the Video setting (see page 81). The supplied method will not work for Advanced Video settings. Press RESET on the remote control while in the Audio setting (see page 86). Be sure the Label Video Inputs option is not set to Skip (see page 96).

How to restore Video settings to factory settings.

❏ ❏

How to restore Audio settings ❏ to factory settings. Cannot cycle through the other ❏ video equipment connected to the TV. Cannot operate the settings. Lost password. ❏ ❏

If a setting option appears in gray, this indicates that the setting option is not available. In the password screen (see page 80), enter the following master password: 4357. The master password clears your previous password; it cannot be used to temporarily unblock channels. The LED (see page 16) blinks when the TV is turned on, then shuts off when the picture is displayed. If the red LED blinks continuously, this may indicate the TV needs service. When lit, indicates that the timer is set (see page 16). When the timer is set, this LED will remain lit even when the TV is turned off. If the LED blinks three times, the lamp cover may not be attached securely (see page 106). The LED blinks two times if there is an abnormal rise in temperature inside the TV when any ventilation openings are blocked. The signal from an i.LINK device is being shown. Replace the lamp (see page 104). The screw of the lamp cover may be slanted. Take out the screw, insert it straight into the screw hole, and then tighten it completely (see page 104). If you are connecting a VCR and digital cable box using a splitter, as described on page 37, you must use a special bi-directional splitter that is designed to work with your digital cable box. Contact your cable provider for details. Only analog channels can be recorded to your VCR. When the TV is in use, there is a natural rise in temperature, causing the cabinet to expand or contract and may be accompanied by a slight creaking noise. This is not a malfunction. Advanced Iris applies a mechanical iris system. When Advanced Iris is turned On/Off, a natural creaking noise occurs due to the basic structure of the optical unit. The creaking sound is an inherent nature of this system and is not a defect. If the TV is used at high altitudes and High Altitude is set to On, the cooling fan runs faster and its sound becomes louder. If the TV is not used at high altitudes, set High Altitude to Off (see page 97).

Other Information

TIMER LED on front panel is ❏ lit.

POWER/STANDBY LED blinks in red.

❏ ❏ ❏

LAMP LED blinks in red.

The replacement lamp does not ❏ light up. Digital cable box does not work. ❏

Cannot record digital channels ❏ to VCR. TV cabinet creaks. ❏

A slight creaking noise occurs ❏ from the bottom part of the TV. The cooling fan is loud. ❏

(Continued)

113

Other Information
Problem Possible Remedies

"High Temperature Warning!" ❏ message appears.

This message will appear when there is a rise in temperature inside the TV. Make sure to remove dust from the ventilation slots on the rear and both sides of the TV. In addition, make sure that there are no obstacles in front of the ventilation slots. If no blockage is found, you may need to set High Altitude mode to On, otherwise the TV will turn off. With High Altitude set to On, if the message reappears and TV turns off again, the TV may need servicing. Call your local Sony Service Center. If you have several i.LINK devices connected and operating at once, the TV may not be able to display the signal from the selected device. Turn the other i.LINK devices off, and reselect the desired i.LINK device. If you are using a digital VCR, turn off any Auto LINC functionality of the VCR. For details, see the digital VCR’s user manual. The TV cools down its projection lamp when the power is turned off. It takes up to two minutes for the picture to come back after the TV is turned on again. Wait for a while until the picture comes back.

The signal from a selected i.LINK device is not being displayed.

❏ ❏

The TV does not turn on.

114

Other Information

Specifications
Projection System SXRD Panel Projection Lens Antenna Lamp Television System 3 SXRD Panel, 1 lens projection system 0.61 inch SXRD panel 6,220,800 pixels (2,073,600 × 3) High Performance, large diameter hybrid lens F2.5 75 ohm external terminal for VHF/UHF UHP lamp, 120W, XL-5100 NTSC ATSC (8VSB terrestrial) QAM on cable Visible Screen Size (picture measured diagonally) Channel Coverage KDS-R50XBR1: 50 inches KDS-R60XBR1: 60 inches Terrestrial (analog) Cable TV (analog) Terrestrial (digital) Power Requirements Inputs/Outputs HDMI IN Cable TV (digital) 120V, 60 Hz 2 total American TV Standard ATSC compliant 8VSB ANSI/SCTE 07 2000

2-69 1-125 2-69 1-135

Other Information

Video: 1080i, 720p, 480p, 480i Audio: Two channel linear PCM 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz, 16, 20 and 24 bit


Video (IN) S Video (IN) 3 total (1 on front panel) 3 total (1 on front panel)

Not compatible with compressed sound, such as AC-3 and DTS.

Audio (IN) Component Video Input

6 total (1 on front panel) 2 (YPBPR)

1 Vp-p, 75 ohms unbalanced, sync negative Y: 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms unbalanced, sync negative C: 0.286 Vp-p (Burst signal), 75 ohms 500 mVrms (100% modulation) Impedance: 47 kilohms Y: 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms unbalanced, sync negative PB: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms PR: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms Mini jack Mini jack 500 mVrms at the maximum volume setting (Variable) 500 mVrms (Fixed) Impedance (output): 2 kilohms ✍ AUDIO OUT jacks are operable only when the TV’s Speaker is set to Off. For details, see page 87.

CONTROL S (IN) CONTROL S (OUT) AUDIO OUT (VAR/FIX)

1 1 1

(Continued)

115

Other Information PC IN i.LINK RF Inputs Digital Audio Optical Output (PCM/Dolby Digital) CableCARD Slot Speaker Output Dimensions (W × H × D) Mass Power Consumption In Use In Standby In i.LINK/CableCARD Standby Supplied Accessories Remote Control AA (R6) Batteries Operating Instructions Quick Setup Guide Warranty Product Registration Card 240 W 0.5 W Less than 30 W RM-Y914 2 supplied for remote control 1 1 1 1 D-sub 15-pin, analog RGB, 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms, positive ✍ See the PC Input Signal Compatibility Chart on page 100. 3 total (1 on front panel) 2 1 PCMCIA Type I/II 15 W (L), 15 W (R) KDS-R50XBR1 1,453 × 863 × 478 mm (57 1/4 × 34 × 18 7/8 inches) KDS-R60XBR1 1,674 × 1,009 × 514 mm (66 × 39 3/4 × 20 1/4 inches) KDS-R50XBR1 43kg (94 lb. 13 oz.) KDS-R60XBR1 51kg (112 lb. 7 oz.) 4-pin S400 i.LINK terminal Optical Rectangular (1)

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. Optional accessories: ❑ HDMI cable ❑ HDMI-to-DVI cable ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

Component video cable S VIDEO cable A/V cable Audio cable Optical cable Control S cable : RK-G69 TV Stand : SU-GW12 Theatre Stand System : RHT-G2000 Lamp : XL-5100 i.LINK cables: VMC-IL4415 (4-pin to 4-pin, 1.5 meters); VMC-IL4435 (4-pin to 4-pin, 3.5 meters)
The availability of optional accessories depends on stock.

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. Non-metric weights and measures are approximate.

116

Index
0 – 9 buttons 47 4:3 Default 89 programming 98 CH +/– button 47 Change Password 93 CHANNEL +/– button 16 Channel Fix 90 Channel settings 80, 90 Channel Show/Hide 91 Channels Auto Program 90 creating labels 91 Clear White 84 Clock/Timers 101 Closed caption modes 96 Color Corrector 84 Color Temp., adjusting 82, 85 Color, adjusting 81 Connecting Audio receiver 43 Cable box 25–26 DVD player 39 Personal Computer 41 Satellite receiver 27 VCR 36–37

E
Effect 86 English Rating 95 EXIT button 47

A
About Using the CableCARD Device 32 Adding channels to the channel list 91 Adjusting audio, Steady Sound 86 Advanced Iris 83 Alternate Audio 52 Alternate Video 52 ANT button 46 Applications settings 80, 101 AUDIO OUT 19 Audio Out 87 AUDIO OUT jack, described 19 Audio receiver, connecting 43 Audio settings 79, 86 Auto Program 90

F
Favorite Channels setting up 90 using 58 FAVORITES button 47 Features 9 File 67 File Information 68 File Order 69 Filter 69 Freeze 54 FREEZE button 47, 54 French Rating 95 FUNCTION button 46

G
Game Mode 82 Game Picture 88 Gamma Corrector 84 GUIDE button 46, 51 Guide menu 52

B
Balance, adjusting 86 Bass, adjusting 86 Batteries, inserting in remote 45 Black Corrector 84 BN Smoother 83 Brightness, adjusting 81, 85

D
Detail Enhancer 84 Diagnostics 102 DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) OUT 19 Digital Channels 90 Digital subchannels 52 Direct Mode 82 DISPLAY button 47 Display Mode 85 Display, turning off 47 DRC Mode 82 DRC Palette 83 DTE 84 DVD player using with remote control 50 with A/V connectors, connecting 40 with component video connectors, connecting 39

H
HD/DVD IN jack (1080i/720p/ 480p/ 480i), described 19 HDMI 18 High Altitude 97 High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) 10 Hue, adjusting 81

C
CABLE 18 Cable connecting with VCR 36 Cable box connecting with VCR 37 using with remote control 50 CableCARD device 32, 102 slot 18 Camcorder connection 42 Canadian Rating 95 Caption Vision 96

I
i.LINK 17, 19, 73–78 i.LINK button 47 i.LINK Standby 97 Index 67 INDEX button 46 Info Banner 96 (Continued)

117

Infrared Receiver (IR) 16 Inputs, labeling 96 Iris 81, 85

J, K
JUMP 54 JUMP button 47, 54

L
Label Channels 91 Label Video Inputs 96 LAMP LED 16 Lamp, replacing 104–107 Language 97

PICTURE button 46 Picture Mode 81 Pro 81 Standard 81 Vivid 81 POWER button 16, 47 Power Saving 97 POWER/STANDBY LED 16 Print 67 Print Quantity 67 Program Guide 52 Program Options menu 52 Protect 67

Slide Advance 68 Slide Show 67 Sound Mode 86, 87 Speaker 16, 87 Specifications 115 Steady Sound adjusting 86 Support Belt 14 Surround sound 86

T, U
Timer indictor 12 set current 102 TIMER LED 16 Timer setting 101 Transition Effect 68 Treble, adjusting 86 Troubleshooting 108–114 Turning on/off the TV 16 TV Rating 94 TV/VIDEO button 47 Twin View 55 Twin View button 46 U.S.A. Rating 94 Unrated 94

R
Ratings setting 94 viewing blocked programs 93 REC button 47 Remote control inserting batteries 45 programming 48–49 Removing channels from the channel list 91 Removing the CableCARD Device 33 Repeat 68 Reset 85 RESET button 47

M
Memory Stick button 47 features 61 Index 64 indicator 17 playing movies 66 precautions 70 removing 63 Slide Show options 68 slot 17 troubleshooting 109 viewing photos 65 MENU button 16, 47 Menu Color 97 Movie Rating 94 MTS 87 Music 68 MUTING button 46

V
VCR using with remote control 50 with cable box, connecting 37 with cable, connecting 36 Vertical Center 89 Vertical Size 89 VHF/UHF jack, described 18 VIDEO 8 (PC) IN 18 Video inputs, labeling 96 Video settings 79, 81 VIDEO/AUDIO (L/R) jacks, described 17 View 67 VOL +/– button 46 VOLUME +/– button 16

S
S VIDEO jack, described 17, 18 Satellite receiver connecting 27 Satellite receiver, using with remote control 50 Screen settings 79, 88 Select Country 93 Select Folder 69 Settings Applications 80, 101 Audio 79, 86 Channel 80, 90 Parental Lock 80, 92 Screen 79, 88 Setup 80, 96 Video 79, 81 Setup settings 80, 96 Sharpness, adjusting 81 Show/Hide Channels 91 SLEEP button 46

N
Noise Reduction 82

O
Off, turning off the TV 16 On, turning on the TV 16 Overscan 89

P, Q
Parental Lock settings 80, 92 Password, changing 93 PC IN jack 18 PC Input 85, 87, 99 Personal Computer connecting 41 Picture 81, 85

W, X, Y
White Balance 84 WIDE button 46 Wide Mode 88 Wide Screen Mode, described 10

118

http://www.sony.net/

Printed on 100% recycled paper.
Printed in Japan